m400 Manual v15

Information
When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as
shown below.
Version 1.5
FINLAND RUSSIA
ASIA EUROPE Roland Scandinavia As, MuTek
OCEANIA
Filial Finland Dorozhnaya ul.3,korp.6
Roland Corporation
INDONESIA AUSTRIA/BELGIUM/ Elannontie 5 117 545 Moscow, RUSSIA
Australia Pty.,Ltd.
FRANCE/GERMANY/
Owner’s Manual
FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND TEL: (095) 981-4967
PT. Citra IntiRama 38 Campbell Avenue
TEL: (0)9 68 24 020
JL. Cideng Timur No. 15J-15O HOLLAND/ Dee Why West, NSW 2099
Jakarta Pusat LUXEMBOURG/ AUSTRALIA
INDONESIA SLOVAKIA
TEL: (021) 632-4170 PORTUGAL/SPAIN/ HUNGARY DAN Acoustic s.r.o. For Australia
SWITZERLAND Roland East Europe Ltd. Povazská 18. TEL: (02) 9982 8266
Roland Iberia, S.L. Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83 SK - 940 01 Nové Zámky For New Zealand
Paseo García Faria, 33-35 H-2046 Torokbalint, HUNGARY TEL: (035) 6424 330 TEL: (09) 3098 715
TAIWAN 08005 Barcelona SPAIN TEL: (23) 511011
ROLAND TAIWAN TEL: 93 493 91 00
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD. SWEDEN
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung Shan NORWAY Roland Scandinavia A/S NORTH AMERICA
N.Road Sec.2, Taipei, TAIWAN, CROATIA Roland Scandinavia Avd. SWEDISH SALES OFFICE
R.O.C. ART-CENTAR Kontor Norge Danvik Center 28, 2 tr. CANADA
TEL: (02) 2561 3339 Degenova 3. Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95 S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN Roland Canada Ltd.
HR - 10000 Zagreb Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo TEL: (0)8 702 00 20 (Head Office)
Ver.1.5
TEL: (1) 466 8493 NORWAY 5480 Parkwood Way, Richmond
SINGAPORE/ TEL: 2273 0074 B. C., V6V 2M4 CANADA
MALAYSIA UKRAINE TEL: (604) 270 6626
Roland Asia Pacific Sdn. CZECH REP. EURHYTHMICS Ltd.
Bhd. CZECH REPUBLIC POLAND P.O.Box: 37-a. Roland Canada Ltd.
DISTRIBUTOR s.r.o ROLAND POLSKA SP. Z O.O. Nedecey Str. 30 (Toronto Office)
45-1, Block C2, Jalan PJU 1/39, 170 Admiral Boulevard
Voctárova 247/16 UL. Gibraltarska 4. UA - 89600 Mukachevo,
Dataran Prima, 47301 Petaling Mississauga ON L5T 2N6
CZ - 180 00 PRAHA 8, PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND UKRAINE
Jaya, Selangor, MALAYSIA CANADA
CZECH REP. TEL: (022) 679 44 19 TEL: (03131) 414-40
TEL: 3-7805-3263 TEL: (905) 362 9707
TEL: (2) 830 20270
Owner’s Manual
CENTRAL/LATIN ROMANIA UNITED KINGDOM/
DENMARK IRELAND U. S. A.
AMERICA FBS LINES
Piata Libertatii 1, Roland Systems Group U.S.
Roland Scandinavia A/S Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880, 535500 Gheorgheni, ROMANIA Atlantic Close, Swansea 425 Sequoia Drive Suite 114,
BRAZIL TEL: (266) 364 609 Bellingham, Washington,
DK-2100 Copenhagen Enterprise Park, Swansea
Roland Brasil Ltda. 98226 USA
DENMARK SA7 9FJ,
Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B TEL: 360-594-4282
TEL: 3916 6200 UNITED KINGDOM
Parque Industrial San Jose
TEL: (01792) 702701
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL
TEL: (011) 4615 5666
Other CENTRAL/
LATIN AMERICA
Roland Systems Group U.S.
425 Sequoia Drive Suite 114,
Bellingham, Washington,
98226 USA
TEL: 360-594-4282
As of Oct. 1, 2007 (RSS)
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “IMPORTANT
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” (p. 2), “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” (p. 3–5), and
“IMPORTANT NOTES” (p. 6–7). These sections provide important
information concerning the proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in
order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature
provided by your new unit, Owner’s manual should be read in its entirety.
The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference.
Copyright © 2008 ROLAND CORPORATION

5100001157 08-07-1N All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form
* 5 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 5 7 - 0 1 * without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.
For EU Countries
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is
CAUTION The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an Apparatus containing incorrectly replaced.
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the Replace only with the same or
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the Lithium batteries equivalent type recommended by the
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to manufacturer.
ATTENTION: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. Discard used batteries according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). intended to alert the user to the presence of important
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the ADVARSEL! VARNING
literature accompanying the product. Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
fejlagtig håndtering. Använd samma batterityp eller en
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av
samme fabrikat og type. apparattillverkaren.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til Kassera använt batteri enligt
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS. leverandøren. fabrikantens instruktion.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ADVARSEL

Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av
VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS batteri.

Benytt samme batteritype eller en
tilsvarende type anbefalt av
virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan
laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
WARNING - When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following: apparatfabrikanten. tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
1. Read these instructions. 10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched fabrikantens instruks joner.
2. Keep these instructions. particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
3. Heed all warnings. point where they exit from the apparatus. For EU Countries
4. Follow all instructions. 11. Only use attachments/accessories specified
5. Do not use this apparatus near water. by the manufacturer. This product complies with the requirements of EMCD 2004/108/EC and LVD 2006/95/EC.
6. Clean only with a dry cloth. 12. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
7. Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in unused for long periods of time.
accordance with the manufacturers instructions. 13. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing For the USA
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
amplifiers) that produce heat. has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus,
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with not operate normally, or has been dropped. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
replacement of the obsolete outlet. television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
For the U.K.
WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE. (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
GREEN-AND-YELLOW: EARTH, BLUE: NEUTRAL, BROWN: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the
letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. For Canada
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
CAUTION: Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with same or equivalent type.
For the USA
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Compliance Information Statement
Model Name : M-400
Type of Equipment : Digital Mixer
Responsible Party : Roland Systems Group U.S.
Address : 425 Sequoia Drive, Suite 114, Bellingham, WA 98226
Telephone : (360) 594-4282
2
M-400_v15_e.book 3 ページ２００８年６月２０日　金曜日　午後４時５分
USING THE UNIT SAFELY
Used for instructions intended to alert The symbol alerts the user to important instructions
the user to the risk of death or severe or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
injury should the unit be used determined by the design contained within the
improperly. triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of injury or material The symbol alerts the user to items that must never
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that
damage should the unit be used
must not be done is indicated by the design contained
improperly. within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it
* Material damage refers to damage or means that the unit must never be disassembled.
other adverse effects caused with The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be
respect to the home and all its carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
furnishings, as well to domestic indicated by the design contained within the circle. In
animals or pets. the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-
cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.
001 008a
• Before using this unit, make sure to read the • The unit should be connected to a power supply
instructions below, and the Owner’s Manual. only of the type described in the operating
instructions, or as marked on the rear side of unit.
.......................................................................................................... ..........................................................................................................
001-50
008e
• Connect mains plug of this model to a mains • Use only the attached power-supply cord. Also,
socket outlet with a protective earthing the supplied power cord must not be used with
connection. any other device.
.......................................................................................................... ..........................................................................................................
002a
009
• Do not open or perform any internal modifica- • Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord,
tions on the unit. nor place heavy objects on it. Doing so can
.......................................................................................................... damage the cord, producing severed elements
003 and short circuits. Damaged cords are fire and
• Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts shock hazards!
within it (except when this manual provides ..........................................................................................................
specific instructions directing you to do so). Refer 010
all servicing to your retailer, the nearest Roland Service • This unit, either alone or in combination with an
Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be
the “Information” page. capable of producing sound levels that could
.......................................................................................................... cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for
004 a long period of time at a high volume level, or at
• Never use or store the unit in places that are: a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience
• Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should
sunlight in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating immediately stop using the unit, and consult an
duct, on top of heat-generating equipment); or audiologist.
are ..........................................................................................................
011
• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors); • Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable
or are material, coins, pins); or liquids of any kind
• Humid; or are (water, soft drinks, etc.) to penetrate the unit.
• Exposed to rain; or are
• Dusty; or are ..........................................................................................................
• Subject to high levels of vibration.
..........................................................................................................
007
• Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is
level and sure to remain stable. Never place it on
stands that could wobble, or on inclined surfaces.
..........................................................................................................
3
012a 101a
• Immediately turn the power off, remove the • The unit should be located so that its location or
power cord from the outlet, and request servicing position does not interfere with its proper venti-
by your retailer, the nearest Roland Service lation.
Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as ..........................................................................................................
listed on the “Information” page when: 102b
• Always grasp only the plug on the power-supply
• The power-supply cord or the plug has been damaged; cord when plugging into, or unplugging from, an
or outlet or this unit.
• If smoke or unusual odor occurs ..........................................................................................................
103a
• Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been spilled onto • At regular intervals, you should unplug the
the unit; or power plug and clean it by using a dry cloth to
• The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise has wipe all dust and other accumulations away from
become wet); or its prongs. Also, disconnect the power plug from
• The unit does not appear to operate normally or the power outlet whenever the unit is to remain
exhibits a marked change in performance. unused for an extended period of time. Any
.......................................................................................................... accumulation of dust between the power plug
013 and the power outlet can result in poor insulation
• In households with small children, an adult and lead to fire.
should provide supervision until the child is ..........................................................................................................
capable of following all the rules essential for the 104
safe operation of the unit. • Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming
.......................................................................................................... entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be
014 placed so they are out of the reach of children.
• Protect the unit from strong impact. ..........................................................................................................
(Do not drop it!) 106
• Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on
.......................................................................................................... the unit.
015
• Do not force the unit’s power-supply cord to ..........................................................................................................
share an outlet with an unreasonable number of 107b
other devices. Be especially careful when using • Never handle the power cord or its plugs with
extension cords—the total power used by all wet hands when plugging into, or unplugging
devices you have connected to the extension from, an outlet or this unit.
cord’s outlet must never exceed the power rating ..........................................................................................................
108a
(watts/amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive • Before moving the unit, disconnect the power
loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat plug from the outlet, and pull out all cords from
up and eventually melt through. external devices.
.......................................................................................................... ..........................................................................................................
016 109a
• Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult • Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and
with your retailer, the nearest Roland Service unplug the power cord from the outlet (p. 17).
Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as
listed on the “Information” page. ..........................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................... 110a
020
• Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning
• Keep lithium batteries out of reach of small in your area, pull the plug on the power cord out
children. If a child has accidentally swallowed a of the outlet.
battery, see a doctor immediately. ..........................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................... 113
021
• Use only the specified type (model no. CR2032) of
• Lithium batteries must never be recharged, lithium battery (p. 18). Be sure to insert it as
heated, taken apart, or thrown into a fire or water. directed (to ensure correct polarity).
..........................................................................................................
114
• Used lithium batteries must be disposed of in
compliance with whatever regulations for their
.......................................................................................................... safe disposal that may be observed in the region
026
• Do not put anything that contains water (e.g., in which you live.
flower vases) on this unit. Also, avoid the use of ..........................................................................................................
118c
insecticides, perfumes, alcohol, nail polish, spray • Keep the USB memory cover, the REAC caps, the
cans, etc., near the unit. Swiftly wipe away any grounding terminal screw, the lithium battery, the
liquid that spills on the unit using a dry, soft battery panel, the battery panel screws, the power
cloth. cord hook, the power cord screws and any fader
.......................................................................................................... knobs you may remove and the included the
• Never expose Lithium Battery to excessive heat REAC connector and the ferrite cores in a safe
such as sunshine, fire or the like. place out of children’s reach, so there is no chance
of them being swallowed accidentally.
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
4
120
• Always turn the phantom power off when
connecting any device other than condenser
microphones that require phantom power. You
risk causing damage if you mistakenly supply
phantom power to dynamic microphones, audio
playback devices, or other devices that don’t
require such power. Be sure to check the specifica-
tions of any microphone you intend to use by
referring to the manual that came with it.
(This instrument’s phantom power: +48V DC,

14mA Max)
..........................................................................................................
5
IMPORTANT NOTES
291b
In addition to the items listed under “IMPORTANT Placement
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” and “USING THE UNIT 351
• Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment
SAFELY” on pages P. 2 and P. 3, please read and
containing large power transformers) may induce hum.
observe the following: To alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this
unit; or move it farther away from the source of inter-
Power Supply ference.
352a
301 • This device may interfere with radio and television
• Do not connect this unit to same electrical outlet that is reception. Do not use this device in the vicinity of such
being used by an electrical appliance that is controlled by receivers.
an inverter (such as a refrigerator, washing machine, 352b
microwave oven, or air conditioner), or that contains a • Noise may be produced if wireless communications
motor. Depending on the way in which the electrical devices, such as cell phones, are operated in the vicinity of
appliance is used, power supply noise may cause this unit this unit. Such noise could occur when receiving or initi-
to malfunction or may produce audible noise. If it is not ating a call, or while conversing. Should you experience
practical to use a separate electrical outlet, connect a such problems, you should relocate such wireless devices
power supply noise filter between this unit and the so they are at a greater distance from this unit, or switch
electrical outlet. them off.
307 354a
• Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the • Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near
power to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed
and/or damage to speakers or other devices. vehicle, or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes.
308 Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit.
• Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the 355b
POWER switch is switched off, this does not mean that the • When moved from one location to another where the
unit has been completely disconnected from the source of temperature and/or humidity is very different, water
power. If you need to turn off the power completely, first droplets (condensation) may form inside the unit. Damage
turn off the POWER switch, then unplug the power cord or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in
from the power outlet. For this reason, the outlet into this condition. Therefore, before using the unit, you must
which you choose to connect the power cord’s plug allow it to stand for several hours, until the condensation
should be one that is within easy reach and readily acces- has completely evaporated.
sible. 360
308 • Depending on the material and temperature of the surface
• When you turn off the power switch, the M-400’s display, on which you place the unit, its rubber feet may discolor
buttons, and meters will go dark, but this does not mean or mar the surface.
that the main power has been completely shut off. You can place a piece of felt or cloth under the rubber feet
to prevent this from happening. If you do so, please make
sure that the unit will not slip or move accidentally.
Maintenance
401a
• For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft, dry cloth
or one that has been slightly dampened with water. To
remove stubborn dirt, use a cloth impregnated with a
mild, non-abrasive detergent. Afterwards, be sure to wipe
the unit thoroughly with a soft, dry cloth.
402
• Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any
kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or
deformation.
Repairs and Data

452
• Please be aware that all data contained in the unit’s
memory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs.
Important data should always be backed up on a USB
memory, or written down on paper (when possible).
During repairs, due care is taken to avoid the loss of data.
However, in certain cases (such as when circuitry related
to memory itself is out of order), we regret that it may not
be possible to restore the data, and Roland assumes no
liability concerning such loss of data.
6
IMPORTANT NOTES
Memory Backup Before Using USB memory

501b
• This unit contains a battery which powers the unit’s Using USB memory
memory circuits while the main power is off. When this 704
battery becomes weak, the message shown below will • Carefully insert the USB memory all the way in—until it is
appear in the display. Once you see this message, have the firmly in place.
battery replaced with a fresh one as soon as possible to 705
avoid the loss of all data in memory. To have the battery • Never touch the terminals of the USB memory. Also,
replaced, consult with your retailer, the nearest Roland avoid getting the terminals dirty.
Service Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as 708
• USB memories are constructed using precision compo-
listed on the “Information” page.
nents; handle the cards carefully, paying particular note to
the following.
Additional Precautions • To prevent damage to the cards from static electricity,
551 be sure to discharge any static electricity from your
• Please be aware that the contents of memory can be own body before handling the cards.
irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction, or the
• Do not touch or allow metal to come into contact with
improper operation of the unit. To protect yourself against
the contact portion of the cards.
the risk of loosing important data, we recommend that
you periodically save a backup copy of important data • Do not bend, drop, or subject cards to strong shock or
you have stored in the unit’s memory on a USB memory. vibration.
552 • Do not keep cards in direct sunlight, in closed vehicles, or
• Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents other such locations (storage temperature: -25 to 85˚ C).
of data that was stored on a USB memory once it has been
lost. Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning • Do not allow cards to become wet.
such loss of data. • Do not disassemble or modify the cards.
553
• Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit’s
buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks
Copyright
and connectors. Rough handling can lead to malfunctions. 851
554 • Recording, duplication, distribution, sale, lease, perfor-
• Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display. mance, or broadcast of copyrighted material (musical
556 works, visual works, broadcasts, live performances, etc.)
• When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the belonging to a third party in part or in whole without the
connector itself—never pull on the cable. This way you permission of the copyright owner is forbidden by law.
will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the cable’s 853
internal elements. • Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a
557 copyright held by a third party. We assume no responsi-
• A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during bility whatsoever with regard to any infringements of
normal operation. third-party copyrights arising through your use of this
558b unit.
• To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the unit’s
volume at reasonable levels (especially when it is late at
night).
559a
• When you need to transport the unit, package it in the box
(including padding) that it came in, if possible. Otherwise,
you will need to use equivalent packaging materials.
562
• Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use
cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit.
The use of such cables can cause the sound level to be
extremely low, or impossible to hear. For information on Fugue © 2007 Kyoto Software Research, Inc. All rights
cable specifications, contact the manufacturer of the cable. reserved.
562
• The M-400’s center of gravity is located toward the rear of
the unit. When transporting the M-400, grasp it firmly and
be careful not to let it fall.
562 204
• If the display becomes extremely dim, it is possible that * Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of
the display backlight has malfunctioned. If this occurs, Microsoft Corporation.
you must contact your dealer or a Roland service center. 206j
562 * Windows® is known officially as: “Microsoft® Windows®
• Due to the nature of the display, there may be screen operating system.”
pixels that remain lit or that fail to light; please be aware
that this is not a malfunction or a defect.
7
Functionality added
REAC
Functionality added in version • The input from the S-4000S can now be distributed to the
1.10 SPLIT/BACKUP connector (a maximum of 32 channels).
• Support for RS-232C transmission/reception (p. 190)

• Support for the M-400RCS (p. 189) In order to distribute inputs using the S-4000S, the firmware of
the S-4000S must be version 2.010 or later.
Functionality added in version Other settings

1.50 • The MUTE switch can now be disabled for MAIN L/R (p. 196).
Input channels Improvements in panel operation

• Gate/expander/ducking is now supported for all input • You can now use [SHIFT] + GATE [DISP] to turn the gate on/
channels. A maximum of 24 units can be used simultaneously off for the selected channel.
(p. 93). • You can now use [SHIFT] + COMP [DISP] to turn the
• Compressor is now supported for all input channels. A compressor on/off for the selected channel.
maximum of 24 units can be used simultaneously (p. 99). • You can now use [SHIFT] + AUX SENDS [1]–[16] to turn on/off
• Direct out has been added to all input channels (p. 60). the AUX send or MATRIX send.
• You can now use [SHIFT] + USER [1]–[8] to operate user
MATRIX channels buttons 9–16.
• MATRIX1–MATRIX8 have been added (p. 85). • You can now use a top panel [SEL] button to assign a channel to
In addition to mixing audio signals from AUX1–AUX16 and a DCA group (p. 142).
MAIN L/R, you can select and mix any two input channels for • You can now use a top panel [SEL] button to assign a channel to
each MATRIX. a MUTE group (p. 146)
Output patchbay Improvements in screen display

• Now you can select the following items in the output patchbay. • The layout of the top display area has been re-designed, and the
• CH1–CH48 direct out channel display has been enlarged (p. 47).
• Talkback output
• Oscillator output
Effects and 31-band GEQ

• The DELAY UNIT parameter has been added to delay-type
effects (p. 229).
• This lets you specify the delay in any of these units: msec,
Meter, Feet, Frame, or Note.
• When specifying the delay in Note units, the TEMPO parameter
has been added (p. 131).
• When using the top panel faders to control the GEQ, you can
reset a fader to the 0 dB position by pressing the corresponding
MUTE button (p. 135).
User settings
• User buttons 9–16 have been added (p. 177).
• The following items have been added as functions for the user
buttons (p. 209).
• EDIT FX (FX1–FX4)
• EDIT GEQ (GEQ1–GEQ4)
• TAP TEMPO
• The following functions have been added to the user
preferences (p. 178).
• AUX/DCA layer select button
• SHIFT LOCK select button
8
Contents
USING THE UNIT SAFELY......................................................................3
IMPORTANT NOTES ...............................................................................6
Contents
Introduction ...........................................................................................12
Features of the M-400............................................................................................................................... 12
Check the included items ........................................................................................................................ 13
Conventions used in this manual........................................................................................................... 13
Basic knowledge about REAC ................................................................................................................ 13
Placement................................................................................................................................................... 15
Turning the power on/off....................................................................................................................... 17
About the internal lithium battery......................................................................................................... 18
À propos de la pile interne au lithium .................................................................................................. 18
About USB memory ................................................................................................................................. 19
Quick start .............................................................................................20
Preparations .............................................................................................................................................. 20
REAC mode settings and connections .................................................................................................. 22
Input/output patching ............................................................................................................................ 27
Mixing ........................................................................................................................................................ 28
Explanation of the panels ....................................................................32
Top panel ................................................................................................................................................... 32
Rear panel .................................................................................................................................................. 40
Front panel................................................................................................................................................. 44
Basic operation .....................................................................................45
Basic panel operations ............................................................................................................................. 45
Screen operations...................................................................................................................................... 47
Editing a name .......................................................................................................................................... 50
Library operations .................................................................................................................................... 51
Message operations .................................................................................................................................. 53
Input channel operations .....................................................................54
About the input channels ........................................................................................................................ 54
Operations using the CHANNEL EDIT section .................................................................................. 55
Operations in the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen .................................................................................. 58
Stereo-linking channels............................................................................................................................ 62
Specifying a channel name and color label........................................................................................... 63
Copying channel settings to another channel ...................................................................................... 65
Using the channel library ........................................................................................................................ 66
Assigning channels to DCA groups and MUTE groups .................................................................... 67
AUX channel and MAIN L/R channel operations ...............................69
About AUX channels and the MAIN L/R channels ........................................................................... 69
Specifying a channel name and color label........................................................................................... 79
Copying channel settings to another channel ...................................................................................... 81
Using the AUX/MAIN library ............................................................................................................... 82
Assigning channels to DCA groups and MUTE groups .................................................................... 83
Copying the MAIN mix
(AUX channels only) ............................................................................................................................... 84
MATRIX channel operations ................................................................85
About MATRIX channels ........................................................................................................................ 85
MATRIX channel operations .................................................................................................................. 86
9
Contents
Dynamics ...............................................................................................93
Gate/expander operations...................................................................................................................... 93
Contents
Compressor operations............................................................................................................................ 99
Limiter operations (MAIN L/R, AUX1–AUX16)............................................................................... 104
Four-band EQ ......................................................................................107
Four-band EQ operations...................................................................................................................... 107
AUX send/MATRIX send.....................................................................111
AUX send operations ............................................................................................................................. 111
MATRIX send operations...................................................................................................................... 113
Input/output patchbay ........................................................................115
Default settings of the input/output patchbay.................................................................................. 115
Patchbay operations ............................................................................................................................... 115
Input patchbay operations .................................................................................................................... 116
Using the input patchbay library ......................................................................................................... 117
Output patchbay operations ................................................................................................................. 118
Using the output patchbay library....................................................................................................... 119
Metering ...............................................................................................120
About the meters .................................................................................................................................... 120
Viewing the meters ................................................................................................................................ 120
Viewing the channel strip of the channel layer.................................................................................. 121
Editing the meter settings ..................................................................................................................... 122
Effects and 31-band GEQ...................................................................123
EFFECTS screen ...................................................................................................................................... 123
Effects ....................................................................................................................................................... 124
31-band GEQ ........................................................................................................................................... 132
Inserting an external effects device ..................................................137
About inserting an external effects device.......................................................................................... 137
Inserting an external effects device into a channel ............................................................................ 139
DCA groups .........................................................................................141
About DCA groups ................................................................................................................................ 141
DCA group settings ............................................................................................................................... 141
Assigning a channel to a DCA group.................................................................................................. 142
Specifying a name and color label for the DCA group ..................................................................... 143
Using the panel to control DCA groups.............................................................................................. 144
Mute groups ........................................................................................145
About mute groups ................................................................................................................................ 145
Mute group settings ............................................................................................................................... 145
Assigning a channel to a mute group.................................................................................................. 146
Specifying a name and color label for a mute group ........................................................................ 147
Talkback/Oscillator .............................................................................150
About talkback and oscillator............................................................................................................... 150
TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR screen .................................................................................................... 150
Using talkback......................................................................................................................................... 151
Using the oscillator................................................................................................................................. 152
Monitor/Solo ........................................................................................154
About monitoring................................................................................................................................... 154
Using Monitor ......................................................................................................................................... 156
Using Solo................................................................................................................................................ 156
10
Contents
Scene memory ....................................................................................157

About scene memory ............................................................................................................................. 157
Contents
Operations in the SCENE screen.......................................................................................................... 159
The Global Scope function .................................................................................................................... 163
USB memory recorder........................................................................165
About the USB memory recorder......................................................................................................... 165
Using the USB memory recorder ......................................................................................................... 166
User settings .......................................................................................170
About user settings ................................................................................................................................ 170
Creating and editing user settings ....................................................................................................... 171
REAC applications and settings........................................................181
REAC applications ................................................................................................................................. 181
REAC settings ......................................................................................................................................... 186
Remote.................................................................................................189
Remote functions .................................................................................................................................... 189
Remote settings....................................................................................................................................... 190
Other settings and functions .............................................................195
SYSTEM screen ....................................................................................................................................... 195
Viewing system information and making basic mixer settings....................................................... 196
Saving and loading mixer settings....................................................................................................... 199
Date and time settings ........................................................................................................................... 202
Managing USB memory ........................................................................................................................ 203
Console Lock ........................................................................................................................................... 207
Help function .......................................................................................................................................... 208
Appendix..............................................................................................209
User button functions ............................................................................................................................ 209
Error message list ................................................................................................................................... 210
Troubleshooting...................................................................................................................................... 211
Pin configuration diagrams .................................................................................................................. 213
Requirements for switching hubs ........................................................................................................ 214
Main specifications................................................................................................................................. 215
Dimensions.............................................................................................................................................. 218
FX library ................................................................................................................................................. 219
GEQ library ............................................................................................................................................. 220
Channel library ....................................................................................................................................... 220
AUX/MAIN library ............................................................................................................................... 220
GATE/EXP library ................................................................................................................................. 221
COMP library.......................................................................................................................................... 221
LIMITER library...................................................................................................................................... 221
EQ library ................................................................................................................................................ 222
Patchbay library...................................................................................................................................... 223
Reverb ...................................................................................................................................................... 224
Delay......................................................................................................................................................... 229
Modulation .............................................................................................................................................. 234
Pitch shift ................................................................................................................................................. 237
Channel strip ........................................................................................................................................... 238
GEQ .......................................................................................................................................................... 241
Index.....................................................................................................242
11
Introduction
Features of the M-400

Live mixing console that allows direct connection of REAC (Roland
Introduction
Ethernet Audio Communication) devices

REAC is a next-generation transmission protocol that uses Ethernet technology. It allows a single Cat5e Ethernet cable
to carry up to forty channels of digital audio. Transmission between the M-400 and the input/output unit occurs
digitally, allowing you to construct a high-quality digital mixing system without any danger of signal loss or noise
even over extended distances.
With the M-400 live mixing console at the center, a V-Mixing system can be assembled by connecting input/output
units such as the S-1608 stage unit, S-0816 FOH unit, and the S-4000S 40-channel I/O modular rack.
REAC port for splitting or backup

A REAC port for splitting or backup is provided, allowing splitting of the M-400’s inputs or redundant transmission via
the S-4000S.
Flexible input/output environment

Two REAC ports allow input/output units to be divided between two sides of the stage, or the number of inputs and
outputs to be customized. The rear panel of the M-400 provides eight XLR input jacks featuring high-quality remote
head amps and phantom power, eight XLR output jacks, stereo input, digital output, and talkback mic input, letting
you construct a flexible input/output environment.
48-channel 18-bus mixer

Four-band EQ is provided on CH1–CH48, MAIN L/R, and AUX1–AUX16. There are also twenty-four gate/expander
units and twenty-four compressors that can be used on CH1–CH48, and limiters are provided for AUX1–AUX16 and
MAIN L/R.
Four effects that can be used for send/return or as inserts

The M-400 provides four effects that can be used as spatial-type effects such as reverb or delay, modulation-type effects
such as chorus, or dynamics-type effects such as multi-band compressor. You can connect them via an AUX channel in
a send/return configuration within the mixer, or insert them into the desired channels.
Up to twelve 31-band GEQ units

The M-400 provides four 31-band GEQ units that can be inserted into AUX1–AUX16, MATRIX1–MATRIX8 or MAIN
L/R. In addition, since the four effects can be used as dual 31-band GEQ units, you have the ability to use a total of
twelve 31-band GEQ units.
Up to eight external effects can be inserted

The eight sets of XLR input/output jacks on the M-400’s rear panel allow you to insert up to eight external effects into
the desired channels.
Equipped with USB Memory Recorder for live recording or background

music playback
The USB memory recorder function lets you play back WAV files from USB memory, or record the output of a desired
bus as a 16-bit linear WAV file.
You can use this as a convenient way to play background music or record a live performance.
12
Introduction
Check the included items Basic knowledge about REAC

The following items are included with the M-400. Make sure that all
of them are present.
About REAC
Introduction
• The M-400 itself
• Power cord The REAC (Roland Ethernet Audio Communication) interface is the
* Use only the power cord that was included with the M-400. core of this system. It uses a proprietary protocol based on Ethernet
• REAC connector covers (three) technology, and allows 40 channels of digital audio to be sent via a
• Channel number sticker single Cat5e Ethernet cable.
• Ferrite cores (three) REAC can do the following.
• Owner’s manual (the document you’re reading)

• Cover • Send 40 channels of digital audio
• Send audio up to 100 meters on one Cat5e cable
• A switching hub or the S-OPT option can be used to extend the
Conventions used in this cable.
manual • Use a switching hub to easily split the signal
• The transmission delay between REAC devices is extremely
The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict small (approximately 375 microseconds)
what should typically be shown by the display. Note, however, that
your unit may incorporate a newer, enhanced version of the system
When the signal passes through a switching hub, there will be
(e.g., includes newer sounds), so what you actually see in the display
approximately 200 microseconds of delay for each unit.
may not always match what appears in the manual.
Names About cables

The following input/output units can be connected to the M-400’s Since Cat5e Ethernet cables are used, it’s very easy to connect REAC
REAC ports. devices to each other. Cat5e Ethernet cables are commonly used for
• S-1608 stage unit computer network connections, and have RJ45 plugs.
• S-0816 FOH unit
• S-4000S 40-channel I/O modular rack (Ver. 2.010 and later)
Types of Ethernet cable
In this manual, we may abbreviate these units as the S-1608, S-0816,
or S-4000S, or may refer to them collectively as input/output units. There are two types of Ethernet cables. Although both types have the
Text enclosed in square brackets [ ] indicates a button. For example, same exterior appearance, their RJ45 plugs are wired differently, as
the direction to “press [METER]” means that you are to press the follows.
METER button.
If a secondary name is shown for a button, such as [DISP (BUTTON • Crossover cable
ASSIGN)], the text in parentheses indicates the function that the The internal wiring of the cable is crossed at each RJ45 plug.
button has when pressed while holding down [SHIFT]. This means that the connections of the RJ45 plugs will differ at
In the case of function buttons, the function is given in parentheses, each end of the cable.
such as [F1 (LINK)].
• Straight cable
The internal wiring of the cable is the same at each end.
About the icons
Crossover cables (such as RSS SC-W100S or RSS W100S-R) should be
This owner’s manual uses various icons. These icons indicate used when connecting to the REAC ports on this product.
supplementary information about the M-400’s functions or
operation.
Certain cautions apply if you’re using a conventional
switching hub with this system. For details, refer to “REAC
Indicates important information that will help applications” (p. 181).
you avoid personal injury, or damage to the M-
400 or other devices.
Indicates supplementary information on a re-
lated topic.
Indicates an idea for using the function being
explained.
Indicates a reference page.
13
Introduction
Ethernet connectors
REAC connections
Ethernet cables use RJ45 plugs. REAC equipment provides an RJ45
connector for each REAC port. Here is a typical example of connections using the S-1608.
fig.RJ45andREAC-e.eps When connecting REAC devices to each other, the REAC mode of
Introduction
one device must be set to Master, and the REAC mode of the others
must be set to Slave.
In this system, the M-400 is normally set to be the master (FOH
setting), while the input/output units are set to be slaves.
For a more detailed description of connections, refer to “REAC

applications” (p. 181).
RJ45 plug REAC RJ45 connector Cat5e Ethernet cables up to 100 meters long are supported. If
you need a longer connection, we recommend that you use the
For critically important communication, it is vital to protect the RJ45 optional S-OPT.
plug and connector. For such situations, REAC RJ45 connectors use a fig.connect-REAC.eps
sturdy Neutrik EtherCon plug. Using the EtherCon RJ45 plug allows
a latched-type connector similar to an XLR plug. S-1608 S-1608
Neutrik Corporation provides EtherCon RJ45 plugs as well as The
SLAVE SLAVE
Neutrik Corporation manufactures EtherCon RJ45 plugs, as well as
EtherCon plugs that can be added to the RJ45 plug of commercially Cat5e Cat5e
available Ethernet cable.
REAC A MASTER REAC B MASTER

The RJ45 connectors of REAC ports can accept either RJ45 plugs
or EtherCon plugs.
Cautions for handling Cat5e cables

• Do not apply excessive force to Cat5e cables.
M-400
• Do not bundle (bend) a Cat5e cable to a radius less than 25 mm,
or fold it in two.
• Do not tightly bundle a Cat5e cable.
• Do not place multiple Cat5e cables in parallel for an extended
distance.
• Do not place Cat5e cables near a source of electrical noise
(power supply cord, motor, fluorescent lights, etc.).
Cautions when making REAC
connections
• REAC connections are designed so that noise will not be
produced even if you hot-swap (plug or unplug a live
connection). However in rare cases, noise may occur at the
audio output of the system. To prevent hot-swapping from
causing damage to your speakers or other equipment connected
to the audio outputs, please observe the following points.
• Make REAC connections while holding down the [MUTE ALL
OUTPUTS] of the input/output unit
• Before you make REAC connections, mute the outputs using [F6
(MUTE ALL OUT)] in the MUTE GROUP screen (p. 145).
In some cases, the muted state will continue even after you
release your finger from [MUTE ALL OUTPUTS] of the input/
output unit. In this case, press [MUTE ALL OUTPUTS] once
again to mute, and then release your finger to unmute the unit.
14
Introduction
Placement About the REAC caps

When the M-400 is shipped from the factory, REAC caps are
attached to the REAC ports. In order to use REAC port, you’ll need
Attaching the ferrite core
Introduction
to remove the REAC cap. Take care not to lose the REAC caps you
remove.
You must attach the ferrite cores before using the M-400. This is for
the purpose of preventing electromagnetic noise; do not remove it.
1. Spread the tabs, and open the ferrite core.

fig.core1.eps
2. Attach the ferrite core near the base of the Ethernet cable’s
RJ45 plug.
fig.core2.eps
About the REAC connector covers

When using an Ethernet cable with standard RJ45 plugs, fit the
included REAC connector covers on the REAC ports as shown.
3. Close the ferrite core until you hear it snap shut.

fig.core3.eps
4. Connect the plug with the ferrite core to the M-400’s REAC
port.
Remove the REAC connector cover if you’re using an EtherCon

type REAC cable (SC-W100S/W100S-R). Take care not to lose
the REAC connector covers you removed.
15
Introduction
AC power connections Attaching the power cord hook

Connect one end of the supplied AC power cord to a grounded AC 1. As shown in the illustration, remove the two screws that
outlet, and the other end to the AC INPUT connector to provide fasten the hook, and detach the power cord hook.
Introduction
fig.cord-hook1.eps
power for the M-400’s internal power supply.
Use only the supplied power cords to prevent damage to the

units.
Attaching the power cord clamp

1. Lower the power cord clamp to fasten the power cord.
fig.cord-cramp2.eps
2. As shown in the illustration, fit the power cord hook over

the power cord, and fasten it using the two screws you
removed in step 1.
fig.cord-hook2.eps
16
Introduction
Turning the power on/off Turning the power off

1. Mute the outputs using [F6 (MUTE ALL OUT)] in the MUTE
Turning the power on GROUP screen (p. 145).
Introduction
2. Turn off the power of the equipment connected to the audio
outputs of the M-400 and your input/output units.
Once the connections have been completed (p. 22), turn on
power to your various devices in the order specified. By turning 3. Turn off the power using the POWER switch located on the
on devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunction M-400’s rear panel.
and/or damage to speakers and other devices.
4. Turn off the power of your input/output units.
fig.PowerOnOrder.eps
3 5 6 5. Turn off the power of the equipment connected to the audio

inputs of the M-400 and your input/output units.
INPUT OUTPUT
Before you turn off the power of the M-400, make sure that it is
Cat5e not reading/writing USB memory or reading/writing scene
memory or library data. The data may be destroyed if you turn
4 off the power during such operations.
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other

devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
M-400 on all devices before making any connections.
1. Connect your input/output units (S-1608, S-0816, S-4000S,

etc.) to the M-400’s REAC port.
2. Connect your audio equipment to the audio inputs and
audio outputs of the M-400 and your input/output units.
3. Turn on the power of the equipment connected to the audio
inputs of the M-400 and your input/output units.
4. Turn on the power using the POWER switch located on the
M-400’s rear panel.
When the power supply has started up, a screen like the
following will appear.
fig.ScrMeter.eps
5. Turn on the power of your input/output units.
If your input/output unit is the S-1608 or S-0816, use the power

cord included with the unit to connect the AC inlet of the
input/output unit to an electrical outlet.
6. Turn on the power of the equipment connected to the audio
outputs of the M-400 and your input/output units.
This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval

(a few seconds) after power up is required before the unit will
operate normally.
17
Introduction
About the internal lithium À propos de

battery la pile interne
au lithium
Introduction
The M-400 has an internal lithium battery that backs up the clock
function and the mixer settings. If this battery runs down, the clock
Le M-400 est équipé d’une pile au lithium qui fait fonctionner
function and the feature that provides for the reinstatement of the
l’horloge et préserve les réglages du mélangeur. Si la pile est faible,
mixer settings that existed prior to switching off the power will no
l’horloge et la restauration des réglages du mélangeur ne
longer operate correctly. If a popup message recommending that
fonctionnent pas correctement. Si un message contextuel
you replace the battery appears when you turn on the power, replace
recommandant de remplacer la pile s’affiche lorsque l’appareil est
the battery as described in the following procedure.
mis sous tension, il faut la remplacer comme suit.
Replace the old battery with a CR2032 type lithium
Remplacement de la pile usée par une pile au lithium
battery. Ask your consumer electronics dealer for a
de type CR2032. Il faut s’assurer d’obtenir pile au
“CR2032 type lithium battery.”
lithium de type CR2032 du détaillant d’appareils
1. Back up the M-400’s mixer settings to USB memory. électroniques.
1. Faire une copie de sauvegarde des réglages du mélangeur

interne dans la mémoire USB.
For details, refer to “Saving and loading mixer settings” (p. 199).
2. Switch off the M-400’s power, and disconnect the power

Pour obtenir les détails, se reporter à la rubrique “Saving and
cord from the AC outlet.
loading mixer settings” (p. 199).
3. Remove the two screws that fasten the battery cover as
2. Couper l’alimentation du M-400 et débrancher le câble
shown in the illustration, and detach the battery cover.
d’alimentation de la prise de courant.
fig.battery-panel1.eps
3. Comme le montre l’illustration, retirer les deux vis qui

retiennent le couvercle du compartiment de la pile et retirer
le couvercle.
4. Remove the old battery, and insert the new battery.
5. Attach the battery cover as shown in the illustration, and 4. Retirer la pile usée et insérer la pile neuve.
fasten it using the two screws you removed in step 3.
fig.battery-panel2.eps
5. Remettre en place le couvercle du compartiment de la pile
et le fixer à l’aide des deux vis retirées à l’étape 3.
6. Turn on the power of the M-400, and set the date and time 6. Mettre le M-400 sous tension et régler la date et l’heure
(p. 202). (p. 202).
7. Load the previously saved settings (MIXER PARAMETER, 7. Charger les réglages enregistrés (PARAMÈTRE DU
SYSTEM SETTING) from the USB memory to which you MÉLANGEUR, RÉGLAGE DU SYSTÈME) dans la
backed up the data in step 1. (p. 200) mémoire USB où la copie de sauvagarde a été faite à
l’étape 1. (p. 200)
18
Introduction
About USB memory

The M-400 can use USB memory to store and read a variety of data.
• Record and play WAV files using the USB Memory Recorder
Introduction
• Save and load user settings files
• Back up and recover internal mixer data
USB memory used with the USB Memory Recorder must

support USB 2.0 (Hi-speed).
About the USB memory cover

When the M-400 is shipped, a USB memory cover is attached to the
USB memory connector. Remove the USB memory cover when using
USB memory. Take care not to lose the USB memory cover you
removed.
19
Quick start
Preparations
Switch the user to ADMIN

Quick start
Depending on the user settings, the operations described in this chapter may be restricted. In the interests of
simplicity, we will switch the user setting to ADMIN (administrator).
1. Check the current user indication in the user setting area at the top of the screen.
fig.ScrUserDisp.eps
If the current user is ADMIN, you don’t need to change the user setting.
If the current user is other than ADMIN, switch the user setting to ADMIN as described in steps 2–5.
2. In the USER section, press [DISP] to access the USER screen.

fig.ScrUser.eps
3. In INTERNAL MEMORY, choose “ADMIN” and press [F1 (CHANGE USER)].
4. If an ADMIN password has been set, the ENTER PASSWORD popup will appear.
fig.ScrUserPasswdADMIN.eps
Enter the password and press [F8 (OK)].
The ADMIN password is set by the administrator of the M-400. You must follow the intentions of the M-400’s
administrator for operations related to the ADMIN password.
5. A message will indicate that the user setting has switched.
Press [F8 (OK)] to close the message.
20
Quick start
Return the M-400’s setting to the default state

For this chapter, we will initialize the M-400’s mixer parameters and system settings in the interests of simplicity.
This will reset the REAC mode settings and input/output patchbay settings to the default state.
To initialize the mixer parameters and system settings, proceed as follows.
Quick start
1. Press [SYSTEM] to access the SYSTEM screen.
fig.ScrSystem.eps
2. Press [F1 (INIT)].

fig.ScrInit.eps
The INITIALIZE popup will appear.
3. Move the cursor to MIXER PARAMETER, and press [ENTER] to select it.
4. Move the cursor to SYSTEM SETTING, and press [ENTER] to select it.
5. Press [F8 (OK)], and a message will ask you to confirm the operation.
fig.ScrLdInitSetConf.eps
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled and the popup will close.
6. Press [F8 (INIT)], and the mixer parameters and system settings will be initialized.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the initialization will be cancelled and the popup will close.
The current settings will be lost once you carry out an initialization. For details on saving the current settings to
USB memory, refer to “Saving and loading mixer settings” (p. 199).
21
Quick start
REAC mode settings and connections
Rules for connecting REAC devices

Quick start
When connecting REAC devices to each other, the REAC mode of one device must be set to Master, and the
REAC mode of the others must be set to Slave.
In this system, the M-400 is normally set to be the master (FOH setting), while the input/output units are set to be
slaves.
fig.connect-REAC.eps
S-1608 S-1608
SLAVE SLAVE
Cat5e Cat5e
M-400
Setting the REAC mode
Setting the REAC mode of the input/output unit

1. Switch off power to the input/output unit.
For the S-1608 or S-0816, disconnect the power cord.
2. Set the REAC mode of the input/output unit to Slave.

fig.REAC-modeSW.eps
M, S, and SP on the input/output units indicate MASTER, SLAVE, and SPLIT, respectively.
When you return the M-400’s setting to the factory-set state, the REAC setting will be set to Master (FOH setting).
In order to construct advanced systems, you will need to set each REAC device to the appropriate REAC mode.
For details, refer to “REAC applications” (p. 181).
22
Quick start
Connect the input/output units

Use a Cat5e cable to connect the M-400 to each input/output unit.
fig.connect-REAC.eps
S-1608 S-1608
Quick start
SLAVE SLAVE
Cat5e Cat5e
M-400
23
Quick start
Mic connections
Connect your mic to INPUT 1 of the input/output unit connected to REAC A.
fig.connect-mic.eps
Quick start
S-1608 S-1608
SLAVE SLAVE
Cat5e Cat5e
M-400
Howling could be produced depending on the location of microphones relative to speakers. This can be remedied by:
1. Changing the orientation of the microphone(s).
2. Relocating microphone(s) at a greater distance from speakers.
3. Lowering volume levels.
24
Quick start
Amp and speaker connections

Connect your amp and speaker to OUTPUT 7 and 8 of the input/output unit connected to REAC A.
fig.connect-amp.eps
Quick start
Amp
S-1608 S-1608
SLAVE SLAVE
Cat5e Cat5e
M-400
25
Quick start
Checking the REAC connections

When you’ve made the correct connections, check the REAC connections as follows.
1. Power up the M-400 first, then the input/output units, and wait until the M-400 starts up.
Quick start
2. Press the M-400’s [SYSTEM] to access the System screen.

fig.ScrSystem.eps
3. Press [F2 (REAC CONFIG)].

fig.ScrREACConf.eps
The REAC CONFIG popup will appear.
4. Press [F2 (REAC A)] to access the REAC A tab, and verify that the name of the input/output unit connected
to REAC port A is shown.
5. Verify the same for the REAC B tab ([F3 (REAC B)]).
6. Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
If the input/output units connected to the REAC ports are not detected correctly, check the M-400’s REAC setting
(p. 186), the REAC settings of the input/output units, the connections of the Cat5e cables, and the conductivity of
the Cat5e cables.
26
Quick start
Input/output patching
Input patchbay
Quick start
When the M-400 is in the default state, the input patchbay will be set as follows.
Input channels Input ports

CH1–CH16 REAC A IN1–IN16
CH17–CH32 REAC B IN1–IN16
CH33–CH40 CONSOLE IN1–IN8
CH41–CH42 FX3 OUT L/R
CH43–CH44 FX4 OUT L/R
CH45–CH46 RECORDER L/R
CH47–CH48 STEREO IN L/R
Output patchbay
When the M-400 is in the default state, the output patchbay will be set as follows.
Output jacks Output

REAC A OUT1–OUT6 AUX1–AUX6
REAC A OUT7–OUT8 MAIN L/R
REAC B OUT1–OUT6 AUX9–AUX14
REAC B OUT7–OUT8 MAIN L/R
CONSOLE OUT1–OUT6 AUX1–AUX6
CONSOLE OUT7–OUT8 MONITOR L/R
DIGITAL OUT MONITOR L/R
You can change the input/output patchbay settings. For details, refer to “Editing the input patching” (p. 116)
or “Editing the output patching” (p. 118).
27
Quick start
Mixing
Setting the preamp gain of the mic input, and sending it to the
MAIN L/R bus
Quick start
1. In the layer section, press [CH1-24] to select the CH1–CH24 channel layer.
fig.LayerBtn-qs.eps
[CH1-24]
2. Press the fader module 1 [SEL].

fig.SelBtn.eps
[SEL]
CH1 will be selected, and the upper center of the screen will show the channel number, channel name, and input
port name.
fig.ScrTBChDisp-qs.eps
28
Quick start
3. In the CHANNEL EDIT section, press [CH DISP].

fig.ChDispBtn.eps
CH DISP
Quick start
The CHANNEL DISPLAY screen will appear.
fig.ScrChDisp.eps
4. In the CHANNEL EDIT section, use the PREAMP GAIN knob to adjust the preamp gain.
fig.ChEdtPreamp.eps
As necessary, make settings in the CHANNEL EDIT screen for +48V phantom power and pad.
It is felt that it does not change smoothly when it coordinates the preamp gain, but it is not trouble. In addition,
some noises come out, but it is not trouble.
5. Raise the fader of fader module 1 to send the mic audio to the MAIN L/R bus.
6. When you raise the fader of the MAIN fader module, the mic audio will be output from output jacks
connected to the MAIN L/R output.
29
Quick start
Applying four-band EQ to the mic input

1. Access the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for CH1.
fig.ScrChDisp.eps
Quick start
2. In the CHANNEL EDIT section, press EQUALIZER [ON] to turn on the four-band EQ.
fig.ChEdtEQ-qs.eps
ON
3. Use the knobs of the EQUALIZER area to control the four-band EQ.
For details on using the four-band EQ, refer to “Four-band EQ operations” (p. 107).
30
Quick start
Applying reverb to the mic input

1. Access the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for CH1.
fig.ScrChDisp.eps
Quick start
2. In the CHANNEL EDIT section, press AUX SELECT [15]/FX3 located in the AUX SENDS area.
fig.ChEdtAux-qs.eps
[15] / FX3
The SEND LEVEL knob will now control AUX15.
3. Turn the SEND LEVEL knob to send the mic signal to AUX15.
4. In the layer section, press [CH25–48] to select the CH25–CH48 channel layer.
5. When you raise the CH41 fader, the output of FX3 (St.REVERB) will be mixed into MAIN L/R.
By default, CH41 and CH42 are linked, and the fader values will be the same. The pan of CH41 is set to L, and the
pan of CH42 is set to R.
By default, the input and output of FX3 and FX4 are patched as follows, with a St.REVERB type recalled for
FX3 and a LONG DELAY type recalled for FX4.
fig.FXGuide.eps
FX1
Dual GEQ
FX2
Dual GEQ
L L CH41
AUX15 FX3
St.REVERB
R R CH42
L L CH43
AUX16 FX4
LONG DELAY
R R CH44
31
Explanation of the panels
Top panel
fig.TopPanelGuide.eps
9 11
12 17
5 10 14 15 16
4
13
6 7 8
1 2 3
1 Fader module section p. 33
2 Layer section p. 33
3 Main fader module p. 34
4 CHANNEL EDIT section p. 34
5 Display p. 36
6 Function button section p. 36
7 EFFECTS button p. 37
8 METER button p. 36
9 USB MEMORY RECORDER section p. 37
10 Screen controller section p. 37
11 SETUP section p. 38
12 GROUP section p. 38
13 SCENE MEMORY section p. 38
14 USER section p. 38
15 TALKBACK/OSC section p. 39
16 MONITOR section p. 39
17 USB MEMORY connector p. 39
32
C. Meters
1. Fader module section These indicate the signal level of each channel.
fig.FaderModSectGuide.eps
The OVER indicator will light when a level that exceeds the
A OVER LEVEL specified in the METER screen is detected. For
details, refer to “Editing the meter settings” (p. 122).
B
D. MUTE buttons

These turn muting on/off for each channel. The button will be
C lit if mute is active.
D E. Faders
These adjust the signal level of each channel.
In SENDS ON FADER mode, these adjust the send level from

the channels to AUX.
E 2. Layer section
fig.LayerSectGuide.eps
A
B
C
D
This section lets you control the 24 channels you selected in the
Layer section (p. 33).
This section lets you select the channel layer that will be assigned to
A. SEL buttons the fader module section. The button of the currently assigned
Use these buttons to select the channel that you want to control channel layer will be lit.
in the CHANNEL EDIT section or in the screen. The [SEL]
A. USER layer button
button of the currently selected channel will light.
This assigns the user fader layer to the fader module section.
If all [SEL] buttons of the top panel are extinguished, a channel

For more about user faders, refer to “Editing the user settings”
in a different channel layer is selected. The currently selected
(p. 176).
channel is also shown in the upper center of the screen.
fig.ScrTBChDisp.eps
B. AUX/DCA layer button
This assigns AUX1–AUX16 and DCA1–DCA8 to the fader
module section.
C. CH25-48 button
These buttons have no effect for DCA1–DCA8. This assigns CH25–CH48 to the fader module section.
B. SOLO buttons D. CH1-24 button

These buttons turn solo on/off for each channel. The button will This assigns CH1–CH24 to the fader module section.
light when solo is on.
If the user preference AUX/DCA LAYER (p. 178) is set to

There are two solo modes: LAST mode, in which you can “16Auxes + 8Matrices,” the AUX/DCA layer button will assign
monitor only the channel for which solo was activated most AUX1–AUX16 and MATRIX1– MATRIX8 to the fader module
recently, or ADD ON mode, in which you can monitor the mix section.
of all channels for which solo is on. You can switch between
these modes in the monitor screen. For details, refer to “Using
solo” (p. 156).
33
3. Main fader module 4. CHANNEL EDIT section

fig.MainFaderModGuide.eps fig.ChEditSectGuide.eps
D B A G H I
A
B
C
C
F
In this section you can operate the main parameters of the currently
selected channel.
D
A. CH DISP button
fig.ChDispBtn.eps
CH DISP
This button accesses the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen. It will

A. SEL button
light red while this screen is displayed.
This button selects the MAIN channel so that it can be
controlled from the CHANNEL EDIT section or in the screen. It B. TOUCH SELECT button
will light if the MAIN channel is selected. This button turns the Touch Select function on/off. It will light
if the Touch Select function is on.
By repeatedly pressing [SEL] you can alternately select the

MAIN L or MAIN R channels. The Touch Select function lets you select a channel by touching
its fader.
B. SOLO button
This button turns solo on/off for the MAIN L/R channels. It C. PREAMP area
will light if solo is on. fig.ChEdtPreamp.eps
C. MUTE button
This button turns mute on/off for the MAIN L/R channels. It
will light if mute is on.
D. Fader
• GAIN knob
This adjusts the signal level of the MAIN L/R channels.
This adjusts the preamp gain of CH1–CH48.
This adjusts the attenuator of AUX1–AUX16, MATRIX1–
MATRIX8 and MAIN L/R.
This control is invalid for the following channels.

• Input channels to which you have not patched an input port
• Input channels to which you’ve patched a port that has no
preamp gain, such as an internal port
34
D. FILTER area In this area you can operate the compressor that is provided on
fig.ChEdtFilter.eps
CH1–CH48 and the limiter that is provided on AUX1–AUX16 and
MAIN L/R.
• DISP button
This accesses a popup where you can make detailed settings.
In this area you can operate the filter that is provided for each input This will access the COMPRESSOR popup for CH1–CH48, or
channel. the LIMITER popup for AUX1–AUX16, MAIN L/R. The button
will light red while the popup is shown.

• ON button
• THRESHOLD knob
This button turns the filter on/off. It will light if the filter is on.
This adjusts the threshold level of the compressor or limiter.
• FREQ knob
This adjusts the frequency of the filter.
These controls are invalid for the following channels.
• MATRIX1– MATRIX8
• AUX1–AUX16
• MAIN L/R
You can turn the compressor or limiter on or off by holding
• MATRIX1–MATRIX16 down [SHIFT] and pressing [DISP].
G. EQUALIZER area
E. GATE area fig.ChEdtEQ.eps
fig.ChEdtGate.eps
In this area you can operate the gate/expander that is provided for
CH1–CH48.
• DISP button
This accesses the GATE/EXPANDER popup where you can
make detailed settings. The button will light red while the
popup is shown.
• THRESHOLD knob
This adjusts the threshold level of the gate/expander. In this area you can operate the four-band EQ that is provided on
each channel.
• ON button
These controls are invalid for the following channels. This button turns the EQ on/off. It will light if the EQ is on.
• AUX1–AUX16 • DISP button
• MAIN L/R This accesses the EQUALIZER popup where you can make
• MATRIX1–MATRIX16 detailed settings. The button will light red while the popup is
shown.
• Q knobs (LO-MID, HI-MID)
You can turn the gate/expander on or off by holding down These adjust the Q of each band.
[SHIFT] and pressing [DISP]. • FREQ knobs (LO, LO-MID, HI-MID, HI)
These adjust the center frequency of each band.
F. COMP area
fig.ChEdtComp.eps
• GAIN knobs (LO, LO-MID, HI-MID, HI)
These adjust the gain of each band.

• MATRIX1– MATRIX8
35
H. PAN area
fig.ChEdtPan.eps
If AUX buses are stereo-linked, selecting the odd-numbered
AUX bus will let you adjust the send pan, and selecting the
even-numbered AUX bus will let you adjust the send level.
• SENDS ON FADER button
This button turns SENDS ON FADER mode on/off. It will blink
if SENDS ON FADER mode is on.
• PAN knob When SENDS ON FADER mode is on, you can use the faders of
For CH1–CH48, this adjusts the pan. For AUX1–AUX16, MAIN each channel to adjust the send level to the selected AUX Bus.
L/R, MATRIX1–MATRIX8, it adjusts the balance. Press one of the AUX SELECT [1]–[16] buttons to select the
AUX bus whose send level you want to adjust.
I. AUX SENDS area
fig.ChEdtAux.eps
The main fader cannot be used with SENDS ON FADER.
SENDS ON FADER can be used only to adjust the send levels

from CH1–CH48 to AUX.
5. Display
fig.DisplayGuide.eps
This area shows mixer parameters, system settings, and meters. You
In this area you can adjust the send level from CH1–CH48 or the can use the CHANNEL EDIT section, the function button section,
MAIN L/R channel to the AUX buses. and the screen controller section to perform operations in the
display.
• 1–16 buttons
These buttons select the AUX bus that will be the target of the
SEND LEVEL knob or the faders in SENDS ON FADER mode. 6. Function button section
• DISP button
fig.FunctionSectGuide.eps
This button accesses the AUX SENDS popup where you can
make detailed settings. It will light red while the popup is
shown.
If an AUX channel is selected, or if the MTX SENDS indication Use these buttons to operate the function buttons shown at the
is shown in the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for MAIN L/R, bottom of the display, and to operate the tabs that switch between
this will adjust the send levels to MATRIX1–MATRIX8. display screens.
If a MATRIX channel is selected, this will adjust the send levels 7. EFFECTS button
from AUX1–AUX16 to MATRIX. fig.EffectsBtn.eps
You can turn the corresponding send switch on/off by holding

down [SHIFT] and pressing AUX SELECT [1]–[16]. This button accesses the EFFECTS screen where you can control the
• SEND LEVEL knob effects, 31-band GEQ, and external insert paths. It will light red
This adjusts the send level to the AUX bus selected by the AUX while this screen is shown.
SELECT [1]–[16] buttons.
36
recording of the song currently being recorded will be

8. METER button completed, and recording of a new song will begin.
fig.MeterBtn.eps D. DISP button

This button accesses the RECORDER screen where you can make
recorder settings and manage the song list. It will light red while this
screen is shown.
This button accesses the METER screen where you can view the
meters. It will light red while this screen is shown.
10. Screen controller section

9. USB MEMORY RECORDER section
fig.GenCtrlSectGuide.eps
A B C
fig.RecorderSectGuide.eps
A B C D
D
A. and buttons
Here you can select the song to play, and rewind or fast-forward the E F
playback.
A. Value dial
• Selecting a song
This adjusts the value of the parameter at which the cursor is located.
By pressing these buttons, you can jump to the beginning of the
preceding or following song. During playback, button B. SHIFT button
takes you back to the beginning of the currently playing song. This button has the following two functions.
• Rewinding or fast-forwarding during playback • Some buttons change their function while [SHIFT] is held
down. The function obtained while [SHIFT] is held down is
By pressing and holding these buttons while a song is playing,
printed above the button, enclosed by a line.
you can rewind or fast-forward. Normal playback will resume
• You can hold down [SHIFT] to modify the range by which a
when you release the button.
value will change when you operate the CHANNEL EDIT
section’s knob or the value dial, allowing you to adjust the
setting in finer detail.
These buttons will not function while a song is being recorded.
B. button
You can use the user preference SHIFT LOCK (p. 178) to change
Use this button to start or stop playback, or to start recording.
the behavior of the SHIFT button.
• Playing a song
When you press this button while the recorder is stopped, the C. HELP button
currently selected song will play. This button accesses the HELP CONTENTS popup. If you hold
• Stopping a song down [HELP] and press another button, an explanation of that
When you press this button while the song is playing, playback button will appear in the HELP popup. This button will light red
while the popup is shown.
will stop.
• Starting recording
When you press this button in recording-standby mode, For more about using HELP, refer to the “Help function” (p. 208).
recording will start.
D. Cursor buttons
• Stopping recording
These buttons move the cursor up/down/left/right in the screen.
When you press this button while recording a song, recording
will stop. E. EXIT button
If you press this button while another screen is shown, you will
C. REC button return to the HOME screen. If you press this button while a popup is
Use this button to put the recorder in recording-standby mode, or to shown, the popup will close.
divide the song currently being recorded.
• Recording-standby mode F. ENTER button
When you press this button while the recorder is stopped, the Use this button to turn an on-screen button on/off, or to confirm a
change you’ve made to the settings.
recorder will enter recording-standby mode. Press [ ] to
start recording.
• Dividing the song currently being recorded
When you press this button while a song is being recorded,
37
B. PREV, NEXT buttons

11. SETUP section These buttons move to the preceding or following scene
number. The scene number is shown in the upper right of the
fig.SetupSectGuide.eps
screen.
A B
Simply changing the scene number does not store or recall the
scene.
C. STORE button
Stores the current mixer parameters into the currently selected
scene number.
A. PATCHBAY button
This button accesses the PATCHBAY screen where you can D. RECALL button
make settings for the input/output patchbay. It will light red Recalls the mixer parameters from the currently selected scene
while the screen is shown. number.
B. SYSTEM button
You can’t recall from a scene number in which scene data has
This button accesses the SYSTEM screen where you can make
not been stored.
various system settings. It will light red while the screen is
shown.
14. USER section
12. GROUP section fig.UserSectGuide.eps
fig.GroupSectGuide.eps
A B
A
B
A. DCA button
This button accesses the DCA GROUP screen where you can
control the DCA groups and make settings for them. It will light A. DISP (BUTTON ASSIGN) button
red while the screen is shown. This button accesses the USER screen where you can change or
edit the user settings. It will light red while the screen is shown.
B. MUTE button
This button accesses the MUTE GROUP screen where you can If you hold down [SHIFT] and press this button, the USER
control the mute groups and make settings for them. It will light BUTTON tab of the USER PREFERENCE popup will appear.
red while the screen is shown. This is a convenient way to check the user button settings.
B. USER 1–8 buttons

13. SCENE MEMORY section These access the function that is assigned to each button. You
fig.SceneMemSectGuide.eps can make function assignments in the USER PREFERENCE
popup. For details, refer to “Editing the user preferences” (p.
A 177).
B
By holding down [SHIFT] and pressing a USER1–8 button, you
can access the functions assigned to user buttons 9–16.
D C
A. DISP button
This button accesses the SCENE screen where you can manage
the scene list and make scene settings. It will light red while the
screen is shown.
38
B. DISP button
This button accesses the MONITOR screen where you can make
15. TALKBACK/OSC monitor or solo settings. It will light red while the screen is
(talkback/oscillator) section shown.
fig.TalkbackOscSectGuide.eps
C. SOLO CLEAR button
This button clears (turns off) the solo settings of all channels in a
single operation.

A
17. USB MEMORY connector
fig.USBMemoryGuide.eps
B
C
A. MIC LEVEL knob
This adjusts the preamp gain of the TALKBACK MIC input You can connect USB memory to this connector.
over a range of -10dBu–50 dBu.
B. DISP button Before you disconnect USB memory, make sure that data is not
This button accesses the TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR screen, being written to USB memory or being read from it. If you
where you can make talkback settings and oscillator settings. It disconnect USB memory while these operations are occurring,
will light red while the screen is shown. you risk damaging the data.
C. TALKBACK button
This button turns talkback on/off. It will blink while talkback is
on.
The way in which you press [TALKBACK] will affect how it

turns on/off.
Pressing and immediately releasing the button will alternately
turn talkback off or on (latched operation).
Pressing and holding the button will cause talkback to remain
on only while you continue holding down the button
(momentary operation).
16. MONITOR section

fig.MonitorSectGuide.eps
B
C
A. LEVEL knob
This adjusts the monitor output level in a range of -Inf dB –
+10.0 dB.
39
Rear panel
fig.RearPanelGuide.eps
10 9 8 7 6 4 5 3
1
11
12 2
13
14 15 16 17 18
1 CONSOLE INPUT jacks p. 41
2 CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks p. 41
3 REAC ports p. 41
4 LAMP connector p. 42
5 USB connector p. 42
6 MIDI connectors p. 42
7 RS-232C/MIDI select switch p. 42
8 RS-232C connector p. 42
9 DIGITAL OUT jacks p. 42
10 TALKBACK MIC IN jack p. 42
11 STEREO IN jacks p. 43
12 POWER switch p. 43
13 Grounding terminal p. 43
14 AC INPUT connector, power cord clamp p. 43
15 Cord hook p. 43
16 Cooling vent p. 43
17 Theft prevention lock p. 43
18 BATTERY slot p. 43
40
1. CONSOLE INPUT jacks 3. REAC ports (A,B,SPLIT/BACKUP)

fig.ConsInJackGuide.eps fig.REACPortGuide.eps
These are balanced XLR-3-31 female input jacks for inputting analog

audio signals from mics or line level equipment. Make connections
after first checking the wiring diagrams of other equipment you • REAC A, B ports
intend to connect. These are RJ45 connectors for connecting input/output units
fig.XLRJackInput.eps
such as the S-1608, S-0816, or S-4000S via Cat5e Ethernet cables.
These connectors support Cat5e Ethernet cables up to 100

HOT GND meters long. If you need a longer connection, we recommend
COLD that you use the optional S-OPT.
+PHANTOM[+48V/14mA] The default input/output patching between the M-400 and

input/output units connected to REAC ports A and B is as
follows.
By default, the CONSOLE INPUT jacks are patched to CH33–
CH40. Input channel Input connector
When connection cables with resistors are used, the volume
level of equipment connected to the inputs (CONSOLE INPUT,
STEREO IN, TALKBACK MIC IN) may be low. If this happens, Output connector Output
use connection cables that do not contain resistors. REAC A OUT1–OUT6 AUX1–AUX6
REAC A OUT7–OUT8 MAIN L/R
2. CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks REAC B OUT7–OUT8 MAIN L/R
fig.ConsOutJackGuide.eps
• SPLIT/BACKUP port
This is used as a backup connection for the REAC A port, or for
split connection. You can also use it for multitrack recording on
a PC in which you’ve installed the REAC driver.
These are balanced XLR-3-32 male output jacks for outputting
analog audio signals.Make connections after first checking the
For details on backup connections and split connections, refer to
wiring diagrams of other equipment you intend to connect.
fig.XLRJack.eps
“REAC applications” (p. 181).
The REAC A and B ports and the SPLIT/BACKUP port have

REAC indicators that show the REAC communication status.
The state of the REAC indicator has the following significance.
HOT GND
COLD
Status Explanation
Unlit No connection with a REAC device has been es-
By default, AUX1 OUT–AUX6 OUT and MONITOR L/R are tablished.
patched to the CONSOLE OUT jacks. Lit A backup connection or split connection with a
REAC device has been established.
Blinking Connected normally with a REAC device.
The CONSOLE INPUT jacks and CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks can

also be used as input/output jacks for inserting external effect
processors into channels. For details, refer to “Inserting an
external effects device” (p. 137).
41
4. LAMP connector 8. RS-232C connector

This is an XLR-4-31 type connector that supplies power to a fig.RS232CPortGuide.eps
commercially available gooseneck lamp.

fig.PinLamp.eps
You can use this RS-232C connector to remotely control the M-400
from an external device.
5. USB connector
fig.USBPortGuide.eps
9. DIGITAL OUT jacks
fig.DigiOutJackGuide.eps
This USB connector can be connected to your PC to control the M-

400 remotely. For more about remote operation, refer to “Remote”
(p. 189). These jacks output a consumer format (IEC-60958 compliant) digital
audio signal. Two types of jacks are provided: coaxial and optical.
The same digital audio signal is output from both jacks. By default,
6. MIDI connectors MONITOR L/R is patched to these jacks.
fig.MIDIPortsGuide.eps
10. TALKBACK MIC IN jack

fig.TbInJackGuide.eps
These connectors are for connection with MIDI equipment. An IN

connector (for reception) and an OUT/THRU connector (for
transmission and “thru”) are provided. You can use the REMOTE
This is a balanced XLR-3-31 female input jack for connecting a
popup to switch between the OUT and THRU functions.
talkback mic. Make connections after first checking the wiring
For details, refer to “Remote settings” (p. 190).
diagrams of other equipment you intend to connect.
fig.XLRJackInput.eps
7. RS-232C/MIDI select switch

fig.SerialSelSWGuide.eps
HOT GND
COLD
+PHANTOM[+48V/14mA]
On the M-400 you can use either the MIDI connectors or the RS-232C
connector. This switch selects the connector(s) you will use.
You must switch off the M-400’s power before changing the
position of this switch.
42
11. STEREO IN jacks 14. AC INPUT connector,

fig.StInJackGuide.eps power cord clamp
fig.ACInletGuide.eps

These are RCA phono jacks for inputting analog audio signals from
line level equipment. By default they are patched to CH47 and
CH48. Connect the included power cord to the AC INPUT connector.
Use the power cord clamp to prevent the power cord from being
12. POWER switch accidentally disconnected.
fig.PowerSwGuide.eps
For details on attaching the power cord clamp, refer to
“Attaching the power cord clamp” (p. 16).
Do not connect any power cord to the M-400 other than the
included one.
This turns the power on/off.
15. Power cord hook
If you need to turn off the power completely, first turn off the You can use this power cord hook to prevent the power cord from
POWER switch, then unplug the power cord from the power being accidentally disconnected. This provides greater security than
outlet. Refer to Power Supply (p. 6). the power cord clamp.
13. Grounding terminal For details on attaching the power cord hook, refer to
“Attaching the power cord hook” (p. 16).
Use this to connect the M-400 to an electrical ground.
Do not ground the M-400 to locations such as the following.
• Water pipe (doing so may cause electrical shock) 16. Cooling vent
• Gas pipes (doing so may cause fire or explosion)
This cooling vent cools the M-400. When placing the M-400, take care
• Telephone ground or lightning rod (hazardous if lightning not to block the cooling vent.
occurs)
17. Theft prevention lock

Depending on the circumstances of a particular setup, you may
experience a discomforting sensation, or perceive that the You can use this with a padlock to secure the M-400 from theft.
surface feels gritty to the touch when you touch this device,
microphones connected to it, or the metal portions of other
objects, such as guitars. This is due to an infinitesimal electrical 18. BATTERY slot
charge, which is absolutely harmless. However, if you are
fig.BatterySlotGuide.eps
concerned about this, connect the ground terminal (see figure)
with an external ground. When the unit is grounded, a slight
hum may occur, depending on the particulars of your
installation. If you are unsure of the connection method, contact
the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland
distributor, as listed on the “Information” page.
This slot contains a lithium battery that maintains the M-400’s clock
function and preserves the mixer settings.
If the battery runs down, you’ll need to replace it. For details on
replacing the battery, refer to “About the internal lithium battery”
(p. 18).
43
Front panel
fig.FrontPanelGuide.eps
1 2
1. PHONES jack
You can connect a set of headphones to this jack, and use it to
monitor the MONITOR L/R audio signal.
2. PHONES LEVEL knob

This adjusts the output level to the headphones connected to the
PHONES jack.
44
Basic operation
Basic panel operations Operations in the CHANNEL EDIT

section
Selecting the channel layer Here’s how to edit the channel parameters.
fig.LayerBtn.eps
1. In the fader module section or main fader module, press a
[SEL] button to select the channel that you want to control.
fig.SELBtn.eps
[SEL]
Basic operation
Use the buttons of the Layer section to select the channel layer that
will be controlled by the fader module section. Each channel layer
assigns the following channels to the fader module section.
Channel layer Channels

USER USER FADER1–USER FADER24
AUX/DCA AUX1–AUX16, DCA1–DCA8
(or AUX1–AUX16, MATRIX1–MATRIX8)
CH25-48 CH25–CH48 fig.ChDispBtn.eps
CH1-24 CH1–CH24
CH DISP
If the user preference AUX/DCA LAYER (p. 178) is set to

“16Auxes + 8Matrices,” the AUX/DCA layer button will assign
AUX1–AUX16 and MATRIX1– MATRIX8 to the fader module
section.
3. The CHANNEL DISPLAY screen will appear. Use the
controllers of the CHANNEL EDIT section to edit the values.
fig.ScrChDisp.eps
You can make adjustments in finer increments by holding down

[SHIFT] while you operate the CHANNEL EDIT section’s knobs
or the value dial.
If you want to edit channel parameters that are not shown in the
CHANNEL DISPLAY screen, you can press the [DISP] button
in each area of the CHANNEL EDIT section to access a popup
that lets you make settings in greater detail.
If you’ve selected the CHANNEL SELECT item “CHANNEL

DISPLAY follows CH SELECT button” in User Preference (p.
177), pressing a [SEL] button will cause the CHANNEL
DISPLAY screen of that channel to appear.
45
Basic operation
Accessing a screen
When you press a screen select button that’s lit in green, or a screen select button that has a blue border, the corresponding screen or popup will
appear, and the button will light in red.
The following illustration shows the name of the screen or popup that appears for each button.
fig.DispBtnGuide.eps
HELP CONTENTS PATCHBAY USER

popup screen screen
GATE/EXPANDER EQUALIZER
popup popup
Basic operation
CHANNEL DISPLAY RECORDER SYSTEM

screen screen screen
MUTE MONITOR
COMPRESSOR AUX SENDS METER EFFECTS DCA GROUP screen
LIMITER popup screen screen GROUP screen
popup screen
SCENE
screen
TALKBACK/
OSCILLATOR
screen
Popups are displayed on top of the screen. You can close the popup by pressing the button that turned red when you accessed that popup.
Home screen
To return to the Home screen, press the button that turned red when you pressed it to access a screen. (Buttons that access a popup are excepted.)
A user setting lets you choose either the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen or the METER screen as the Home screen.
For details on how to choose the Home screen, refer to “Editing the user preferences” (p. 177).
46
Basic operation
Screen operations
About the screen display

fig.ScrGuide.eps
Basic operation
2
3 4
1. Top display area

fig.ScrTBScrDisp.eps
A B C D E
This area is always shown in the upper part of the screen.
A. Screen name
This shows the name of the screen currently shown in the main display area.
B. Channel indication
This indicates the currently selected channel’s number, name, and port name.
C. Date/time indication
This shows the current date and time.
D. User setting indication

This shows the current user settings.
E. Scene indication
This shows the number and name of the currently selected scene.
47
Basic operation
2. MAIN level indication 3. Sub-display area

fig.ScrMainMeter.eps This area shows supplementary information. The following
information is shown.
• Indication of the currently edited parameter value

fig.SubDispPrm.eps
Basic operation
When you edit a parameter whose value is not shown in the screen,
or use the controllers of the CHANNEL EDIT section to edit a
parameter, the value is shown here for a short time.
* If you attempt to operate a parameter that has been disabled by a
user setting (p. 176), the following indication will appear.
• Output mute status
This shows the output level of the MAIN L/R channels.

This indicates that the outputs have been muted by means of [F6
(MUTE ALL OUT)] in the MUTE GROUP screen (p. 145), or by
3. Main display area means of [MUTE ALL OUTPUTS] on the input/output unit.
fig.ScrMainArea.eps
• Oscillator indication
fig.SubDispOsc.eps
This is shown if the oscillator is on.
• Recorder status indication

fig.SubDispRcdr.eps
Most screen operations are performed in this area. The name of the
current screen is shown in the screen name indication of the top While a song is playing or being recorded, this shows the song name
display area. You can use the cursor and function buttons to perform and time information.
operations in this area.
Popup indication
These are popups that are shown overlaid on the menu display area.
They provide a cursor and function buttons for performing
operations in the screen.
fig.Popups.eps
While a popup is displayed, cursor and function button

operations are valid only for the popup.
48
Basic operation
Function button operations Button operations

fig.FuncBtnGuide.eps Buttons in the screen are used to turn a function on/off, to execute a
command, or to access a screen. To operate a button, move the
The function buttons are assigned to the main display area of the cursor to the desired button and press [ENTER].
screen or the popup, and are operated using [F1]–[F8]. There are
ON/OFF buttons
three types of function buttons, as follows.
fig.BtnOnOff.eps
• Command function buttons
Basic operation
fig.FuncBtnCmd.eps
These are used to turn a parameter or function on/off. The button is

shown in gray when off, or in color (e.g., red, yellow, or blue) when on.
Popup access buttons

These execute commands or access popups.
fig.BtnPopup.eps
• On/off function buttons

fig.FuncBtnOnOff.eps
These are used to access a related popup.
Select buttons
These turn parameters or functions on/off. The button in the screen
There are the following two types of select buttons.
is shown in gray when off, or light blue when on.
• Radio buttons
• Display select tabs
fig.BtnRadio.eps
fig.FuncBtnTab.eps
These tabs are used to switch between screens.

These are used to select one of multiple mutually exclusive choices.
Only the last-selected button will be selected.
Cursor operations
• Check buttons
fig.Cursor.eps fig.BtnSel.eps
These are used when it is possible to select more than one of multiple
The cursor is indicated by a red frame in the main display area or in
choices. You can select more than one of these items if desired.
the popup. Use the up/down/left/right keys to move the cursor.
ALL/CLR buttons
fig.BtnAllClr.eps
These buttons assist you in operating check buttons. Pressing the

ALL button will select all applicable check buttons. Pressing the CLR
button will clear all applicable check buttons.
49
Basic operation
Knob operations Editing a name

fig.Cursor.eps
You’ll use the NAME EDIT popup to edit names.
Here we’ll explain operations that are common to the NAME EDIT
popup.
Operations in the NAME EDIT popup

Knobs in the screen can be operated by the knobs of the CHANNEL
Basic operation
fig.ScrNameEditGuide.eps
EDIT section or by the value dial. To use the value dial, move the
cursor to the desired fader. 1
You can make more detailed settings by holding down [SHIFT]

while you operate the knobs or the value dial.
Purple knobs in the screen cannot be edited from the

CHANNEL EDIT section.
1. Name edit field
You can edit the name in this field.
Fader operations The buttons and dial will have the following functions in the
name edit field.
fig.Fader.eps
Button/Dial Function
Left/right buttons Move the cursor location.
Value dial Changes the character at the cursor loca-
tion
[F1 (INSERT)] Inserts a space at the cursor location. The
text at the right of the cursor location will
move to the right.
[F2 (A/a)] Changes the letter at the cursor location
between uppercase and lowercase. If the
character is not an English letter, it will be
changed to the letter “A.”
[F3 (NUM)] Converts the character at the cursor loca-
tion to the numeral “0.”
[F4 (DELETE)] Deletes the character at the cursor location.
Faders in the screen can be operated by the corresponding fader The text at the right of the cursor location
controller or by the value dial. To use the value dial, move the cursor will move to the left.
to the desired fader. [F7 (CANCEL)] Cancels any changes and closes the popup.
[F8 (OK)] Confirms the changes and closes the pop-
up.
You can make more detailed settings by holding down [SHIFT]
while you operate the value dial.
There are limitations on the number of characters you can use in

List operations a name. The maximum number of characters will depend on the
screen or popup that uses the NAME EDIT popup.
fig.List.eps
If an INSERT operation causes the name to exceed the

maximum number of characters, the excess will be deleted.
The selected item in a list is shown highlighted in red. Use the up/
down keys or the value dial to select a different item.
50
Basic operation
Recalling data from a library

Library operations
1. Access the LIBRARY popup.
Library operations are performed in the LIBRARY popups. fig.ScrChLib.eps
LIBRARY popups include the following.
Type See page

CH LIBRARY p. 66
GATE/EXP LIBRARY p. 98
COMP LIBRARY p. 103
Basic operation
LIMITER LIBRARY p. 105
EQ LIBRARY p. 109
FX LIBRARY p. 130
GEQ LIBRARY p. 135 2. Make sure that the applicable channel/effect indication
shows the object that you want to recall.
INPUT PATCHBAY LIBRARY p. 117
OUTPUT PATCHBAY LIBRARY p. 119 3. Use [F1 (PRESET)] or [F2 (USER)] to specify whether you
want to recall data from the preset library or user library.
Here we’ll explain operations that are common to these LIBRARY
popups. 4. Select the desired library data in the library data list.
5. Press [F4 (RECALL)].

LIBRARY popup operations fig.ScrLibRecallConf.eps
fig.ScrLibGuide.eps
1 2
A message will ask you to confirm the library recall operation.
6. Press [F8 (RECALL)] to execute the library recall operation

and close the popup.
Alternatively, press [F7 (CANCEL)] to cancel the library recall
operation.
1. Applicable channel/effect indication If “SCENE/LIB RECALL” in the CONFIRMATION section of

This shows the channel or effect to which the library operation User Preference (p. 177) is not selected, a confirmation message
will apply. will not appear in step 4.
2. Library data list

This lists the library data.
The function buttons have the following operations in a
LIBRARY popup.
[F1 (PRESET)] Displays the recall-only PRESET library.

[F2 (USER)] Displays the USER library in which you
can store data or recall it.
[F4 (RECALL)] Recalls the selected library data and closes
the popup.
[F5 (STORE)]* Stores the selected library data and closes
the popup.
[F6 (LOCK)]* Locks the selected USER library data.
[F7 (NAME EDIT)]* Accesses a NAME EDIT popup for you to
edit the name of the selected user library
data.
[F8 (CLOSE)] Closes the popup.
* Available only for the User library.
51
Basic operation
Storing data to a library Locking or unlocking user library

1. Access the LIBRARY popup.
data
fig.ScrChLib.eps
Data in the user library can be locked to prevent it from being
accidentally overwritten. For library data that has been locked, the
indication “LOCK” is shown in the “STATUS” column of the list.
fig.ScrChLib.eps
Basic operation
2. Verify that the desired channel or effect is shown as the

object of the store operation.
3. Press [F2 (USER)] to select the user library.

4. Select the desired number in the library data list.
2. From the library data list, select the desired library data.
5. Press [F5 (STORE)].
fig.ScrLibStoreConf.eps 3. Press [F6 (LOCK)] to lock or unlock the library data.
Editing the name of user library

data
You can assign a name of up to twelve characters to user library
data. Use the NAME EDIT popup to edit the name.
A message will ask you to confirm the library store operation.
fig.ScrChLib_Name.eps
6. Press [F8 (STORE)] to execute the library store operation

Alternatively, press [F7 (CANCEL)] to cancel the library store
operation.
You can’t overwrite library data that has been locked. Either
store the data to a different library location, or defeat the Lock
setting before you execute the store operation.
If “SCENE/LIB STORE” in the CONFIRMATION section of the 2. From the library data list, select the desired library data.
User Preference (p. 177) is not selected, a confirmation message
will not appear in step 5. You can’t edit library data that has been locked.
3. Press [F7 (NAME EDIT)] to access the NAME EDIT popup.
4. Use the NAME EDIT popup to edit the name.
For details on operations in the NAME EDIT popup, refer to

“Editing a name” (p. 50).
5. Press [F8 (OK)] to finalize the edited name and close the
NAME EDIT popup.
Alternatively, press [F7 (CANCEL)] to discard your edits and
close the NAME EDIT popup.
52
Basic operation
Message operations
• Confirmation message
fig.Confirm.eps
Basic operation
This message asks you to confirm an operation.
• Caution message
fig.Caution.eps
This message cautions you that a problem has occurred during

operation.
• Error message
fig.Error.eps
This message will appear if a fatal error occurs.
• Wait message
fig.Wait.eps
This message is shown while a time consuming process is being

executed. You cannot close this until the process is completed.
53
Input channel operations
About the input channels

The input channels process the audio signals from the input jacks and internal ports, and send them to the MAIN L/R bus and AUX buses.
fig.InBlkDia.eps
MAIN AUX SOLO

LR 1 2 16 L R
INPUT
PATCHBAY
CH 1-48
PREAMP POST ATT GATE IN GATE OUT COMP OUT PRE EQ PRE FADER POST FADER
GR GR
EXT FX FX MAIN
INSERT INSERT MUTE FADER PAN SW
PHASE ATT FILTER GATE/ COMP 4BAND
EXP EQ
TO TO
GATE COMP
KEY-IN KEY-IN AUX SEND 1-16
GATE COMP
KEY-IN KEY-IN PRE EQ SW SEND AUX
LINK TO AUX
PRE FADER
1, 3...15
POST FADER
PAN
PRE EQ SW SEND
PRE FADER TO AUX
2, 4...16
POST FADER
AFL SW SOLO
PFL(L)
AFL(L)
PFL(R)
AFL(R)
PRE EQ DIRECT OUT

POINT
PRE FADER TO MAIRIX 1-8,
POST FADER TO OUTPUT PATCHBAY
LR 1 2 16 L R
MAIN AUX SOLO
• INPUT PATCHBAY • FX INSERT (Effect insert)

This section patches input ports to input channels. FX1–FX4 can be inserted at this point.
• PHASE • 4 BAND EQ (Four-band EQ)
This reverses the phase of the audio signal. This is a four-band EQ with LO, LO-MID, HI-MID, and HI
• ATT (Attenuator) frequency bands.
This adjusts the input level in the digital domain. • MUTE
• FILTER This mutes the channel. The signal sent to the MAIN L/R bus,
This is a 12 dB/octave filter that passes or cuts the specified the AUX buses and the direct out will be muted.
frequency range. • FADER
• GATE/EXPANDER This adjusts the send level to the MAIN L/R bus.
This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a gate or • PAN
expander, or for ducking. You can use a maximum of twenty- This adjusts the left/right panning of the audio signal sent to
four units simultaneously. the MAIN L/R bus.
• COMPRESSOR • MAIN SW (Main switch)
This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor. This turns the send to the MAIN L/R bus on/off. It does not
You can use a maximum of twenty-four units simultaneously. affect the send to the AUX buses.
• EXT INSERT (External insert) • AUX SEND
An external effects processor can be inserted at this point using This adjusts the send to the AUX bus.
the rear panel CONSOLE IN1–IN8 and CONSOLE OUT1– • DIRECT OUT POINT
OUT8 jacks. This specifies the position from which the direct out signal is
taken.
54
Operations using the Viewing the parameter values

CHANNEL EDIT section The arrangement of parameters and the color of knobs in the
CHANNEL EDIT DISPLAY screen is close to that of the CHANNEL
Most input channel operations can be performed in the CHANNEL
EDIT section, making it easy to check the values.
EDIT section.
Here we will explain input channel operations using the CHANNEL 1. In the CHANNEL EDIT section, press [CH DISP].
fig.ChDispBtn.eps
EDIT section.
fig.ChEditSection.eps
CH DISP

fig.ScrChDisp.eps
Selecting the channel to edit

1. In the fader module section, press a [SEL] button to select
the input channel that you want to edit.
fig.SELBtn.eps
[SEL]
Even if you don’t access the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen, the
value of the currently-operated parameter is shown in the sub
display area when you operate an dial in the CHANNEL EDIT
section.
fig.SubDispPrm.eps
2. The selected channel is shown in the channel indication at

the upper center of the screen.
fig.ScrSelectedCh.eps
If you’ve pressed [TOUCH SELECT] to turn it on (lit), you can

select a channel by touching its fader.
55
Preamp gain adjustments Four-band EQ operations

Use the PREAMP area of the CHANNEL EDIT section to adjust the Use the EQUALIZER area of the CHANNEL EDIT section to operate
preamp gain. the EQ.
fig.ChEdtPreamp.eps
fig.ChEdtEQ.eps
1. Use the GAIN dial to adjust the preamp gain.
Filter operations
Use the FILTER area of the CHANNEL EDIT section to operate the filter.
fig.ChEdtFilter.eps
1. Press [ON] to turn the filter on/off. 1. Press [ON] to turn the four-band EQ on/off.
2. Use the FREQ dial to adjust the frequency of the filter. 2. Use the GAIN knobs to adjust the gain of each frequency
band.
Gate/expander and compressor
3. Use the FREQ knobs to adjust the center frequency of each
threshold level adjustments band.
Use the GATE area and COMP area of the CHANNEL EDIT section 4. Use the Q knobs to adjust the Q of the LO-MID and HI-MID
to make adjustments.
fig.ChEdtDyn.eps
bands.
You can make fine adjustments by holding down [SHIFT] while

you operate the knob.
By pressing [DISP] you can access the EQUALIZER popup,

where you can make detailed settings for the four-band EQ. For
details, refer to “Four-band EQ operations” (p. 107).
Adjusting the pan of the audio

signal sent to the MAIN L/R bus
Use the PAN area of the CHANNEL EDIT section to make these
adjustments.
fig.ChEdtPan.eps
1. Use the THRESHOLD knob of the GATE area or COMP area
to adjust the threshold level.

By pressing [DISP] you can access the GATE/EXPANDER popup 1. Use the PAN knob to adjust the pan.
or COMPRESSOR popup, where you can make detailed settings for
the gate/expander or compressor. For details, refer to “Gate/
expander operations” (p. 93) or “Compressor operations” (p. 99). You can make fine adjustments by holding down [SHIFT] while
You can turn the gate/expander or compressor on/off by holding
down [SHIFT] and pressing [DISP] in the GATE area or COMP
area.
56
Using the top panel faders

Sending the audio signal to the (SENDS ON FADER)
AUX buses
1. Press AUX SELECT [1]–[16] to select the send-destination
Use the AUX SENDS area of the CHANNEL EDIT section to perform
AUX bus.
these operations.
fig.ChEdtAux.eps
2. Press [SENDS ON FADER] so it is blinking.
3. Use the top panel faders to adjust the amount sent from
each input channel to the selected AUX bus.
fig.FaderAll.eps

SENDS ON FADER is a convenient function, but involves
the risk of unintended mistakes. Operate the faders with
care while [SENDS ON FADER] is blinking.
By pressing [DISP] you can access the AUX SENDS popup,

where you can make detailed settings for AUX send. For details,
refer to “AUX send operations” (p. 111).
You can adjust the send level in either of two ways: using the SEND
LEVEL knob of the AUX SENDS area, or using the faders of the top
panel.
Using the SEND LEVEL knob

AUX bus.
2. Use the SEND LEVEL encoder to adjust the amount sent to

the selected AUX bus.

you operate SEND LEVEL.
You can turn the corresponding send switch on/off by holding

down [SHIFT] and pressing AUX SELECT [1]–[16].
57
Operations in the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen

The principal parameters of an input channel can be operated in the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen.
CHANNEL DISPLAY screen

fig.ScrChDispGuide.eps
1 2 3 7 9 10
11
4
5 12
6
8
The principal operations for an input channel can be performed in b. PAD button
the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen. This switches the pad on/off. Turning this on will lower the
input sensitivity of the preamp by 20 dB.
1. Preamp
fig.ScrChPreamp.eps
e Since noise will be produced when you switch the pad setting,
therefore the output of the channel whose setting you change
a d will be briefly muted.
b
c Turn the pad on if the input level is too high even when the
preamp gain is set to the minimum position.
Here you can make settings for the preamp of the input jack
that is patched to the channel. c. Ø (Phase) button
a. +48V button This reverses the phase of the audio signal. Turning this on will
reverse the phase of the signal, and turning it off will maintain
This turns the +48V phantom power on/off.
the normal phase.
d. GAIN knob
You must turn the phantom power off if you’ve connected This adjusts the preamp gain in the range of -65 dBu– -10 dBu (if
equipment that does not require +48V phantom power. PAD is on, a range of -45 dBu– +10 dBu).
Mistakenly supplying phantom power to a dynamic
e. OL (Overload) indicator
microphone, audio playback device, or any other device that
This will light red when the output of the preamp exceeds the
does not require phantom power will cause malfunctions.
OVER Lev setting specified in the METER SETUP popup (p. 122).
Carefully read the owner’s manual for your microphone or
other device, and make sure of its specifications.
It is felt that it does not change smoothly when it coordinates
the preamp gain, but it is not trouble. In addition, some noises
Since noise will be produced when you switch the phantom
come out, but it is not trouble.
power setting, therefore the output of the channel whose setting
you change will be briefly muted.
For the following channels, the preamp area will show only the
Ø (phase) button.
• Channels to which no input port is patched
• Channels to which a port that has no preamp (such as an
internal port) is patched
58
2. Attenuator 4. Gate/expander
fig.ScrChATT.eps fig.ScrChGate.eps
b a e
a b
c
d
a. GATE button
a. ATT knob
This turns the gate/expander on/off.
This adjusts the input level of the channel in the range of -48.0
b. THRE (Threshold) knob
dB– +24.0 dB.
This adjusts the threshold level of the gate/expander in the

b. OL (Overload) indicator
range of -80.0 dB–0.0 dB.
This will light red when the output of the attenuator exceeds the
c. IN meter
OVER Lev setting specified in the METER SETUP popup (p.
This shows the input level of the gate/expander. For stereo-
122).
linked channels, two meters (L and R) will be shown.
d. GR meter
This shows the amount of gain reduction for the gate/expander.
Normally, you should use the preamp gain to adjust the input
level of the channel, and leave the attenuator at 0 dB. It is e. OL (Overload) indicator
convenient to use the attenuator in the following types of cases. This will light red when the output of the gate/expander
• When you want to avoid overloading the filter exceeds the OVER Lev setting specified in the METER SETUP
popup (p. 122).
• When you’ve patched a port that has no preamp gain, such
as an internal port
• When you’ve allowed plenty of head margin to avoid Up to twenty-four gate/expander units can be turned on.
overloading the preamp’s AD converter, and want to boost
the level at the channel
For detailed gate/expander settings, refer to “Gate/expander
operations” (p. 93).
5. Compressor
Filter overload can also be avoided by using the filter ATT fig.ScrChComp.eps
parameter that is shown in the EQUALIZER popup.
a e
3. Filter
fig.ScrChFilt.eps b
c
a c
d
b a. COMP button
This turns the compressor on/off.
b. THRE (Threshold) knob
This adjusts the threshold level of the compressor in the range
of -40.0 dB–0.0 dB.
a. FILT button
c. IN meter
This turns the filter on/off.
This shows the input level of the compressor. For stereo-linked
b. FREQ knob
channels, two meters (L and R) will be shown.
This adjusts the filter frequency in the range of 20 Hz–20.0 kHz.
d. GR meter
c. OL (Overload) indicator
This shows the amount of gain reduction for the compressor.
This will light red when the output of the filter exceeds the
e. OL (Overload) indicator
OVER Lev setting specified in the METER SETUP popup (p.
This will light red when the output of the compressor exceeds
122).
the OVER Lev setting specified in the METER SETUP popup (p.
122).
By default, HPF (High Pass Filter) is assigned to the filter, and
the FREQ knob will adjust the cutoff frequency.
Up to twenty-four compressors can be turned on.
Detailed filter settings are made in the EQUALIZER popup. For

For detailed compressor settings, refer to “Compressor
59
6. Insert indication 7. Four-band EQ

fig.ScrChIns.eps fig.ScrChEQ.eps
a a c
b b
a. EXT FX
If an external effects processor is inserted, this shows the
number of the inserted EXT FX. d f
By moving the cursor to EXT FX and pressing [ENTER], you can
access the EXT FX 1–4 tab or EXT FX 5–8 tab of the EFFECTS
screen. e g
Inserting an external effects processor into a channel is done in

the EFFECTS screen. For details, refer to “Inserting an external
h
effects device” (p. 137).
b. FX INS
If FX1–FX4 are inserted, the number of the inserted FX is shown a. EQ button
here. This turns the four-band EQ on/off.
If the number is shown in white, the effect insertion is enabled. b. Four-band EQ graph
If it is shown in gray, effect insertion is bypassed. This shows the approximate response of the four-band EQ.
The FX INS number may have an appended “L” or “R.” This c. OL (Overload) indicator
has the following significance. This will light red when the output of the four-band EQ exceeds
Indication Explanation 122).
Number+L The L side of the FX is inserted.
d. Q knobs (LO-MID, HI-MID)
Number+R The R side of the FX is inserted.
These adjust the Q of the LO-MID and HI-MID bands in the
Number only Both L and R side of the FX are inserted. The
return from the FX is mixed and input to the range of 0.36–16. Higher values will produce a sharper curve.
channel. e. LO FREQ knob
This adjusts the center frequency of the LOW band in the range
If you move the cursor to FX INS and press [ENTER], the FX 1–4 of 20 Hz–1.00 kHz.
tab of the EFFECTS screen will appear. f. FREQ knob (LO-MID, HI-MID)
These adjust the center frequency of the LO-MID and HI-MID
Inserting an effect into a channel is done in the EFFECTS screen. bands in the range of 20 Hz–20.0 kHz.
For details, refer to “Effect input/output settings” (p. 126). g. HI FREQ knob
This adjusts the center frequency of the HI band in the range of
1.00 kHz–20.0 kHz.
Up to four effects can be inserted into one channel. In this case,
h. GAIN knob (LO, LO-MID, HI-MID, HI)
they will be inserted in series, in order of the FX number.
These adjust the gain of the LO, LO-MID, HI-MID, and HI
bands in the range of -15.0 dB– +15.0 dB.
For detailed settings for the four-band EQ, refer to “Four-band

EQ operations” (p. 107).
8. Direct out point

fig.ScrChDirGuide.eps
You can choose one of the following as the position from which
the channel’s signal is taken as the direct out signal.
PRE EQ Take the pre-EQ signal

PRE FADER Take the pre-fader signal
POST FADER Take the post-fader signal
60
8. AUX sends 9. Pan

fig.ScrChSends.eps fig.ScrChPan.eps
This adjusts the left/right panning of the audio signal sent to

the MAIN L/R bus in the range of L63–R63.
10. Group
fig.ScrChGroup.eps

This indicates whether the channel is assigned to a DCA group
or a MUTE group.
If you move the cursor to DCA GROUP or MUTE GROUP and
• AUX sends 1–16
press [ENTER], the GROUP ASSIGN popup will appear,
Here you can adjust the sends from the channel to the AUX1–
allowing you to make DCA group or MUTE group assignments.
AUX16 buses. The AUX sends are organized as follows.
fig.ScrChSendField.eps
You can also access the GROUP ASSIGN popup by pressing [F5
a b (GROUP ASSIGN)].
c 11. Fader
fig.ScrChFader.eps
a. AUX number
This indicates the AUX channel number.
b. AUX name
This indicates the AUX channel name. a
c. Send level bar
e
This adjusts the send level to the AUX bus in the range of
-Inf dB– +10.0 dB.
The color of the send level bar indicates the send point and the
status of the send switch as follows.
Send level bar color Status

Blue send point is PRE EQ or PRE FADER
b
Green send point is POST FADER c
Gray Send switch is off
d
• AUX pan slider a. Fader
fig.ScrChSendField2.eps
This adjusts the amount sent to the MAIN L/R bus in the range
of -Inf dB– +10.0 dB.
You can make settings in finer increments by operating the

value dial while you hold down [SHIFT].
b. S button
If the AUX send destination is stereo-linked, this lets you adjust This turns SOLO on/off for the channel.
the left/right panning of the audio signal in the range of L63– c. M button
R63. This is shown in the area of the odd-numbered AUX send. This turns MUTE on/off for the channel.
d. MAIN button
For detailed AUX send settings, refer to “AUX send operations” This turns the MAIN send on/off.
(p. 111). e. Channel meter
This indicates the signal level of the channel. For a stereo-linked
channel, two meters L and R are shown. The level detection
point is according to the setting in the METER screen. For
61
details, refer to “Editing the meter settings” (p. 122).
The function buttons have the following operations. Stereo-linking channels

Adjacent odd-numbered and even-numbered channels can be stereo-
[F1 (LINK)] Turns channel link on/off. p. 62
linked so that their parameters will have the same settings. This is
[F2 (NAME EDIT)] Accesses the NAME EDIT pop- p. 63
up, where you can specify the convenient when you’re dealing with stereo sources.
channel name.
[F3 (COPY)] Accesses the CH COPY popup, p. 65 1. Access the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for the channel that
where you can copy channel set- you want to stereo-link.
fig.ScrChDisp.eps
tings.
[F4 (LIBRARY) Accesses the CH LIBRARY pop- p. 66
up, where you can use the chan-
nel library.
[F5 (GROUP ASSIGN)] Accesses the GROUP ASSIGN p. 67
popup, where you can assign the
channel to DCA groups and
MUTE groups.
[F6 (PEAK CLEAR)] Clears the level meter’s peak
hold or over indication.
[F8 (Patchbay)] Accesses the PATCHBAY p. 115
screen.
2. Press [F1 (LINK)] to turn it on; the channels will be stereo-

When you press [F8 (Patchbay)] to access the PATCHBAY
linked.
screen, the PATCHBAY screen will appear with the currently
selected channel highlighted.
The parameters of the even-numbered channel will be set to the
values of the odd-numbered channel.
Accessing the CHANNEL DISPLAY
screen
Stereo-linked parameters
1. In the fader module section, press [SEL] to select a
channel. The following parameters are linked by stereo-link.
• Phase
2. In the CHANNEL EDIT section, press [CH DISP] to access • Attenuator
the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen.
fig.ScrChDisp.eps
• Filter parameters
• Gate/expander parameters other than Key In
• Compressor parameters other than Key In
• Four-band EQ parameters
• Fader parameters
• AUX send level, send switch and send point
• Direct out point
When you enable stereo-link, the gate/expander and

compressor will operate in stereo.
Pressing a different [SEL] while the CHANNEL DISPLAY

screen is shown will switch you to the display for that channel.
If you’ve selected the “CHANNEL DISPLAY follows CH

SELECT” button located in the CHANNEL SELECT area of
User Preference (p. 177), pressing a [SEL] will recall the
CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for that channel.
62
The function buttons have the following operations.

Specifying a channel name
and color label [F1 (Recall Template)] Enters the name selected in the TEM-
PLATE list into the name edit field.
[F2 (HISTORY)] Successively recalls the channel names
You can specify a channel name and color label for each input
that have been entered since power-up,
channel. The channel name can be up to six characters, and you can starting with the most recent name.
select one of eight colors as the color label. [F3 (INSERT)] Inserts a space at the cursor location.
Channel name entry and color label selection are done in the NAME The characters to the right of the cursor
EDIT popup. location will move to the right.
[F4 (A/a)] Changes the character at the cursor lo-
cation between uppercase and lower-
NAME EDIT popup case.

[F5 (NUM)] Changes the character at the cursor lo-
fig.ScrChNameEditGuide.eps cation to the numeral “0.”
[F6 (DELETE)] Deletes the character at the cursor loca-
1 2 tion. The characters to the right of the
cursor location will move to the left.
Up to sixteen names will be remembered in HISTORY.

If HISTORY becomes full, the oldest name will be deleted.
Accessing the NAME EDIT popup

1. Access the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for the desired
channel.
fig.ScrChDisp.eps
3
1. TEMPLATE
Here you can select a name from a list.
• CATEGORY list
Select the category.
• NAME list
Select a name from within that category.
Choose the CATEGORY first, and then choose a NAME.

2. Name edit field fig.ScrChNameEdit.eps
3. Color label selection buttons

Use these buttons to select a color label for the channel.
63
Editing the channel name Using the template to enter a

1. Access the NAME EDIT popup for the desired channel.
channel name
fig.ScrChNameEdit.eps
2. Move the cursor to the name edit field, and edit the channel
name. 2. Move the cursor to the CATEGORY list in the TEMPLATE
Use the cursor left/right buttons to move the cursor location. area, and select the category of the name you want to enter.
Use the value dial to change the character at the cursor location.
3. Move the cursor to the NAME list in the TEMPLATE area,
3. Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup. and select the name that you want to enter.
4. Press [F1 (Recall Template)].

Choosing a color label The selected name will be entered in the name edit field.
1. Access the NAME EDIT popup for the desired channel. 5. Move the cursor to the name edit field, and you’ll be able to
fig.ScrChNameEdit.eps edit the name that was entered.
If you enter a name from the template, the name that was
previously in the name edit field will be deleted.
2. Move the cursor to the desired color label select button,

and press [ENTER] to make your selection.
64
Copying channel settings to Accessing the CH COPY popup

another channel 1. Access the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for the desired
copy-source channel.
Channel settings can be copied to another channel. Channel copying fig.ScrChDisp.eps
is done in the CH COPY popup.
CH COPY popup
fig.ScrChCopyGuide.eps
1 2

2. Press [F3 (COPY)] to access the CH COPY popup.
fig.ScrChCopy.eps
3
1. Copy-source channel
This indicates the copy-source channel.
2. Copy parameter select buttons

Here you can select the parameters that will be copied. You can
select the following parameters.
Patch Input patching

Phase Phase
ATT Attenuator
Filter Filter
Gate Gate/expander
Comp Compressor
EQ Four-band EQ
Sends AUX sends
Direct Direct out point
Fader Fader and mute
Pan Pan
Group DCA groups and MUTE groups
3. Copy-destination channel select buttons

Here you can select the copy-destination channel(s).
[F1 (CH1-24)] Displays CH1–CH24 as the copy-

destination channel select buttons.
[F2 (CH25-48)] Displays CH25–CH48 as the copy-
[F3 (PASTET to CH 1-24)] Executes the copy.
[F3 (PASTET to CH 25-48)]
65
Copying the channel settings Using the channel library

1. Access the CH COPY popup for the desired copy-source
You can recall channel settings from the library, or store the settings
channel.
fig.ScrChCopy.eps of the current channel in the library.
Channel library operations are performed in the CHANNEL LIBRARY
popup.
CH LIBRARY popup
fig.ScrChLibGuide.eps
1 2 3
2. Verify that the copy-source channel is correct.

3. Move the cursor to the desired copy parameter select
button, and press [ENTER] to select it.
4. Move the cursor to the desired copy-destination channel
select button, and press [ENTER] to select it. You can
select more than one channel.
5. Press [F3 (PASTE to CH 1–24)] or [F3 (PASTE to CH 25–48)].
1. Target channel
This indicates the channel that is the target of the CHANNEL
LIBRARY popup.

A confirmation message will appear, asking you to confirm the This is a list of the library data.
Copy operation.
3. Recall parameter select buttons
6. Press [F8 (PASTE)] to execute the Copy. Use these to select the parameters that will be recalled. You can
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled. select the following parameters.
Phase Phase
ATT Attenuator
When you execute PASTE, the copy-destination channel select
Filter Filter
buttons will be cleared.
Gate Gate/expander
Comp Compressor
EQ Four-band EQ
Sends AUX sends
Direct Out Direct out point
Pan Pan
Noise may occur when you execute a library preview or recall,

but this is not a malfunction.
66

Assigning channels to DCA
[F1 (PRESET)]
[F2 (USER)]
Displays the recall-only PRESET library.
Displays the USER library, which can be re-
groups and MUTE groups
called or stored.
Input channels can be assigned to DCA groups and mute groups.
[F3 (PREVIEW)] Previews (auditions) the selected library data.
Assignments to DCA groups and mute groups are made in the
[F4 (RECALL)] Recalls the selected library data.
GROUP ASSIGN popup.
[F5 (STORE)]* Stores the settings of the current channel into
the selected library data.
[F6 (LOCK)]* Locks or unlocks the selected library data.
GROUP ASSIGN popup
[F7 (NAME EDIT)]* Accesses the NAME EDIT popup, where you
can edit the name of the selected library data. fig.ScrChGrpAsgnGuide.eps

1 2 3
Accessing the CH LIBRARY popup

channel.
fig.ScrChDisp.eps
1. Target channel
This indicates the channel that is the target of the GROUP
ASSIGN popup.
2. DCA group select buttons

Use these to select the DCA group to which the channel will be
assigned.
2. Press [F4 (LIBRARY)] to access the CH LIBRARY popup. 3. MUTE group select buttons
fig.ScrChLib.eps Use these to select the MUTE group to which the channel will
be assigned.
For details on library operations, refer to “Library operations”

(p. 51).
67
Accessing the GROUP ASSIGN Assigning a channel to a DCA group

popup 1. Access the GROUP ASSIGN popup for the desired channel.
fig.ScrChGroupAssign.eps
channel.
fig.ScrChDisp.eps
2. Verify that the target channel is correct.
3. Move the cursor to the desired DCA group select button,

and press [ENTER] to select it.
2. Press [F5 (GROUP ASSIGN)] to access the GROUP ASSIGN
popup.
For details on DCA groups, refer to “DCA groups” (p. 141).
Assigning a channel to a MUTE group

1. Access the GROUP ASSIGN popup for the desired channel.
3. Move the cursor to the desired MUTE group select button,

For details on MUTE groups, refer to “Mute groups” (p. 145).
68
AUX channel and MAIN L/R channel operations
About AUX channels and the MAIN L/R channels

The AUX and MAIN L/R channels process the mixed audio signals from the input channels, and send them to the output ports.
fig.OutBlkDia.eps
MAIN AUX SOLO
LR 1 2 16 L R OUTPUT
PATCHBAY
MAIN L, R
POST ATT PRE EQ PRE FADER POST FADER OUTPUT LEVEL
EXT FX FX FADER BAL

INSERT INSERT MUTE GEQ
4BAND INSERT MAIN
ATT EQ OUT L
LIMITER
AUX SEND 1-16
PRE EQ SW SEND AUX

PRE FADER
LINK

POST FADER TO AUX 1, 3...7
PAN
PRE EQ SW SEND
PRE FADER MONO
OUT
-6dB
MATRIX SEND 1-8 MIX
PRE EQ MTX
SW SEND
PRE FADER LINK
POST FADER PAN TO MTX 1, 3...7
SW SEND
TO MTX 2, 4...8
MAIN
SOLO
OUT R
TO SOLO
TO MONITOR SELECT
TO REC SELECT
AUX 1-16
POST ATT PRE EQ PRE FADER POST FADER OUTPUT LEVEL
EXT FX FX FADER BAL

4BAND INSERT AUX 1-16
ATT EQ OUT
LIMITER
MAIN SEND
PRE EQ SW SEND PAN

PRE FADER
TO MAIN L, R
POST FADER
MATRIX SEND 1-8

PRE EQ MTX
SW SEND
PRE FADER LINK
SW SEND
TO MTX 2, 4...8
SOLO
TO SOLO L
TO SOLO R
TO MONITOR SELECT
TO REC SELECT
TO FX SOURCE SELECT
LR 1 2 16 L R
MAIN AUX SOLO
• ATT (Attenuator) • MUTE

This adjusts the input level. This mutes the output of the channel. The post fader sends to
• EXT INSERT (External insert) the MAIN L/R bus and AUX buses will also be muted.
These ports let you use the rear panel CONSOLE IN1–IN8 and • GEQ INSERT
CONSOLE OUT1–OUT8 ports to insert external effects This port allows you to insert a 31-band GEQ.
processors. • LIMITER
• FX INSERT (Effect insert) This limits the output level.
These ports let you insert FX1–FX4. • AUX SEND (MAIN L/R only)
• 4 BAND EQ (Four-band EQ) This adjusts the send to AUX.
This is an EQ with four bands; LO, LO-MID, HI-MID, and HI. • MAIN SEND (AUX1–AUX16 only)
• FADER This adjusts the send to MAIN L/R.
This adjusts the output level. • MATRIX SEND
• BALANCE Adjust the send to MATRIX1–MATRIX8.
This adjusts the left/right balance for MAIN L/R or for stereo-
linked AUX buses.
69
Operations using the Viewing the parameter values

CHANNEL EDIT section The CHANNEL DISPLAY screen shows the parameter values that
you can operate in the CHANNEL EDIT section.
Most operations for the MAIN L/R channels and AUX channels can
The arrangement of the parameters and the color of the knobs in the
be performed in the CHANNEL EDIT section.
CHANNEL DISPLAY screen is similar to the layout of the
Here we will explain channel operations using the CHANNEL EDIT
CHANNEL EDIT section, making it easy for you to check the values.
section.
fig.ChDispBtn.eps
CH DISP

fig.ScrChAux.eps
Selecting the channel to edit

1. Use the [SEL] buttons of the fader module section to select
the channel that you want to edit.
fig.SELBtn.eps
[SEL]
Even if you operate the knobs of the CHANNEL EDIT section

without accessing the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen, the value of
the currently-operated parameter is shown in the sub-display
area.
fig.SubDispPrm.eps
Attenuator adjustments
The MAIN [SEL] button will alternately select the MAIN L or
MAIN R channel each time you press it. Use the PREAMP area of the CHANNEL EDIT section to adjust the
attenuator.
2. The selected channel is shown in the channel indication at fig.ChEdtPreamp.eps
the upper center of the screen.

fig.ScrSelectedAux.eps
If you press [TOUCH SELECT] to turn it on (lit), you’ll be able

to select a channel by touching its fader. 1. Use the GAIN dial to adjust the attenuator.
70
Adjusting the limiter threshold level Adjusting the left/right output balance
This operation is performed in the COMP area of the CHANNEL This operation is performed in the PAN area of the CHANNEL EDIT section.
EDIT section. This is valid for the MAIN L/R channels and for stereo-linked AUX channels.
fig.ChEdtComp.eps fig.ChEdtPan.eps
1. Use the PAN knob to adjust the pan.
1. In the COMP area, use the THRESHOLD knob to adjust the

threshold level. You can make fine adjustments by holding down [SHIFT] while

Sending the audio signal to an
AUX bus (MAIN L/R channels)
By pressing [DISP] you can access the LIMITER popup where This operation is performed in the AUX SENDS area of the
you can make detailed settings for the limiter. For details, refer fig.ChEdtAux.eps
to “Limiter operations” (p. 104).
You can turn the limiter on/off by holding down [SHIFT] and
pressing [DISP] in the COMP area.
Four-band EQ operations
You can perform these operations in the EQUALIZER area of the
fig.ChEdtEQ.eps

AUX bus.
1. Press [ON] to turn the four-band EQ on/off.
2. Use the SEND LEVEL knob to adjust the amount of signal
2. Use the GAIN knobs to adjust the gain of each band. sent to the AUX bus.
3. Use the FREQ knobs to adjust the center frequency of each
band.
4. Use the Q knobs to adjust the Q of the LO-MID and HI-MID you operate the knob.
bands.
You can’t use SENDS ON FADER to adjust the send amount

By pressing [DISP] you can access the EQUALIZER popup from the MAIN L/R channels to an AUX bus.
where you can make detailed settings for the four-band EQ. For
By pressing [DISP] you can access the AUX SENDS popup
where you can make detailed AUX send settings. For details,
You can make fine adjustments by holding down [SHIFT] while refer to “AUX send operations” (p. 111).
71
Sending the audio signal to a

MATRIX bus
This operation is performed in the AUX SENDS area of the
fig.ChEdtAux.eps

MATRIX bus.
sent to the MATRIX bus.

You can’t use SENDS ON FADER to adjust the send amount to

an MATRIX bus.
By pressing [DISP] you can access the MATRIX SENDS popup

where you can make detailed AUX send settings.
For the MAIN L/R channel, use [F7 ( MTX SENDS)] or

[F7 ( AUX SENDS)] to switch the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen
between the MTX SENDS display and the AUX SENDS display.
The target of operations in the CHANNEL EDIT section’s AUX
SENDS area will also follow the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen.
For the MAIN L/R channel, operations in the AUX SENDS area
are valid only while the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen is shown.
72
Operations in the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen

The principal parameters of the MAIN L/R channels and AUX channels can be operated in the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen.

fig.ScrChMainGuide.eps
1 4 7 9

10
11
2
3
fig.ScrChAuxGuide.eps
5 8
73
1. Attenuator 3. Insert indication

fig.ScrMtxATTGuide.eps fig.ScrChInsOut.eps
b a b
a c
a. EXT FX
If an external effects processor is inserted, this shows the EXT
a. ATT knob
FX number that is inserted.
This adjusts the channel’s input level in the range of -48 dB–0
By moving the cursor to EXT FX and pressing [ENTER], you can
dB (6 dB steps).
access the EXT FX tab of the EFFECTS screen.
b. OL (Overload) indicator
This will light red when the output of the attenuator exceeds the
OVER Lev setting specified in the METER SETUP popup (p. Inserting an external effects processor into a channel is done in
122). the EFFECTS screen. For details, refer to “Inserting an external

b. GEQ INS
Normally, you should leave the attenuator set at 0 dB. It is If a GEQ is inserted, this shows the number of the GEQ that is
convenient to use the attenuator in situations like the following. inserted.
• When the input of an output channel is overloaded, and all If the number is shown in white, the inserted GEQ is enabled. If
sends from the input channel must be lowered it is shown in gray, the inserted GEQ is bypassed.
By moving the cursor to GEQ INS and pressing [ENTER], you
can access the GEQ 1-4 tab of the EFFECTS screen.
2. Limiter
fig.ScrChLim.eps
Inserting a GEQ into a channel is done in the EFFECTS screen.
a e For details, refer to “Inserting a 31-band GEQ” (p. 133).
b c. FX INS
c If FX1–FX4 is inserted, this shows the number of the inserted
d FX.
If the number is shown in white, the inserted effect is enabled. If
a. LIM button
it is shown in gray, the inserted effect is bypassed.
This turns the limiter on/off.
The character “L” or “R” may be added to the FX INS number.
b. THRE (Threshold) knob This has the following significance.
This adjusts the limiter’s threshold level in the range of -40.0
dB–0.0 dB. Indication Explanation
c. IN meter Number+L The L side of the FX is inserted.
This indicates the input level of the limiter. For stereo-linked Number+R The R side of the FX is inserted.
channels, two meters (L and R) are shown. Number only Both L and R sides of the FX are inserted. The
return from the FX is mixed and input to the
d. GR meter
channel.
This indicates the amount of gain reduction produced by the
limiter. By moving the cursor to FX INS and pressing [ENTER], you can
e. OL (Overload) indicator access the FX 1-4 tab of the EFFECTS screen.
This will light red when the output of the limiter exceeds the
OVER Lev setting specified in the METER SETUP popup (p. Inserting an effect into a channel is done in the EFFECTS screen.
122). For details, refer to “Effect input/output settings” (p. 126).
For details on limiter settings, refer to “Limiter operations Up to four effects can be inserted in a channel. In this case, they
(MAIN L/R, AUX1–AUX16)” (p. 104). are inserted in series in order of the FX number.
74
4. Four-band EQ 5. MTX send

fig.ScrChEQ.eps fig.ScrMtxSends.eps
a c
b
d f
e g

h
a. EQ button
• MATRIX sends 1–8
This turns the four-band EQ on/off.
These adjust the send from AUX1–AUX16 or MAIN L/R to
b. Four-band EQ graph MATRIX1–MATRIX8. The MATRIX send area is structured as
This shows the approximate response of the four-band EQ. follows.
c. OL (Overload) indicator fig.ScrMtxSendField.eps
This will light red when the output of the four-band EQ exceeds a b
c
122).
d. Q knobs (LO-MID, HI-MID) a. MATRIX number
These adjust the Q of the LO-MID and HI-MID bands in the This indicates the MATRIX channel number.
range of 0.36–16. Higher values produce a sharper curve. b. MATRIX name
e. LO FREQ knob This indicates the MATRIX channel name.
This adjusts the center frequency of the LO band in the range of c. Send level bar
20 Hz–1.00 kHz. This adjusts the send level to each MATRIX in the range of -Inf
f. FREQ knobs (LO-MID, HI-MID) dB–+10.0 dB.
These adjust the center frequency of the LO-MID and HI-MID The color of the level bar indicates the send point or status of
bands in the range of 20 Hz–20.0 kHz. the send switch as follows.
g. HI FREQ knob
This adjusts the center frequency of the HI band in the range of Color of the Status
send level bar
1.00 kHz–20.0 kHz.
Blue send point is PRE EQ or PRE FADER
h. GAIN knobs (LO, LO-MID, HI-MID, HI)
Green send point is POST FADER
These adjust the gain of the LO, LO-MID, HI-MID, and HI Gray Send switch is off
bands in the range of -15.0 dB–+15.0 dB.
• MATRIX pan slider
fig.ScrMtxSendField2.eps
For detailed settings for the four-band EQ, refer to “Four-band
EQ operations” (p. 107).
If the send-destination is a stereo-linked pair of MATRIX

channels, this slider adjusts the left/right position in the range
of L63–R63. This is shown for the odd-numbered MATRIX
send.
For detailed MATRIX send settings, refer to “MATRIX send

75
6. MATRIX send point • AUX pan slider

fig.ScrMtxSendPoint.eps fig.ScrChSendField2.eps
These select the point from which signal is sent to MATRIX1–

MATRIX8.
If the send-destination is a stereo-linked pair of AUX channels,
The selected item corresponds to the send point as follows.
this slider adjusts the left/right position in the range of L63–
R63. This is shown for the odd-numbered AUX send.
PRE EQ Send from the pre-EQ point
PRE FD Send from the pre-fader point
PST FD Send from the post-fader point For detailed AUX send settings, refer to “AUX send operations”
(p. 111).
7. AUX send (MAIN L/R only)

fig.ScrChSends.eps 8. TO MAIN (AUX channels only)
fig.ScrChMainSend.eps
a
b
d
These specify the amount of signal that will be sent from the
AUX channel to MAIN L/R, and the send point.
a. ON button
This turns the send to MAIN L/R on/off.
• AUX sends 1–16 b. PAN knob
These adjust the send from MAIN L/R to AUX1–AUX16. The This adjusts the left/right pan to MAIN L/R in the range of
AUX send area is structured as follows. L63–R63.
fig.ScrChSendField.eps
c. LEVEL knob
a b This adjusts the send level to MAIN L/R in the range of-Inf dB–
c +10.0 dB.
d. MAIN send point
a. AUX number
These select the point from which the signal is sent to MAIN L/
This indicates the AUX channel number. R.
b. AUX name The selected item corresponds to the send point as follows.
This indicates the AUX channel name.
c. Send level bar PRE EQ Send from the pre-EQ point
This adjusts the send level to each AUX in the range of -Inf dB– PRE FD Send from the pre-fader point
+10.0 dB. PST FD Send from the post-fader point
The color of the level bar indicates the send point or status of
the send switch as follows.
If this is set to POST FADER, muting the AUX channel will also
Color of the mute the send to the MAIN L/R channel. If this is set to PRE EQ
Status
send level bar or PRE FADER, muting the AUX channel will not affect the
Blue send point is PRE EQ or PRE FADER send to the MAIN L/R channel.
Green send point is POST FADER
76
9. Balance The function buttons have the following operations.

fig.ScrChBal.eps
[F1 (LINK)]* Turns channel link on/off. p. 78

[F2 (NAME EDIT)] Accesses the NAME EDIT p. 79
popup where you can specify
the channel name.
[F3 (COPY)] Accesses the AUX/MAIN p. 81
This adjusts the left/right output balance sent from MAIN L/R COPY popup where you can
or stereo-linked AUX channels in the range of L63–R63. copy channel settings.
[F4 (LIBRARY) Accesses the AUX/MAIN LI- p. 83
10. Group BRARY popup where you can
fig.ScrChGroup.eps
use the channel library.
popup where you can make
DCA group and MUTE group

assignments.
[F6 (PEAK CLEAR)] Clears the level meter peak
By moving the cursor to DCA GROUP or MUTE GROUP and hold or over indication.
pressing [ENTER], you can access the GROUP ASSIGN popup [F7 (COPY MAIN Copies the send amount from p. 84
MIX)]* each input channel to MAIN
where you can make DCA group and MUTE group
L/R.
assignments.
[F7 ( MTX SENDS)] Switches between the MTX
SENDS display and the AUX
[F7 ( AUX SENDS)]
SENDS display. This exists
You can also access the GROUP ASSIGN popup window by
only for the MAIN L/R chan-
pressing [F5 (GROUP ASSIGN)]. nel.
11. Fader
screen.
fig.ScrChFaderOut.eps
* AUX channels only
a
If you press [F8 (Patchbay)] to access the PATCHBAY screen,
d the currently selected channel will be highlighted in the
PATCHBAY screen.
b
c
a. Fader
This adjusts the output level in the range of -Inf dB–+10.0 dB.
b. S button
This turns SOLO on/off for the channel.
c. M button
This turns MUTE on/off for the channel.
d. Channel meter
This indicates the signal level of the channel. For stereo-linked
channels, two meters (L and R) are shown. The point at which
the signal level is detected will be as specified in the METER
screen. For details, refer to “Editing the meter settings” (p. 122).
77
Accessing the CHANNEL DISPLAY Stereo-linking AUX channels

screen You can stereo-link adjacent odd-numbered and even-numbered
1. In the fader module section, press [SEL] to select MAIN L/R AUX channels so that their parameters will have the same settings.
or an AUX channel. This is convenient when you want stereo output.
1. Access the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for the AUX channel

The MAIN L channel or MAIN R channel will be selected that you want to stereo-link.
fig.ScrChAux.eps
alternately each time you press MAIN [SEL].
2. In the CHANNEL EDIT section, press [CH DISP] to access

fig.ScrChAux.eps
2. Press [F1 (LINK)] to turn it on, and the AUX channels will be
stereo-linked.
The parameters of the even-numbered channel will be set to the

By pressing a different [SEL] while the CHANNEL DISPLAY values of the odd-numbered channel.
screen is shown, you can switch to the display for that channel.
About linked parameters
If you’ve selected the “CHANNEL DISPLAY follows CH Stereo-link will link the following parameters.
SELECT” button located in the CHANNEL SELECT area of • Attenuator
User Preference (p. 177), pressing a [SEL] will recall the • Limiter parameters
CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for that channel.
• Four-band EQ parameters
• MAIN send level, send switch and send point
• MATRIX send level, send switch and send point
MAIN L/R is always stereo-linked.
When linked, the limiter will operate in stereo.
78

Specifying a channel name Use these buttons to select a color label for the channel.
and color label The function buttons have the following operations.
You can specify a channel name and color label for each AUX
channel and MAIN L/R channel. The channel name can be up to six [F1 (Recall Template)] Enters the name selected in the TEM-
characters, and you can select one of eight colors as the color label. PLATE list into the name edit field.
[F2 (HISTORY)] Successively recalls the channel names
Channel name entry and color label selection are done in the NAME
that have been entered since power-up,
EDIT popup. starting with the most recent name.
[F3 (INSERT)] Inserts a space at the cursor location.
The characters to the right of the cursor
NAME EDIT popup location will move to the right.
fig.ScrChNameEditGuide.eps

1 2 case.
cation to the numeral “0.”
[F6 (DELETE)] Deletes the character at the cursor loca-
tion. The characters to the right of the
cursor location will move to the left.
Up to sixteen names will be remembered in HISTORY.

If HISTORY becomes full, the oldest name will be deleted.
Accessing the NAME EDIT popup

3 channel.
fig.ScrChAux.eps
1. TEMPLATE
• CATEGORY list
Select the category.
• NAME list
Select a name from within that category.
Choose the CATEGORY first, and then choose a NAME.
2. Name edit field

79
Editing the channel name Using the template to enter a

channel name
2. Move the cursor to the name edit field, and edit the channel
name. 2. Move the cursor to the CATEGORY list in the TEMPLATE
Use the cursor left/right buttons to move the cursor location. area, and select the category of the name you want to enter.
Use the value dial to change the character at the cursor location.
3. Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup. and select the name that you want to enter.
4. Press [F1 (Recall Template)]. The selected name will be

Choosing a color label entered in the name edit field.
5. Move the cursor to the name edit field, and you’ll be able to
edit the name that was entered.
If you enter a name from the template, the name that was
previously in the name edit field will be deleted.

and press [ENTER] to make your selection.
80
Copying channel settings to Accessing the AUX/MAIN COPY

another channel popup
Channel settings can be copied to another channel. Channel copying
copy-source channel.
is done in the AUX/MAIN COPY popup.
fig.ScrChAux.eps
AUX/MAIN COPY popup

fig.ScrChCopyOutGuide.eps
1 2 3

2. Press [F3 (COPY)] to access the AUX/MAIN COPY popup.
fig.ScrChCopyOut.eps
1. Copy-source channel
This indicates the copy-source channel.
2. Copy parameter select buttons

Here you can select the parameters that will be copied. You can
select the following parameters.
ATT Attenuator
EQ Four-band EQ
MTX Sends MATRIX Sends
TO Main TO MAIN (AUX channels only)
Balance Balance
Limiter Limiter
Group DCA groups and MUTE groups
3. Copy-destination channel select buttons

Here you can select the copy-destination channel(s).
Button Operation
[F3 (PASTE)] Executes the copy.
81
Copying the channel settings Using the AUX/MAIN library

1. Access the AUX/MAIN COPY popup for the desired copy- You can recall channel settings from the library, or store the settings
source channel. of the current channel in the library.
fig.ScrChCopyOut.eps
AUX/MAIN library operations are performed in the AUX/MAIN
LIBRARY popup.
AUX/MAIN LIBRARY popup

fig.ScrChLibOutGuide.eps
1 2 3
2. Verify that the copy-source channel is correct.
3. Move the cursor to the desired copy parameter select

4. Move the cursor to the desired copy-destination channel

select button, and press [ENTER] to select it. You can
select more than one channel.
1. Target channel
5. Press [F3 (PASTE)]. This indicates the channel that is the target of the AUX/MAIN
LIBRARY popup.

This is a list of the library data.

Use these to select the parameters that will be recalled. You can
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the Copy select the following parameters.
operation.
ATT Attenuator
6. Press [F8 (PASTE)] to execute the Copy operation. EQ Four-band EQ
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled. Sends AUX send and MAIN send
Balance Balance
Limiter Limiter
When you execute PASTE, the copy-destination channel select
buttons will be cleared.
Noise may occur when you preview or recall a library item, but
this is not a malfunction.
AUX sends will not be recalled for AUX channels. The MAIN
send will not be recalled for the MAIN L/R channel.
82

Assigning channels to DCA
[F1 (PRESET)]
[F2 (USER)]
Displays the recall-only PRESET library.
Displays the USER library, which can be
groups and MUTE groups
recalled or stored.
Output channels can be assigned to DCA groups and MUTE groups.
[F3 (PREVIEW)] Previews (auditions) the selected library
Assignments to DCA groups and MUTE groups are made in the
data.
[F4 (RECALL)] Recalls the selected library data. GROUP ASSIGN popup.
[F5 (STORE)]* Stores the settings of the current channel
into the selected library data.
[F6 (LOCK)]* Locks or unlocks the selected library data.
GROUP ASSIGN popup
[F7 (NAME EDIT)]* Accesses the NAME EDIT popup, where fig.ScrChGrpAsgnGuideOut.eps
you can edit the name of the selected li-
brary data. 1 2 3

Accessing the AUX/MAIN LIBRARY

popup
channel.
fig.ScrChAux.eps
1. Target channel
This indicates the channel that is the target of the GROUP
ASSIGN popup.
2. DCA group select buttons

Use these to select the DCA group to which the channel will be
assigned.
3. MUTE group select buttons

Use these to select the MUTE group to which the channel will
be assigned.
2. Press [F4 (LIBRARY)] to access the AUX/MAIN LIBRARY The function buttons have the following operations.
popup.
fig.ScrChLibOut.eps

(p. 51).
When you store an AUX channel in the User library, the AUX
sends will be stored with the default values. When you store the
MAIN L/R channel in the User library, the MAIN send will be
stored with the default value.
83
Accessing the GROUP ASSIGN Assigning a channel to a MUTE

popup group
1. Access the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for the desired 1. Access the GROUP ASSIGN popup for the desired channel.
channel. fig.ScrChGroupAssign2.eps
fig.ScrChAux.eps
3. Move the cursor to the desired MUTE group, and press

2. Press [F5 (GROUP ASSIGN)] to access the GROUP ASSIGN [ENTER] to select it.
popup.
fig.ScrChGroupAssign2.eps 4. Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
For details on MUTE groups, refer to “Mute groups” (p. 145).
Copying the MAIN mix

(AUX channels only)
1. Access the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for the AUX channel
to which you want to copy the MAIN mix.
Assigning a channel to a DCA group

1. Access the GROUP ASSIGN popup for the desired channel.
fig.ScrChGroupAssign2.eps
2. Press [F7 (COPY MAIN MIX)].
3. Move the cursor to the desired DCA group select button,

and press [ENTER] to select it. A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the Copy
operation.
3. Press [F8 (OK)] to copy the send amount from each input
channel to MAIN.
For details on DCA groups, refer to “DCA groups” (p. 141).
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the Copy operation will be
cancelled.
In the case of stereo-linked AUX channels, the pan from each

input channel to MAIN will also be copied.
84
MATRIX channel operations
About MATRIX channels

MATRIX channels process a mix of the audio signals from AUX1–AUX16 and MAIN L/R, and send them to an output port. You can also select
any two channels from CH1–CH48 and mix them into a MATRIX channel.
fig.MatrixCh.eps
OUTPUT
PATCHBAY
MATRIX 1-8
TO MTX 1, 3...7
MATRIX SEND
(FROM MAIN) TO MTX 2, 4...8
POST ATT PRE FADER POST FADER OUTPUT LEVEL

TO MTX 1, 3...7
MATRIX SEND
TO MTX 2, 4...8

(FROM AUX 1-16)
EXT FX FX FADER
INSERT INSERT BAL MUTE GEQ
INSERT MATRIX 1-8
ATT OUT
CH SELECT
FROM CH A
SW SEND MTX SOLO
LINK
TO SOLO L
DIRECT OUT 1 PAN
TO SOLO R
TO MTX 2, 4...8
DIRECT OUT 48 TO MONITOR SELECT
FROM CH B
TO REC SELECT
Same as the above
TO MTX 2, 4...8
TALKBACK
OSCILLATOR
• ATT (Attenuator)
This adjusts the input level.
• EXT INSERT (External insert)
These ports let you use the rear panel CONSOLE IN1–IN8 and
CONSOLE OUT1–OUT8 ports to insert external effects
processors.
• FX INSERT (Effect insert)
These ports let you insert FX1–FX4.
• FADER
This adjusts the output level.
• BALANCE
This adjusts the left/right balance for stereo-linked MATRIX.
• MUTE
This mutes the output of the channel.
• GEQ INSERT
This port allows you to insert a 31-band GEQ.
85
MATRIX channel operations Operations using the

You can perform MATRIX channel operations in the following ways. CHANNEL EDIT section
• Operations in the METER tab of the METER screen
You can use the CHANNEL EDIT section to operate the following
Select a MATRIX channel by moving the cursor between parameters of a MATRIX channel.
MATRIX1–MATRIX8. You can use the value dial to operate the
• ATT
faders.
• Balance
fig.ScrMtxSelMeter.eps
• Send levels from AUX1–AUX16 to the MATRIX
• Operations in the USER layer

Use the fader modules assigned to MATRIX1–MATRIX8 to

select and operate channels. Before you can do this, you will
need to set the user preference in the USER FADER tab (p. 177)
to assign MATRIX1–MATRIX8 to the fader modules.
• Operations in the AUX/DCA layer

Use fader modules 17–25 to select and operate channels. Before
you can do this, you will need to set the user preference (p. 177)
so that the AUX/DCA Layer select button will select “16Auxes
+ 8Matrices.”
If a MATRIX channel is selected, pressing the CHANNEL EDIT

section [CH DISP] button will access the CHANNEL DISPLAY
screen for the MATRIX channel.
86
Selecting a channel to operate Sending the audio signal from an

1. As described in “MATRIX channel operations (p. 86),”
AUX bus
select the MATRIX channel that you want to operate. This operation is performed in the AUX SENDS area of the
2. The selected channel will appear in the channel display fig.ChEdtAux.eps
area in the upper middle of the screen.

fig.ScrSelectedMtx.eps
Attenuator adjustments
Use the PREAMP area of the CHANNEL EDIT section to adjust the
attenuator.

fig.ChEdtPreamp.eps
1. Use the GAIN dial to adjust the attenuator.
Adjusting the left/right output balance

This operation is performed in the PAN area of the CHANNEL EDIT section.
This is valid for stereo-linked MATRIX channels.
fig.ChEdtPan.eps
1. Press AUX SELECT [1]–[8] to select the send-source AUX

bus
sent to the MATRIX bus.

1. Use the PAN knob to adjust the pan. you operate the knob.
You can make fine adjustments by holding down [SHIFT] while You can’t use SENDS ON FADER to adjust the send amount
you operate the knob. from AUX channels to an MATRIX bus.
87
2. Insert indication
Operations in the CHANNEL fig.ScrChInsOut.eps
DISPLAY screen a b
c
The parameters of the MATRIX channels can be operated in the
CHANNEL DISPLAY screen. a. EXT FX
If an external effects processor is inserted, this shows the EXT
FX number that is inserted.
fig.ScrChDispMtxGuide.eps By moving the cursor to EXT FX and pressing [ENTER], you can
access the EXT FX tab of the EFFECTS screen.
1 3 4 5
Inserting an external effects processor into a channel is done in
6 the EFFECTS screen. For details, refer to “Inserting an external
7 b. GEQ INS
If a GEQ is inserted, this shows the number of the GEQ that is
8 inserted.
If the number is shown in white, the inserted GEQ is enabled. If
2 it is shown in gray, the inserted GEQ is bypassed.
By moving the cursor to GEQ INS and pressing [ENTER], you
can access the GEQ 1-4 tab of the EFFECTS screen.
1. Attenuator
fig.ScrMtxATTGuide.eps Inserting a GEQ into a channel is done in the EFFECTS screen.
For details, refer to “Inserting a 31-band GEQ” (p. 133).
b c. FX INS
a If FX1–FX4 is inserted, this shows the number of the inserted

FX.
If the number is shown in white, the inserted effect is enabled. If
it is shown in gray, the inserted effect is bypassed.
a. ATT knob The character “L” or “R” may be added to the FX INS number.
This adjusts the channel’s input level in the range of -48 dB–0 This has the following significance.
dB (6 dB steps).
b. OL (Overload) indicator Indication Explanation
This will light red when the output of the attenuator exceeds the Number+L The L side of the FX is inserted.
OVER Lev setting specified in the METER SETUP popup (p. Number+R The R side of the FX is inserted.
122). Number only Both L and R sides of the FX are inserted. The
return from the FX is mixed and input to the
channel.
Normally, you can leave the attenuator at 0 dB. If an input is By moving the cursor to FX INS and pressing [ENTER], you can
overloading, you can avoid the overload by adjusting the access the FX 1-4 tab of the EFFECTS screen.
attenuator.
Inserting an effect into a channel is done in the EFFECTS screen.

For details, refer to “Effect input/output settings” (p. 126).
Up to four effects can be inserted in a channel. In this case, they

are inserted in series in order of the FX number.
88
3. FROM AUX send 5. FROM CH send

fig.ScrFromAux.eps fig.Scr.FromCheps
a
c
b d
Here you can select any two channels from CH1–CH48 and mix
These adjust the send levels from AUX1–AUX16 to MATRIX. The them into the MATRIX.
FROM AUX sends are structured as follows. a. MATRIX SOURCE SELECT popup button

fig.ScrFromAux1.eps
This button accesses the MATRIX SOURCE SELECT popup (p.
91) where you can select the channels that will be mixed into the
a
b c MATRIX. The name of the currently selected channel is shown
on the button.
b. PAN knob
a. AUX number
This is shown if the MATRIX is stereo-linked. You can adjust
Indicates the AUX channel number.
the left/right panning to the MATRIX in a range of L63–R63.
b. ON button
c. LEVEL knob
Turns the AUX send on/off.
This adjusts the send level to the MATRIX in a range of -Inf dB–
c. LEVEL knob +10.0 dB.
Adjusts the AUX send level in a range of -Inf dB–+10.0 dB.
For a stereo-linked MATRIX, the channel selection and send

The FROM AUX send LEVEL knobs can also be operated from level will be the same for FROM CH A and FROM CH B.
the CHANNEL EDIT section’s AUX SENDS area (p. 87).
4. FROM MAIN L/R send The position at which the signal is taken from CH1–CH48 is the
fig.ScrFromMain.eps
same as the direct out send position. This setting is made in the
CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for CH1–CH48 (p. 60).
a b 6. Balance
fig.ScrChBal.eps
Adjusts the send level from MAIN L/R to MATRIX.

a. ON button
Turns the send from MAIN L/R on/off.
b. LEVEL knob
Adjusts the send level from MAIN L/R in a range of -Inf dB– This adjusts the left/right output balance sent from stereo-
+10.0 dB. linked MATRIX channels in the range of L63–R63.
7. Group
The FROM AUX send and FROM MAIN L/R parameters are fig.ScrChGroup.eps
actually parameters of the AUX channels and MAIN L/R

channel. If a MATRIX is stereo-linked, its send pan and send
position can be edited in the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for
AUX1–AUX16 and MAIN L/R (p. 75).
By moving the cursor to DCA GROUP or MUTE GROUP and

pressing [ENTER], you can access the GROUP ASSIGN popup
where you can make DCA group and MUTE group
assignments.
You can also access the GROUP ASSIGN popup window by

pressing [F5 (GROUP ASSIGN)].
89
8. Fader
fig.ScrChFaderOut.eps
Accessing the CHANNEL DISPLAY
screen
a 1. As described in “MATRIX channel operations” (p. 86),
select the MATRIX channel that you want to operate.
d 2. In the CHANNEL EDIT section, press [CH DISP] to access
fig.ScrChDispMtx.eps
b
c
a. Fader
This adjusts the output level in the range of -Inf dB–+10.0 dB.
b. S button
This turns SOLO on/off for the channel.
c. M button
Stereo-linking MATRIX channels
d. Channel meter You can stereo-link adjacent odd-numbered and even-numbered
This indicates the signal level of the channel. For stereo-linked MATRIX channels so that their parameters will have the same
channels, two meters (L and R) are shown. The point at which settings. This is convenient when you want stereo output.
the signal level is detected will be as specified in the METER
1. Access the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for the MATRIX
screen. For details, refer to “Editing the meter settings” (p. 122).
channel that you want to stereo-link.
[F1 (LINK)] Turns channel link on/off.

popup where you can specify
the channel name.
popup where you can make
DCA group and MUTE group
assignments.
[F6 (PEAK CLEAR)] Clears the level meter peak
[F7 (COPY MIX)] Copies the mix of a MATRIX p. 92 2. Press [F1 (LINK)] to turn it on, and the MATRIX channels
channel to another MATRIX will be stereo-linked.
channel.
screen. The parameters of the even-numbered channel will be set to the
values of the odd-numbered channel.
If you press [F8 (Patchbay)] to access the PATCHBAY screen, About linked parameters
the currently selected channel will be highlighted in the
Stereo-link will link the following parameters.
PATCHBAY screen.
• Attenuator parameters
• The FROM AUX and FROM MAIN L/R send levels and send
switches
• The FROM CH A/B channel selections, send levels, send
switches, and send pans
90
Selecting the FROM CH A/B

Operations in the MATRIX SOURCE channels
SELECT popup
aig.ScrMtxSelGuide.eps
1. Access the MATRIX SOURCE SELECT popup.
fig.ScrMtxSel.eps
1 2 3

2. Use [F1 (CH 1-24)] or [F2 (CH 25-48)] to access the desired
1. Current channel selection indication channel select buttons.
This indicates the currently selected channel.
3. Move the cursor to the desired channel select button, and
2. Target MATRIX indication press [ENTER] to select it.
This indicates the MATRIX that is the target of operations in the
MATRIX SOURCE SELECT popup.
3. Channel select buttons If you decide to cancel your channel selection,

These buttons select the channels that will be mixed to the press [F6 (SELECT NONE)].
MATRIX.
In the MATRIX SOURCE SELECT popup, the function buttons

perform the following operations.
[F1 (CH 1–24)] Displays CH1–CH24 as the channel se-

lect buttons.
[F2 (CH 25–48)] Displays CH25–CH48 as the channel
select buttons.
[F5 (SELECT NONE)] Cancels the channel selection.
Accessing the MATRIX SOURCE

SELECT popup
1. Move the cursor to the MATRIX SOURCE SELECT popup
button (p. 89) and press [ENTER].
fig.ScrMtxSel.eps
The MATRIX SOURCE SELECT popup will appear.
91
Copying a mix to another MATRIX

Copying a mix to another MATRIX
1. Access the COPY MATRIX MIX popup for the desired copy-
You can copy the mix from one MATRIX to another MATRIX. Use source MATRIX channel.
the COPY MATRIX MIX popup to perform this operation. fig.ScrMtxCopy.eps
COPY MATRIX MIX popup

fig.ScrMtxCopyGuide.eps
1 2
2. Use the copy-destination select button to select the copy-

destination MATRIX channel.
3. Press [F3 (PASTE)].

CopyCHoutonf1.eps
1. Copy-source channel indication

This indicates the copy-source MATRIX channel.
2. Copy-destination channel select button

This selects the copy-destination MATRIX channel.
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the copy
In the COPY MATRIX MIX popup, the function buttons perform the operation.
following operations.
4. Press [F8 (PASTE)] to copy the mix to the MATRIX channel
you selected in step 3.
[F3 (PASTE)] Executes the copy.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled.
Accessing the COPY MATRIX MIX

popup
copy-source MATRIX channel.
2. Press [F7 (COPY MIX)] to access the COPY MATRIX MIX

popup.
fig.ScrMtxCopy.eps
92
Dynamics
Gate/expander operations
A gate/expander is provided on CH1–CH48, and can be used as either a gate, an expander, or a ducking processor. Up to twenty-four gate/
expander units can be turned on.
A gate applies a user-adjustable level of attenuation (RANGE) to input signals that are lower than the threshold level.
fig.GateCurve.eps
INPUT SIGNAL
OUTPUT SIGNAL
THRESHOLD ATTACK HOLD RELEASE
OUTPUT LEVEL
LEVEL
THRESHOLD
RANGE RANGE
Dynamics
INPUT LEVEL TIME
An expander applies a user-adjustable ratio of attenuation (RATIO) to input signals that are lower than the threshold level.
fig.ExpCurve.eps
INPUT SIGNAL
(KNEE=HARD) (RATIO=INF:1)
OUTPUT SIGNAL
THRESHOLD
ATTACK RELEASE
OUTPUT LEVEL
LEVEL
THRESHOLD
RATIO INPUT LEVEL TIME
A ducking applies a user-adjustable level of attenuation (RANGE) to input signals that are higher than the threshold level.
fig.GateDuck.eps
INPUT SIGNAL
LEVEL
OUTPUT SIGNAL
THRESHOLD ATTACK HOLD RELEASE
OUTPUT LEVEL
RANGE
THRESHOLD
RANGE
INPUT LEVEL TIME
Gate/expander operations are performed in the GATE/EXPANDER popup.
93
Dynamics
GATE/EXPANDER popup
fig.PopGateGuide.eps
2 3 4 5 6
7
Dynamics
1. TYPE select buttons Gate

These select the gate/expander type from the following choices.
fig.PopGateGuide2.eps
GATE Gate a b
EXPANDER Expander
DUCKING Ducking
2. KEY-IN meter
This indicates the level of the key-in signal. For stereo-linked
channels, two meters are shown (L and R).
3. IN meter
This indicates the input level to the gate/expander. For stereo-
linked channels, two meters are shown (L and R).
4. GR meter
gate/expander. c d e
5. Gate/expander graph a. THRESH knob
This indicates the approximate response of the gate/expander. This adjusts the threshold level in a range of -80.0 dB–0.0 dB.
6. OUT meter b. RANGE knob

This indicates the output level of the gate/expander. For stereo- This adjusts the RANGE in a range of -Inf dB–0.0 dB.
linked channels, two meters are shown (L and R).
c. ATTACK knob
7. KEY-IN SELECT popup button This adjusts the ATTACK time in a range of 0.0 ms–800.0 ms.
This accesses the KEY-IN SELECT popup where you can select This is the time from when the input signal exceeds the
the key-in signal. For stereo-linked channels, there will be two threshold level until the gate opens completely.
(L and R). The channel currently selected as the key-in signal is
shown on the button. d. RELEASE knob
This adjusts the RELEASE time in a range of 0 ms–8000 ms. This
is the time over which the gate reaches its maximum effect after
the HOLD time has elapsed.
e. HOLD knob
This adjusts the HOLD time in a range of 0 ms–8000 ms. This is
the time from when the input signal falls below the threshold
level until the gate begins closing.
94
Dynamics
Expander a. THRESH knob

This adjusts the threshold level in a range of -80.0 dB–0.0 dB.
fig.PopExpGuide.eps
a b c b. RANGE knob
This adjusts the RANGE in a range of -Inf dB–0.0 dB.
c. ATTACK knob
This adjusts the ATTACK time in a range of 0.0 ms–800.0 ms.
This is the time from when the input signal exceeds the
threshold level until the ducking effect reaches its maximum.
d. RELEASE knob
This adjusts the RELEASE time in a range of 0 ms–8000 ms. This
is the time over which the ducking effect disappears after the
HOLD time has elapsed.
e. HOLD knob
This adjusts the HOLD time in a range of 0 ms–8000 ms. This is
d e
Dynamics
the time from when the input signal falls below the threshold
level until the ducking effect begins to disappear.
a. THRESH knob
This adjusts the threshold level in a range of -80.0 dB–0.0 dB.
b. RATIO knob In the GATE/EXPANDER popup, the function buttons perform the
This adjusts the RATIO in a range of 1.00:1–INF:1 (14 steps). following operations.
c. KNEE knob
[F1 (OVERVIEW)] Accesses the GATE/EXPANDER p. 97
This adjusts the KNEE in a range of HARD or SOFT1–SOFT9
OVERVIEW popup.
(ten steps). The way in which the expander is applied to the
[F1 (GATE ON)] Turns the gate/expander on/off.
region near the threshold level can be adjusted between steep [F4 (LIBRARY) Accesses the GATE/EXP LIBRARY p. 98
(HARD) and gentle (SOFT9). popup.
[F5 (PEAK CLEAR)] Clears the level meter’s peak hold
d. ATTACK knob or over indication.
This adjusts the ATTACK time in a range of 0.0 ms–800.0 ms. [F8 (CLOSE)] Closes the popup.
This is the time from when the input signal exceeds the
threshold level until the expander effect disappears.
e. RELEASE knob Accessing the GATE/EXPANDER

This adjusts the RELEASE time in a range of 0 ms–8000 ms. This popup
is the time from when the input signal falls below the threshold
level until the expander effect reaches its maximum. 1. In the fader module section, press a [SEL] button to select
the desired channel.
Ducking 2. In the GATE area of the CHANNEL EDIT section, press

fig.PopDuckGuide.eps
[DISP].
fig.PopGate.eps
a b
The GATE/EXPANDER popup will appear.
c d e
95
Dynamics
3. Key-in signal select buttons

Selecting the key-in signal for the These buttons select the channel that will be used as the key-in
gate/expander signal.
In the KEY-IN SELECT popup, the function buttons perform the
fig.GateKeyInFlow.eps
FILTER GATE COMP
[F1 (CH 1–24)] Displays CH1–CH24 as the key-in signal

To Gate select buttons.
KEY-IN
Gate select buttons.
KEY-IN
[F6 (SELECT SELF)] Selects the channel itself as its own key-in
The key-in signal used by the gate/expander is taken from the post- signal.
filter point of CH1–CH48. [F8 (CLOSE)] Closes the popup.
Use the KEY-IN SELECT popup to select the key-in signal.
Accessing the KEY-IN SELECT popup

KEY-IN SELECT popup
1. Move the cursor to the KEY-IN SELECT popup button and
Dynamics
fig.PopKeyInGuide.eps
press [ENTER].
1 2 3 The KEY-IN SELECT popup will appear.
fig.PopKeyIn.eps
1. Current key indication Selecting the key-in signal

This indicates the current key.
1. Access the KEY-IN SELECT popup.
2. Dynamics type indication fig.PopKeyIn.eps
This indicates the type of dynamics to which the KEY-IN

SELECT popup applies.
2. Use [F1 (CH 1–24)] or [F2 (CH 25–48)] to view the desired
key-in signal select buttons.
3. Move the cursor to the desired key-in signal select button,

If you want the channel itself to be its own key-in signal, press
[F6 (SELCT SELF)].
96
Dynamics
GATE/EXPANDER OVERVIEW
If you attempt to turn on more than twenty-four gate/expander
popup
units, the following warning message will appear, and no
fig.ScrGateOverviewGuide.eps
further units can be turned on.
fig.ScrGateOvMsg.eps
In the GATE/EXPANDER OVERVIEW popup, the function buttons

1. Overview perform the following operations.
Dynamics
This shows the overall gate/expander status for CH1–CH48.
fig.ScrGateOverviewGuide2.eps [F8 (CLOSE)] Closes the popup.
a
b Accessing the GATE/EXPANDER
c OVERVIEW popup
d
1. Access the GATE EXPANDER popup.
fig.PopGate.eps
e
a. Channel number
b. ON switch
Turns the gate/expander on or off.
c. Type indication
Indicates the currently selected type.
d. Gate/expander graph 2. Press [F1 (OVERVIEW)] to access the GATE/EXPANDER

Shows the approximate response of the gate/expander. OVERVIEW popup.
fig.ScrGateOverview.eps
e. GR meter
Shows the amount of gain reduction for the gate/expander.
f. THR knob
Adjusts the threshold level of the gate/expander in a range of -
80.0 dB–0.0 dB.
2. GATE REMAIN indication

Indicates the remaining number of gate/expander units that
can be turned on. If this indicates 0, no further units can be
turned on.
Stereo-linked channels will use two gate/expander units. This

means that if the GATE REMAIN indication is 1, you won’t be
able to turn on the gate/expander for a stereo-linked channel. If
you enable stereo linking for a channel when the GATE
REMAIN indication is 0, and this would cause the number of
gate/expander units to exceed 24, the gate/expander for that
channel will be turned off.
97
Dynamics
Accessing the GATE/EXP LIBRARY

Using the gate/expander library popup
You can recall gate/expander settings from the library, or store the
current gate/expander settings in the library. 1. Access the GATE/EXPANDER popup.
fig.PopGate.eps
The GATE/EXP LIBRARY popup is used to perform gate/expander
library operations.
GATE/EXP LIBRARY popup

fig.PopGateLibGuide.eps
1 2
Dynamics
2. Press [F4 (LIBRARY)] to access the GATE/EXP LIBRARY

popup.
fig.PopGateLib.eps
1. Channel indication
This indicates the channel to which the GATE/EXP LIBRARY
popup applies.

In the GATE/EXP LIBRARY popup, the function buttons perform For details on library operations, refer to “Library operations”
the following operations. (p. 51).

[F2 (USER)] Displays the USER library, which lets you
recall or store data.
[F3 (PREVIEW)] Previews (auditions) the library data that
is selected in the list.
[F4 (RECALL)] Recalls the library data that is selected in
the list.
[F5 (STORE)]* Stores settings to the library data that is
selected in the list.
[F6 (LOCK)]* Locks the library data that is selected in
the list.
[F7 (NAME EDIT)]* Accesses the NAME EDIT popup for edit-
ing the name of the user library data that
98
Dynamics
Compressor operations
Compressors are provided on CH1–CH48. They apply a user-adjustable ratio of attenuation to input signals that exceed the threshold level. Up to
twenty-four compressors can be turned on.
fig.CompCurve.eps
INPUT SIGNAL
(KNEE=HARD, GAIN=0.0dB, AUTO GAIN=OFF) (RATIO=INF:1)
OUTPUT SIGNAL
THRESHOLD ATTACK RELEASE
OUTPUT LEVEL
LEVEL
RATIO
THRESHOLD
Dynamics
INPUT LEVEL TIME
The COMPRESSOR popup is used to perform compressor operations.
COMPRESSOR popup
fig.PopCompGuide.eps
1 2 3 4 5
7 8 9
6
10 11 12
1. KEY-IN meter 4. Compressor graph

This indicates the level of the key-in signal. For stereo-linked This indicates the approximate response of the compressor.
channels, two meters (L and R) are shown.
5. OUT meter
2. IN meter This indicates the output level of the compressor. For stereo-
This indicates the input level to the compressor. For stereo- linked channels, two meters (L and R) are shown.
linked channels, two meters (L and R) are shown.
3. GR meter
compressor.
99
Dynamics
6. KEY-IN SELECT popup button In the COMPRESSOR popup window, the function buttons perform
This accesses the KEY-IN SELECT popup window where you the following operations.
can select the key-in signal. For stereo-linked channels, there are
two buttons (L and R). The channel currently selected as the [F1 (OVERVIEW) Accesses the COMPRESSOR p. 102
key-in signal is shown on the button. OVERVIEW popup.
[F2 (COMP ON)] Turns the compressor on/off.
7. THRESH knob [F3 (AUTO GAIN)] Turn AUTO GAIN on/off.
This adjusts the threshold level in a range of -40.0 dB–0.0 dB. [F4 (LIBRARY) Accesses the COMP LIBRARY p. 103
popup window.
8. RATIO knob [F5 (PEAK CLEAR)] Clears the level meter’s peak
This adjusts the RATIO in a range of 1.00:1–INF:1(14 steps). hold or over indication.
9. KNEE knob
This adjusts the KNEE in a range of HARD to SOFT1–SOFT9
(ten steps). The way in which the compressor applies to the
If you turn AUTO GAIN on, the output response of the
region near the threshold level can be adjusted between steep
compressor will be boosted as high as possible while
(HARD) and gradual (SOFT9).
maintaining 6 dB of headroom.
Dynamics
10. ATTACK knob

This is the time from when the input signal exceeds the The compressor will narrow the dynamic range, since it reduces
threshold level until the compressor reaches its maximum the output of incoming signals that exceed the threshold level. If
effect. AUTO GAIN is on, the upper limit of the output level when
ATTACK time is 0 ms will be boosted while maintaining 6 dB of
11. RELEASE knob headroom from clip level (0 dB), thus maximizing the dynamic
This adjusts the RELEASE time in a range of 0 ms–8000 ms. This range.
is the time from when the signal falls below the threshold level The 6 dB of headroom is maintained in order to prevent the
until the compressor is no longer applied. compressor’s output from clipping during the attack portion of
the input signal when the ATTACK time is set to a longer value.
12. GAIN knob
This adjusts the GAIN in a range of -40.0 dB–+40.0 dB. This
adjusts the output level of the compressor.
Accessing the COMPRESSOR popup

If AUTO GAIN is on, the GAIN will have an effective range of -
40.0 dB–+6.0 dB. If the GAIN value is outside the effective 1. In the fader module section, press a [SEL] button to select
range, the value will be shown in red. the desired channel.
2. In the COMP area of the CHANNEL EDIT section, press

[DISP].
fig.PopComp.eps
The COMPRESSOR popup will appear.
100
Dynamics
Accessing the KEY-IN SELECT popup

Selecting the key-in signal for the
compressor 1. Move the cursor to the KEY-IN SELECT popup button, and
press [ENTER].
fig.CompKeyInFlow.eps
The KEY-IN SELECT popup will appear.
FILTER GATE COMP fig.PopKeyIn2.eps
To Comp
KEY-IN
Comp
KEY-IN
The key-in signal used by the compressor is taken from immediately
after the gate of CH1–CH48.
To select the key-in signal, use the KEY-IN SELECT popup.
KEY-IN SELECT popup

Selecting a key-in signal
Dynamics
fig.PopKeyInguide2.eps
1 2 3 1. Access the KEY-IN SELECT popup.

fig.PopKeyIn2.eps
1. Current key indication 2. Press [F1 (CH 1–24)] or [F2 (CH 25–48)] to view the desired
This indicates the current key. key-in signal select buttons.
2. Assigned dynamics indication 3. Move the cursor to the desired key-in signal select button,
This indicates the dynamics to which the KEY-IN SELECT and press [ENTER] to select it.
popup applies.
3. Key-in signal select buttons
Use these to select the channel that will be used as the key-in If you want to use the channel itself as its own key-in signal,
signal. press [F6 (SELECT SELF)].
In the KEY-IN SELECT popup, the function buttons perform the


select buttons.
select buttons.
[F6 (SELECT SELF)] Selects the channel itself as its own key-in
signal.
101
Dynamics
COMPRESSOR OVERVIEW popup

If you attempt to turn on more than twenty-four compressor
fig.ScrCompOverviewGuide.eps
units, the following warning message will appear, and no
further units can be turned on.
fig.ScrCompOvMsg.eps
1. Overview In the COMPRESSOR OVERVIEW popup, the function buttons

This shows the overall compressor status for CH1–CH48. perform the following operations.
Dynamics
fig.ScrCompOverviewGuide2.eps
a [F8 (CLOSE)] Closes the popup.

b
c
Accessing the COMPRESSOR
d OVERVIEW popup
1. Access the COMPRESSOR popup.
e fig.PopComp.eps
a. Channel number
b. ON switch
Turns the compressor on/off.
c. Compressor graph
Shows the approximate response of the compressor.
d. GR meter
Shows the amount of gain reduction for the compressor.
e. THR knob
Adjusts the threshold level of the compressor in a range of -40.0 2. Press [F1 (OVERVIEW)] to access the COMPRESSOR
dB–0.0 dB. OVERVIEW popup.
fig.ScrCompOverview.eps
2. COMP REMAIN indication

Indicates the remaining number of compressor units that can be
turned on. If this indicates 0, no further units can be turned on.
Stereo-linked channels will use two compressor units. This

means that if the COMP REMAIN indication is 1, you won’t be
able to turn on the compressor for a stereo-linked channel. If
you enable stereo-linking for a channel when the COMP
REMAIN indication is 0, and this would cause the number of
compressor units to exceed 24, the compressor for that channel
will be turned off.
102
Dynamics
Accessing the COMP LIBRARY popup

Using the compressor library
1. Access the COMPRESSOR popup.
You can recall compressor settings from the library, or store the fig.PopComp.eps
current compressor settings in the library.
The COMP LIBRARY popup is used to perform compressor library
operations.
COMP LIBRARY popup

fig.PopCompLibGuide.eps
1 2
2. Press [F4 (LIBRARY)] to access the COMP LIBRARY popup.

fig.PopCompLib.eps
Dynamics
1. Channel indication
This indicates the channel to which the COMP LIBRARY popup
applies.

This is a list of the library data. For details on library operations, refer to “Library operations”
In the COMP LIBRARY popup, the function buttons perform (p. 51).
the following operations.
Button Function
the list.
[F5 (STORE)]* Stores settings to the library data that is se-
lected in the list.
[F6 (LOCK)]* Locks the library data that is selected in the
list.
* ing the name of the user library data that is
103
Dynamics
Limiter operations (MAIN L/R, AUX1–AUX16)

Limiters are provided on each AUX channel and MAIN L/R channel. They attenuate the signal so that the output does not exceed the threshold
level.
fig.LimCurve.eps
INPUT SIGNAL
(KNEE=HARD)
OUTPUT SIGNAL
THRESHOLD ATTACK RELEASE
OUTPUT LEVEL
LEVEL
THRESHOLD
Dynamics
INPUT LEVEL TIME

The LIMITER popup is used to perform limiter operations.
LIMITER popup
fig.PopLmtGuide.eps
1 2 3 4
5 6
7 8
1. IN meter 5. THRESH knob

This indicates the input level of the limiter. For stereo-linked This adjusts the threshold level in a range of -40.0 dB–0.0 dB.
6. KNEE knob
2. GR meter This adjusts the KNEE in a range of HARD to SOFT1–SOFT9
This indicates the amount of gain reduction produced by the (ten steps). The way in which the limiter applies to the region
limiter. near the threshold level can be adjusted between steep (HARD)
and gradual (SOFT9).
3. Limiter graph
This indicates the approximate response of the limiter. 7. ATTACK knob
4. OUT meter This is the time from when the input signal exceeds the
This indicates the output level of the limiter. For stereo-linked threshold level until the limiter reaches its maximum effect.
104
Dynamics
8. RELEASE knob
This adjusts the RELEASE time in a range of 0 ms–8000 ms. This Using the limiter library
is the time from when the signal falls below the threshold level
You can recall limiter settings from the library, or store the current
until the limiter is no longer applied.
limiter settings in the library.
The LIMITER LIBRARY popup is used to perform limiter library
In the LIMITER popup, the function buttons perform the following
operations.
operations.
Button Function LIMITER LIBRARY popup

[F1 (LIMITER ON)] Turns the limiter on/off. fig.ScrLmtLibGuide.eps
[F4 (LIBRARY) Accesses the LIMITER LIBRARY popup.
[F5 (PEAK CLEAR)] Clears the level meter’s peak hold or over 1 2
indication.
Accessing the LIMITER popup
Dynamics
1. In the fader module section, press [SEL] to select the
desired channel.
2. In the COMP area of the CHANNEL EDIT section, press

[DISP] to access the LIMITER popup.
fig.PopLmt.eps 1. Channel indication
This indicates the channel to which the LIMITER LIBRARY
popup applies.

In the LIMITER LIBRARY popup, the function buttons perform
Button Function
the list.
lected in the list.
list.
ing the name of the user library data that is
105
Dynamics
Accessing the LIMITER LIBRARY

popup
1. Access the LIMITER popup.
fig.PopLmt.eps
Dynamics
2. Press [F4 (LIBRARY)] to access the LIMITER LIBRARY

popup.
fig.ScrLmtLib.eps

(p. 51).
106
Four-band EQ
Four-band EQ operations
Four-band EQ is provided on each input channel, the MAIN L/R channels, and each AUX channel.
The LO and HI bands provide shelving-type filters, and the LO-MID and HI-MID bands provide peaking-type filters.
fig.EQCurve.eps
LEVEL
LO LO-MID HI-MID HI
Q Q
GAIN
0dB
GAIN
Four-band EQ
FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQUENCY
The EQUALIZER popup is used to perform four-band EQ operations.
EQUALIZER popup
In the EQUALIZER popup for an input channel, you can adjust filter operations as well as four-band EQ operations.
fig.PopEQGuide.eps
7 8 9
6
2
3 10 11
4 12 13 14 15
5 16 17 18 19
Filter (input channels only) 2. Filter type selection buttons

These buttons select one of the following filter types.
1. OL (Overload) indicator
This indicates that the filter’s output is overloading. Type Explanation
HI PASS Passes the region higher than the specified fre-
quency.
Use the METER SETUP popup to specify the level at which the NOTCH Cuts the region at the specified frequency.
overload indicator will light. For details, refer to “Editing the BAND PASS Passes the region at the specified frequency.
meter settings” (p. 122). LO PASS Passes the region below the specified frequency.
107
Four-band EQ
fig.FilterCurve.eps 3. Q knob
HI PASS This adjusts the filter’s Q in a range of 0.36–16. Higher values
LEVEL
produce a sharper curve.
4. FREQ knob
This adjusts the frequency in a range of 20 Hz–20.0 kHz.
Q 5. FT ATT knob
This adjusts the filter’s attenuator in a range of -48.0 dB–+15.0
dB.
Normally, you should leave FT ATT at 0.0 dB. Adjust this only
FREQUENCY
FREQ when the filter is overloading.
Four-band EQ
NOTCH 6. EQ ATT knob
LEVEL
This adjusts the EQ input level in a range of -48.0 dB–+15.0 dB.

Four-band EQ
Normally, you should leave EQ ATT at 0.0 dB. Adjust this only
when the four-band EQ is overloading.
7. IN meter
Q
This indicates the input level of the four-band EQ. For stereo-
FREQUENCY 8. Four-band EQ graph

FREQ
This indicates the approximate response of the four-band EQ.
9. OUT meter
This indicates the output level of the four-band EQ. For stereo-
BAND PASS
LEVEL
10. Q knob (LO-MID)
Q 11. Q knob (HI-MID)

These adjust the Q of the LO-MID and HI-MID bands in a range
of 0.36–16. Higher values produce a sharper curve.
12. FREQ knob (LO)

This adjusts the center frequency of the LO band in a range of 20
Hz–1.00 kHz.
FREQUENCY
FREQ
13. FREQ knob (LO-MID)
14. FREQ knob (HI-MID)

LO PASS These adjust the center frequency of the LO-MID and HI-MID
LEVEL
bands in a range of 20 Hz–20.0 kHz.
15. FREQ knob (HI)

This adjusts the center frequency of the HI band in a range of
1.00 kHz–20.0 kHz.
Q
FREQUENCY
FREQ
108
Four-band EQ
16. GAIN knob (LO)
17. GAIN knob (LO-MID)

Using the EQ library
You can recall four-band EQ and filter settings from the library, or
18. GAIN knob (HI-MID)
store the current four-band EQ and filter settings to the library.
19. GAIN knob (HI) The EQ LIBRARY popup is used to perform EQ library operations.
These adjust the gain of the LO, LO-MID, HI-MID, and HI
bands in a range of -15.0 dB–+15.0 dB.
EQ LIBRARY popup
fig.PopEQLibGuide.eps
Noise may occur when you operate the filter or four-band EQ,
but this is not a malfunction. 1 2 3
In the EQUALIZER popup, the function buttons perform the

[F1 (FILTER ON)]* Turns the filter on/off.

[F2 (EQ ON)] Turns the four-band EQ on/off.
[F4 (LIBRARY) Accesses the EQ LIBRARY popup. p. 109
Four-band EQ
[F5 (PEAK CLEAR)] Clears the level meter’s peak hold
or over indication.
[F6 (FLAT)] Sets the four-band EQ to flat re- p. 110
sponse. 1. Channel indication
[F8 (CLOSE)] Closes the popup. This indicates the channel to which the EQ LIBRARY popup
applies.
* CH1 - CH48 only
Accessing the EQUALIZER popup
1. In the fader module section, press a [SEL] button to select These select the section that will be recalled.
2. In the EQUALIZER area of the CHANNEL EDIT section, If you’re recalling to the MAIN L/R channels or AUX channels,
press [DISP]. filter data will not be recalled.
fig.PopEQ.eps
In the EQ LIBRARY popup, the function buttons perform the


[F3 (PREVIEW)] Previews (auditions) the selected library
data.
[F4 (RECALL)] Recalls the selected library data.
[F5 (STORE)]* Stores settings to the selected library data.
[F6 (LOCK)]* Locks the selected library data.
The EQUALIZER popup will appear. ing the name of the selected user library
data.
109
Four-band EQ
Accessing the EQ LIBRARY popup

Setting the four-band EQ to a flat
1. Access the EQUALIZER popup.
fig.PopEQ.eps
state
1. Access the EQUALIZER popup.
2. Press [F6 (FLAT)].

fig.ScrEQFlatConf.eps
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the operation.
2. Press [F4 (LIBRARY)] to access the EQ LIBRARY popup. 3. Press [F8 (FLAT)]; the gain of the LO, LO-MID, HI-MID, and
fig.PopEQLib.eps HI bands will be set to 0.0 dB.
Four-band EQ

(p. 51).
Noise may occur when you preview or recall a library item, but
this is not a malfunction.
When you store the EQ settings of the MAIN L/R channels or

an AUX channel into the User library, the default filter values
will be stored.
110
AUX send/MATRIX send
AUX send operations

The AUX sends are used to send audio signals from input channels or the MAIN L/R channels to AUX1–AUX16.
fig.InBlkSends.eps
AUX SENDS (CH1 - CH48)

MAIN AUX SOLO
LR 1 2 16 L R
PRE EQ PRE FADER POST FADER
MAIN
MUTE FADER PAN SW
4BAND
EQ
AUX SEND 1-16
PRE EQ SW SEND AUX

LINK TO AUX
PRE FADER
1, 3...15
POST FADER
PAN
PRE EQ SW SEND
PRE FADER TO AUX
2, 4...16
POST FADER
LR 1 2 16 L R
MAIN AUX SOLO

fig.MainBlkSends.eps
AUX SENDS (MAIN L/R)
PRE EQ PRE FADER POST FADER OUTPUT LEVEL
FADER BAL
MUTE GEQ
4BAND INSERT
EQ LIMITER
AUX SEND 1-16
PRE EQ SW SEND AUX

PRE FADER
LINK
PAN
PRE EQ SW SEND
PRE FADER
The AUX SENDS popup is used to perform AUX send operations.
111
5. AUX LINK switch

AUX SENDS popup This turns linking of adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered
AUX channels on/off. If this is on, the adjacent AUX channels
fig.PopAuxSends.eps
will be linked.
If AUX is stereo-linked, the following parameters will be shown
for the odd-numbered AUX send.
fig.PopAuxSendField2Guide.eps
1 2
1. AUX pan slider

This adjusts the left/right panning of the signal sent to the
stereo-linked AUX channels in a range of L63–R63.
You can use the tabs in the AUX SENDS popup to switch between 2. PAN LINK button (input channels only)
two display pages: sends to AUX1–AUX8 (SENDS 1-8) or sends to This turns the PAN LINK switch on/off. If PAN LINK is on, the
AUX9–AUX16 (SENDS 9-16). pan from the channel to MAIN L/R will be linked with the pan
• AUX sends 1–8, AUX sends 9–16 from the channel to the stereo-linked AUX channels.
These adjust the sends from the CH to AUX. The AUX send
area is structured as follows. In the AUX SENDS popup, the function buttons perform the
fig.PopAuxSendFieldGuide.eps
1 2 3 4 5
Button Function
[F1 (SENDS 1-8)] Displays the sends to AUX1–AUX8.
[F2 (SENDS 9-16)] Displays the sends to AUX9–AUX16.
[F3 (ALL ON) Turns on all send switches for each send
1. AUX number and name field.
[F4 (ALL OFF) Turns off all send switches for each send
This indicates the AUX channel number and name.
field.
2. Send level bar [F5 (UNITY) Sets the send level to 0.0 dB for the send field
at the cursor location.
This adjusts the send level to AUX in a range of -Inf dB–+10.0
dB.
The color of the send level bar indicates the send point or the
status of the send switch, as follows.
Accessing the AUX SENDS popup
Color of the Status
send level bar 1. In the fader module section, press a [SEL] button to select
Blue PRE EQ or PRE FADER send point the desired channel.
Green POST FADER send point
2. In the AUX SENDS area of the CHANNEL EDIT section,
press [DISP].
fig.PopAuxSends.eps
3. ON button
This turns the send switch on/off. The send switch turns the
signal from the channel to AUX on/off.
4. send point select buttons

These select the point from which the CH signal is sent to AUX,
from the following choices.
PRE EQ Send from the pre-EQ point.

PRE FD Send from the pre-fader point.
POST FD Send from the post-fader point
The AUX SENDS popup will appear.
112
MATRIX send operations

The MATRIX sends are used to send audio signals from AUX1–AUX16 or MAIN L/R to MATRIX1–MATRIX8.
ffig.OutBlkMtxSends.eps
MATRIX SENDS (AUX 1-16, MAIN L/R)
PRE EQ PRE FADER POST FADER OUTPUT LEVEL
FADER BAL
MUTE GEQ
4BAND INSERT
EQ LIMITER
MATRIX SEND 1-8

PRE EQ MTX
SW SEND
PRE FADER LINK
SW SEND
TO MTX 2, 4...8
The MATRIX SENDS popup is used to perform AUX send operations.
The color of the send level bar indicates the send point or the
MATRIX SENDS popup

status of the send switch, as follows.
fig.ScrMatrixSends.eps
Color of the Status
send level bar
Blue PRE EQ or PRE FADER send point
Green POST FADER send point
3. ON button
This turns the send switch on/off. The send switch turns the
signal to MATRIX on/off.
4. MATRIX LINK switch

This turns linking of adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered
• MATRIX send 1–8 MATRIX channels on/off. If this is on, the adjacent MATRIX
These adjust the sends from AUX1-AUX16 or MAIN L/R to channels will be linked.
MATRIX. The MATRIX send area is structured as follows. If MATRIX is stereo-linked, the following parameters will be
fig.PopMtxSendFieldGuide.epsˆ shown for the odd-numbered MATRIX send.
fig.PopMtxSendField2Guide.eps
1 2 3 4 5
a
a. MATRIX pan slider

This adjusts the left/right panning of the signal send to the
stereo-linked MATRIX channels in a range of L63–R63.
5. Send point select buttons

These select the point from which the AUX or MAIN signal is
sent to MATRIX, from the following choices.
1. MATRIX number and name
This indicates the MATRIX channel number and name.
PRE EQ Send from the pre-EQ point.
2. Send level bar PRE FD Send from the pre-fader point.
This adjusts the send level to MATRIX in a range of -Inf dB– POST FD Send from the post-fader point.
+10.0 dB.
113
In the MATRIX SENDS popup, the function buttons perform the

Button Function
[F3 (ALL ON) Turns on all send switches for each
send field.
[F4 (ALL OFF) Turns off all send switches for each
send field.
[F5 (UNITY) Sets the send level to 0.0 dB for the send
field at the cursor location.
[F7( MTX SENDS)] Switch to the MATRIX SENDS popup
or the AUX SENDS popup. This exists
[F7( AUX SENDS)]
only for the MAIN L/R channel.
Accessing the MATRIX SENDS

popup
1. In the fader module section, press a [SEL] button to select
Select from AUX1–AUX16 or MAIN L/R.
2. In the AUX SENDS area of the CHANNEL EDIT section,

press [DISP].
fig.ScrMatrixSends.eps
The MATRIX SENDS popup will appear.
114
Input/output patchbay
Default settings of the Patchbay operations

input/output patchbay You can change the settings of the input/output patchbays. Use the
PATCHBAY screen to perform patchbay operations.
Default settings of the input PATCHBAY screen

patchbay fig.ScrPatchGuide.eps
When the M-400 is in its default state, the input patch bay is set as 1 2
follows.
Input channel Input port

CH33–CH40 CONSOLE IN1–IN8
CH41–CH42 FX3 OUT L, R
CH43–CH44 FX4 OUT L, R
CH45–CH46 RECORDER L, R
CH47–CH48 STEREO IN L, R
3
Patching of the effect outputs and the output from the USB
memory recorder is done in the EFFECTS screen and the 1. Current Assign indication
RECORDER screen, respectively. For details, refer to “Effect For the input patchbay, this indicates the physical input source
input/output settings” (p. 126) and “Specifying the input/ that is patched to the channel at the cursor location.
output for the USB memory recorder” (p. 167). For the output patchbay, this indicates the channel that is
patched to the physical output at the cursor location.
2. Device indication
Default settings of the output This indicates the input/output unit that is connected to the
patchbay REAC port currently selected by the function buttons, or
indicates the M-400 itself.
When the M-400 is in its default state, the output patchbay is set as
3. Patchbay grid
follows.
This grid lets you make patchbay settings.
fig.ScrPatGridGuide.eps
Output port Output
REAC A OUT1–OUT6 AUX1–AUX6 b
REAC A OUT7–OUT8 MAIN L, R
REAC B OUT7–OUT8 MAIN L, R
CONSOLE OUT1–OUT6 AUX1–AUX6
CONSOLE OUT7–OUT8 MONITOR L, R
DIGITAL OUT MONITOR L, R
a c d
a. Channel indication
This indicates the channel number and name.
b. Jack indication
This indicates the jack number. For the input patchbay, this also
indicates the signal level at the input jack.
The color indicates the signal level as follows.
Color Level
Black Below -48 dB
Green Between -48 dB and -18 dB
Yellow Between -18 dB and 0 dB
Red Above 0 dB
115
c. Patch symbol
A patch symbol is shown where the currently patched channel Input patchbay operations
and jack intersect. To change the patching, move the cursor to
the location where the desired channel and jack intersect, and
press [ENTER]. Editing the input patching
1. Access the PATCHBAY screen.
You can make user preference settings to specify whether or not
fig.ScrPatchIn1608.eps
a confirmation message appears when you attempt to change
the patching. For details, refer to “Editing the name of user
settings” (p. 174).
d. Unavailable jack area

The number area is shown in gray for jacks that cannot be used
with the currently connected input/output unit.
The function buttons perform the following operations.
[F1 (INPUT)] Displays the INPUT tab, where p. 116

you can set the input patch bay. 2. Press [F1 (INPUT)] to access the INPUT tab.
[F2 (OUTPUT)] Displays the OUTPUT tab, where p. 118
you can set the output patchbay. 3. Press [F3 (REAC A)], [F4 (REAC B)], or [F5 (CONSOLE)] to
[F3 (REAC A)] Allows you to make patch bay set- select the desired location for the input jack.
tings for the REAC A input jacks.

[F4 (REAC B)] Allows you to make patch bay set- 4. Move the cursor to the intersection of the desired channel
tings for the REAC B input jacks. and jack, and press [ENTER].
fig.ScrPatchInChgConf.eps
[F5 (CONSOLE)] Allows you to make patch bay set-
tings for the M-400’s rear panel in-
put/output jacks, and for internal
ports such as the effect output and
the USB memory recorder output.
[F6 (LIBRARY) Accesses the IN PATCHBAY LI- p. 117
BRARY or OUT PATCHBAY LI- p. 119 If an input port is already patched to the channel, a message
BRARY popup.
will ask you to confirm the input patching change.
Press [F8 (ASSIGN)] to change the input patching.
Accessing the PATCHBAY screen If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the input patching change will be
cancelled.
1. In the setup section of the top panel, press [PATCHBAY].
The PATCHBAY screen will appear.
fig.ScrPatchIn1608.eps If the “PATCHBAY CHANGE” item in the CONFIRMATION
section of User Preference (p. 177) is unselected, no confirmation
message will appear in step 4.
If you attempt to patch a CONSOLE IN that an EXT FX is using,

a caution message such as the following will appear.
fig.ScrInPatchExtFx.eps
Press [F8 (DISABLE)] to disable the corresponding EXT FX and

continue with the patching change.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the patching change will be
cancelled.
A maximum of 40 input jacks each can be handled for the REAC

A port and the REAC B port, respectively.
116
Using the input patchbay Accessing the INPUT PATCHBAY

library LIBRARY popup
The input patchbay library lets you store the current input patchbay 1. Access the PATCHBAY screen.
settings for later recall.
The INPUT PATCHBAY LIBRARY popup is used to perform input
patchbay library operations.
INPUT PATCHBAY LIBRARY popup

fig.ScrInPatLibGuide.eps
2. Press [F1 (INPUT)] to access the INPUT tab.
3. Press [F6 (LIBRARY)] to access the INPUT PATCHBAY

LIBRARY popup.
fig.ScrInPatchLib.eps

recall or store data. For details on library operations, refer to “Library operations”
[F4 (RECALL)] Recalls the library data that is selected in (p. 51).
the list.
lected in the list.
list.
117
4. Move the cursor to the intersection of the desired channel

Output patchbay operations and jack, and press [ENTER].
fig.ScrPatchOutChgConf.eps
Editing the output patching

If a channel is already patched to the output port, a message

will ask you to confirm the output patching change.
Press [F8 (ASSIGN)] to change the output patching.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)] the output patching change will be
cancelled.
If the “PATCHBAY CHANGE” item in the CONFIRMATION

section of User Preference (p. 177) is unselected, no
confirmation message will appear in step 4.
2. Press [F2 (OUTPUT)] to access the OUTPUT tab.

If you attempt to patch to a CONSOLE OUT that an EXT FX is
fig.ScrPatchOut1608.eps
using, a caution message such as the following will appear.
fig.ScrOutPatchExtFx.eps
Press [F8 (DISABLE)] to disable the corresponding EXT FX and

continue with the patching change.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the patching change will be
cancelled.
3. Press [F3 (REAC A)], [F4 (REAC B)], or [F5 (CONSOLE)] to
select the desired location for the output jack.
A maximum of eight output jacks can be handled by the REAC

A port. In contrast, a maximum of forty output jacks can be
handled by the REAC B port.
118
Using the output patchbay Accessing the OUTPUT PATCHBAY

library LIBRARY popup
The output patchbay library lets you store the current output
patchbay settings for later recall.
The OUTPUT PATCHBAY LIBRARY popup is used to perform
output patchbay library operations.
OUTPUT PATCHBAY LIBRARY popup

fig.ScrOutPatLibGuide.eps
2. Press [F2 (OUTPUT)] to access the output patchbay.

fig.ScrPatchOut1608.eps

3. Press [F6 (LIBRARY)] to access the OUTPUT PATCHBAY
[F4 (RECALL)] Recalls the library data that is selected in LIBRARY popup.
the list. fig.ScrOutPatchLib.eps
lected in the list.
list.

(p. 51).
119
Metering
About the meters Viewing the meters

The M-400 provides meters on the top panel and in the screen. To view the meters for all channels, use the METER tab of the
Here we will explain the METER screen, which shows the levels of METER screen.
the channels.
METER tab
METER screen
fig.ScrMeterGuide.eps
fig.ScrMeter.eps
2
1
4
3
6 5
The content shown in the METER screen changes when you switch
tabs. 1. AUX/MAIN/MATRIX meters
In the METER screen, the function buttons perform the following These indicate the level and fader position for AUX1–AUX16,
Metering
operations. MATRIX1–MATRIX8, MONITOR L/R, and MAIN L/R.
2. AUX/MAIN/MATRIX meter point

[F1 (METER)] Accesses the METER tab, which
This indicates the point at which the AUX/MAIN/MATRIX
shows the levels of all channels.
meters are detecting the level.
[F2 (LAYER VIEW)] Accesses the LAYER VIEW tab,
which shows the levels of the
3. CH meters
same channels as the top panel
channel layer. This indicates the level and fader position for CH1–CH48.
hold or over indications. 4. CH meter point
[F4 (METER SETUP)] Accesses the METER SETUP p. 122 This indicates the point at which the CH meters are detecting
popup. the level.
5. Panel layer indication

The frame indicates the channel layer that is selected in the
Accessing the METER screen layer section of the top panel.
1. Press the top panel [METER] button.

The METER screen will appear. The panel layer indication is not shown if the USER layer is
fig.ScrMeter.eps selected.
6. Cursor
This indicates the currently selected channel. You can use the
value dial to adjust the fade of the channel at the cursor
location.
When you press [SEL] to change the selected channel, the cursor
in the screen will move. When you move the cursor in the
screen, the [SEL] indication of the top panel will likewise move.
If the “CHANNEL DISPLAY follows CH SELECT button” item

in the CHANNEL SELECT section of User Preference (p. 177) is
selected, pressing a [SEL] will cause the CHANNEL DISPLAY
screen of that channel to appear.
120
Metering
2. PAD button (CH1–CH48)

Viewing the channel strip of This is an on/off switch for the pad of the input jack that is
the channel layer patched to the channel. If this is on, the input sensitivity of the
preamp will be lowered by 20 dB.
You can view the channel strip of all of the input channels or output 3. ø (phase) button (CH1–CH48)
channels in the current layer of the top panel. This inverts the phase of the audio signal. The phase will be
To view the channel strips, use the LAYER VIEW tab of the METER inverted if this is on, and will be normal if this is off.
screen.
4. Preamp gain knob
This adjusts the preamp gain for the input jack patched to the
LAYER VIEW tab channel, in a range of -65 dBu– -10 dBu (or a range of -45 dBu–
+10 dBu if PAD is on).
fig.ScrMeterLayerGuide.eps
1 It is felt that it does not change smoothly when it coordinates

the preamp gain, but it is not trouble. In addition, some noises
come out, but it is not trouble.
5. G meter (CH1–CH48),
C meter (CH1–CH48) / L meter (AUX1–AUX16)
The G meter indicates the amount of gain reduction produced
by the gate/expander.
The C meter indicates the amount of gain reduction produced
by the compressor, and the L meter indicates the amount of
gain reduction produced by the limiter.
Metering
6. Four-band EQ graph
This indicates the approximate response of the four-band EQ.
7. S button
2 This turns SOLO on/off for the channel.
8. M button
1. Channel strip
This shows the level and principal parameters of the channels.
9. Meter
2. Meter point indication This indicates the level of the channel.
This shows the point at which the level is detected for the CH
10. Pan/balance knob
meters and AUX/MAIN/MATRIX meters.
This adjusts the pan of the channel. For stereo-linked AUX
channels, this adjusts the left/right output balance.
Channel strip operations 11. Fader
You can move the cursor to the buttons, knobs, and faders of the This adjusts the fader of the channel.
channel strip, and use the value dial to edit them.
fig.ScrMeterStripGuide.eps
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1. +48V button (CH1–CH48)

This turns +48V phantom power on/off for the input jack that is
patched to the channel.
121
Metering
Editing the meter settings The METERING POINT setting you make in the METER SETUP
In the METER SETUP popup you can change the level detection popup will apply to the top panel meters, the meters in the
point of the meter, and make peak hold settings. METER screen, the channel meters in the CHANNEL DISPLAY
screen, the MONITOR screen, and the meters in the
TALKBACK/OSC screen.
METER SETUP popup
Accessing the METER SETUP popup

fig.ScrMeterSetupGuide.eps
1 2 4
1. Access the METER screen.
fig.ScrMeter.eps
3 5
1. CH METERING POINT selection buttons
Use these to select the level detection point for the CH meters.
2. 2. Press [F4 (METER SETUP)] to access the METER SETUP

Metering
AUX/MAIN/MATRIX METERING POINT selection buttons

Use these to select the level detection point for the AUX/ popup.
fig.ScrMeterSetup.eps
MAIN/MATRIX meters.
If you select PRE EQ, the level at the pre-fader position will be
shown for MATRIX channels.
3. OVER Lev knob

This adjusts the level at which the OVER indication of the meter
will light, in a range of -18 dB–0 dB.
4. PEAK HOLD button

This turns the meter’s peak hold function on/off.
5. HOLD TIME knob

This sets the duration that the meter’s peak hold or OVER
indication will stay lit, in a range of 1 sec–4 sec or CONTINUE.
Meter peak hold is enabled only when the PEAK HOLD button
is on.
If CONTINUE is selected, the indication will remain until you

execute the PEAK CLEAR operation (by pressing a function
button) in the METER screen, etc.
In the METER SETUP popup, the function buttons perform the

122

The M-400 provides four effects (FX1–FX4) and four 31-band GEQ
processors (GEQ1–GEQ4).
The EFFECTS screen is used to operate the effects and 31-band
GEQs.
EFFECTS screen
fig.ScrFxRack.eps
You can switch tabs to change the content shown in the EFFECTS
screen.
In the EFFECTS screen, the function buttons perform the following
operations.
[F1 (FX 1–4)] Accesses the FX 1–4 tab. p. 125

[F2 (GEQ 1–4)] Accesses the GEQ 1–4 tab. p. 132
[F3 (EXT FX 1–4)] Accesses the EXT FX 1–4 tab. p. 138
[F4 (EXT FX 5–8)] Accesses the EXT FX 5–8 tab. p. 138
Accessing the EFFECTS screen

1. Press the top panel [EFFECTS] button.
The EFFECTS screen will appear.
fig.ScrFxRack.eps
123
Effects
About effects
fig.EffectDia.eps
FX FX
INPUT OUTPUT
SELECT SELECT
CH 1 FX INSERT OUT
IN LEVEL FX 1 OUT LEVEL
To CH 1 FX INSERT IN
CH 48 FX INSERT OUT To CH 48 FX INSERT IN
EFFECT
AUX 1 FX INSERT OUT To AUX 1 FX INSERT IN
AUX 16 FX INSERT OUT 31 BAND GEQ To AUX 16 FX INSERT IN
31 BAND GEQ
MATRIX 1 FX INSERT OUT To MATRIX 1 FX INSERT IN
MATRIX 8 FX INSERT OUT FX 2 To MATRIX 8 FX INSERT IN
Same as the above
MAIN L FX INSERT OUT FX 3 To MAIN L FX INSERT IN
MAIN R FX INSERT OUT Same as the above To MAIN R FX INSERT IN
AUX 1 OUT FX 4 To INPUT PATCHBAY

AUX 16 OUT Same as the above
The M-400 contains four internal effects (FX1–FX4), each of which allows you to select from 11 different
effect types including reverb and delay, or to use them as a dual 31-band GEQ.
You can use effects by inserting them into a channel, or in a send/return configuration using an AUX
channel in combination with an input channel as the FX return.
The FX 1–4 tab of the EFFECTS screen is used to perform effect operations.
124
• Dual mono
FX 1–4 tab fig.ScrFxTypeMM.eps
fig.ScrFxRack.eps
This allows the effect to be used as two monaural effects. These

effects are used mainly for insertion in a channel.
• Stereo-in/Stereo-out
fig.ScrFxTypeSS.eps
This is a stereo-input/stereo-output type effect. These effects

can be inserted into a stereo channel, or used in a send/return
configuration with stereo-linked AUX channels.
5. OUT meters
• FX1–FX4 These indicate the output level from the effect.
fig.ScrFxRackGuide.eps
6. LR LINK button
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 This links the parameters of the effect between the L and R
sides.
The following effect types support LR LINK.
• DUAL GEQ
• DELAY x2
This area indicates the status of FX1–FX4. It is organized as follows. • P.SHIFTER x2
1. Effect number indication • CH STRIP x2

This indicates the effect number.
7. BYPASS L, R buttons

2. FX INSERT/SOURCE SELECT popup button These buttons bypass the effect. When these are on, the effect
This selects the input source for the effect. The current input will be bypassed, and the input signal will be “thru-ed” to the
source is shown on the button. When you move the cursor to output. Separate buttons are provided for the L and R channels.
the button and press [ENTER], the FX INSERT/SOURCE
8. FX DESTINATION SELECT popup buttons
SELECT popup will appear. This can be set separately for the L
These select the output destination for the effect. The current
and R channels.
output source is shown on the button. When you move the
cursor to the button and press [ENTER], the FX DESTINATION
If you’ve selected insertion into a channel in the FX INSERT/ SELECT popup will appear. This can be set separately for the L
SOURCE SELECT popup, the channel insert will be used as and R channels.
both the input and output of the effect. In this case, the
corresponding FX DESTINATION SELECT button will be
If you select insertion into a channel in the FX INSERT/
unavailable.
SOURCE SELECT popup, the corresponding FX
3. IN meters DESTINATION SELECT button will be unavailable. If you want
These indicate the input level to the effect. to re-enable the FX DESTINATION SELECT button, select an
input source other than Insert in the corresponding FX
4. Effect name indication INSERT/SOURCE SELECT popup.
The upper line shows the library name, and the lower line
shows the effect type name. The icon indicates the input/output The function buttons specific to the FX 1–4 tab have the following
configuration for the effect. operations.
• Mono-in/Stereo-out
[F5 (EDIT FX1)] Accesses the FX EDIT popup for p. 129
fig.ScrFxTypeMS.eps
FX1.
FX2.
This is a monaural-input/stereo-output type effect. These
effects are used mainly in a send/return configuration. FX3.
FX4.
If you specify two input sources, the two inputs will be mixed
to mono before being input.
125
Accessing the FX INSERT/SOURCE

Effect input/output settings SELECT popup
The FX INSERT/SOURCE SELECT popup and the FX
DESTINATION SELECT popup are used to select the input source 1. Access the EFFECTS screen, and display the FX 1–4 tab.
fig.ScrFxRack.eps
and output destination for the effect.
FX INSERT/SOURCE SELECT popup

fig.ScrFXInSelGuide.eps
3 1 2
2. Move the cursor to the FX INSERT/SOURCE SELECT popup

button L or R of the desired effect, and press [ENTER].
fig.ScrFXInSelBtn.eps
FX INSERT/SOURCE SELECT popup button
In this popup you can select the input source for the effect.
1. Applicable effect indication

This indicates the effect to which the FX INSERT/SOURCE

2. Insert-destination/Input-source channel select buttons

Here you can select the insert-destination channel or the input-
source channel for the effect.
3. Current insert-destination/input-source channel indication fig.ScrFXInSel.eps

This indicates the current insert-destination channel or the
input-source channel for the effect.
In the FX INSERT/SOURCE SELECT popup, the function buttons

[F1 (CH 1–24 INSERT)] Displays CH1–CH24 as the insert-

[F2 (CH 25–48 INSERT)] Displays CH25–CH48 as the in-
sert-destination channel select but-
tons.
[F3 (BUS INSERT)] Displays AUX1–AUX16, The FX INSERT/SOURCE SELECT popup will appear.
MATRIX1–MATRIX8 and MAIN
L/R as the insert-destination chan-
nel select buttons.
[F4 (AUX OUT)] Displays AUX1–AUX16 as the in-
put-source channel select buttons.
[F6 (SELECT NONE)] Clears the input-source selection.
126
Accessing the FX DESTINATION

FX DESTINATION SELECT popup SELECT popup
fig.ScrFXOutSelGuide.eps
1. Access the EFFECTS screen, and display the FX 1–4 tab.

2 1 3 fig.ScrFxRack.eps
2. Move the cursor to the FX DESTINATION SELECT popup

In this popup you can select the output destination for the effect. button L or R of the desired effect, and press [ENTER].
fig.ScrFXOutSelBtn.eps
1. Applicable effect indication FX DESTINATION SELECT popup button
This indicates the effect to which the FX DESTINATION
2. Output channel select buttons

These select the output-destination channel for the effect.
3.

Current output-destination indication
This indicates the current output-destination channel.
In the FX DESTINATION SELECT popup, the function buttons

[F1 (CH 1–24)] Displays CH1–CH24 as the output-des-

fig.ScrFXOutSel.eps
tination channel select buttons.
[F2 (CH 25–48)] Displays CH25–CH48 as the output-des-
tination channel select buttons.
[F6 (SELECT NONE)] Clears the output-destination selection.
The FX DESTINATION SELECT popup will appear.
127
Using an effect via send/return Specifying the effect return channel

Effects such as reverb and delay are typically used in a send/return 1. Access the EFFECTS screen, and press [F1 (FX 1–4)] to
configuration. display the FX 1–4 tab.
Here we will explain the procedure for using FX3 as a send/return fig.ScrFxRack.eps
type effect using AUX15 and CH41 and CH42.
Specifying the effect input source

1. Access the EFFECTS screen, and press [F1 (FX 1–4)] to
display the FX 1–4 tab.
fig.ScrFxRack.eps
2. Move the cursor to the FX DESTINATION SELECT popup

button L for FX3, and press [ENTER].
fig.ScrFXOutSel.eps

button L for FX3, and press [ENTER].
fig.ScrFXInSel.eps
The FX DESTINATION SELECT popup will appear.
3. Press [F2 (CH 25–48)] to access the CH 25–48 tab.

fig.ScrFXOutSel2.eps
The FX INSERT/SOURCE SELECT popup will appear.
3. Press [F4 (AUX OUT)] to access the AUX OUT tab.

fig.ScrFXInSel2.eps
4. Move the cursor to the CH41 output-destination select

6. In the same way as you did in steps 1 through 5, select

CH42 as the output destination for the R side of FX3.
4. Move the cursor to the AUX15 input-source channel select

AUX15 as the input source for the R side of FX3.
128
Inserting an effect into a channel

Editing effect parameters
Here we will explain the procedure for inserting the L side of FX1
into CH1. The FX EDIT popup is used to edit the effect parameters.

display the FX 1–4 tab. FX EDIT popup
fig.ScrFxRack.eps
fig.ScrFxEditGuide.eps

button L for FX1, and press [ENTER]. 1
fig.ScrFXInSel.eps
1. Effect parameter field
In this field you can edit the effect parameters. The contents of
this field will depend on the effect type.
In the FX EDIT popup, the function buttons perform the following

operations.
[F1]–[F6] Switch the display in the effect pa-

rameter field. The number of tabs
will depend on the effect type.
[F6 (TEMPO)] Accesses the TEMPO popup. This p. 131
The FX INSERT/SOURCE SELECT popup will appear. exists only for delay-type effects.
[F7 (LIBRARY)] Accesses the FX LIBRARY popup. p. 130
3. Press [F1 (CH 1–24 INSERT)] to access the CH 1–24 INSERT
tab.
fig.ScrFXInSel.eps
4. Move the cursor to the CH1 input-source channel select

If you want to insert the effect into both channels of a stereo-

linked pair, make insert settings for both the L and R sides.
129
Accessing the FX EDIT popup

Using the effect library
display the FX 1–4 tab. The effect library is used to select the effect type. You can recall effect
fig.ScrFxRack.eps settings from the library, and store the current effect settings in the
library.
Effect library operations are performed in the FX LIBRARY popup.
FX LIBRARY popup
fig.ScrFxLibGuide.eps
1 2
2. According to the FX that you want to use, press [F5 (EDIT

FX1)]–[F8 (EDIT FX4)]. 3
fig.ScrFxEdit.eps
4
The FX EDIT popup will appear.
1. Applicable effect indication

Editing effect parameters
This indicates the effect to which the FX LIBRARY popup
1. Access the FX EDIT popup for the desired effect. applies.
fig.ScrFxEdit.eps
This is the list of library data. If you’ve used the MODE select
buttons to select DUAL GEQ, the GEQ library (p. 135) will be
shown.
3. MODE select buttons

These select the effect mode from the following choices.
Item Explanation
EFFECT Use as a conventional effect.
DUAL GEQ Use as a dual 31-band GEQ.
2. Use [F1]–[F6] to switch between tabs to view the
parameters you want to edit. 4. Applicable GEQ select buttons
When the effect type is dual 31-band GEQ, these buttons select
3. Move the cursor to the desired parameter, and use the
whether the A side or B side will be the target of FX LIBRARY
value dial to change the value.
operations.
130
In the FX LIBRARY popup, the function buttons perform the

following operations. TEMPO popup
From the FX EDIT popup for delay-type effects, you can access the
[F1 (PRESET)] Accesses the recall-only PRESET library.
TEMPO popup, which lets you set the tempo used for delay-type
[F2 (USER)] Accesses the USER library, which allows
you to recall or store data. effects.
[F3 (PREVIEW)] Previews (auditions) the library data that This tempo is used in common by FX1–FX4.
is selected in the list. fig.ScrTempoGuide.eps

the list.
1 2
[F5 (STORE)]* Stores the current settings in the library
item that is selected in the list.
the list.
[F7 (NAME EDIT)]* Accesses the NAME EDIT popup, where
you can edit the name of the user library
data selected in the list.
1. TEMPO knob
Sets the tempo (BPM) in a range of 5.0–300.0.
2. SLAVE TO MIDI CLOCK select button
If this is selected, the tempo will synchronize to MIDI clock
Accessing the FX LIBRARY popup messages received from the M-400’s rear panel MIDI connector
or USB connector. In this case, you won’t be able to use the
1. Access the FX EDIT popup for the desired effect. TEMPO knob or the tap tempo function using [F1 (TAP)] or a
fig.ScrFxEdit.eps
user button.

[F1 (TAP)] Specifies the tempo (BPM) as the average
interval at which the button is pressed
(Tap Tempo).
You can assign TAP TEMPO as a function for a user button (p.
180). This allows you to use USER [1]–[8] to enter the tempo via
2. Press [F7 (LIBRARY)]. tap tempo.
fig.ScrFxLib.eps
Accessing the TEMPO popup

1. Access the FX EDIT popup for a delay-type effect.
fig.ScrDelayx2.eps
The FX LIBRARY popup will appear.

(p. 51).
2. Press [F6 (TEMPO)].

fig.ScrTempo.eps
The TEMPO popup will appear.
131
31-band GEQ
About the 31-band GEQ
fig.GEQDia.eps
GEQ GEQ
INPUT OUTPUT
SELECT SELECT
IN LEVEL OUT LEVEL
AUX 1 GEQ INSERT OUT
GEQ 1 To AUX 1 GEQ INSERT IN
AUX 16 GEQ INSERT OUT 31 BAND GEQ To AUX 16 GEQ INSERT IN
MATRIX 1 GEQ INSERT OUT GEQ 2 To MATRIX 1 GEQ INSERT IN

Same as the above
MATRIX 8 GEQ INSERT OUT To MATRIX 8 GEQ INSERT IN
GEQ 3
Same as the above
MAIN L GEQ INSERT OUT To MAIN L GEQ INSERT IN
MAIN R GEQ INSERT OUT GEQ 4 To MAIN R GEQ INSERT IN
Same as the above
The M-400 provides four 31-band GEQ processors, GEQ1–GEQ4. You can insert a 31-band GEQ processor into the
MAIN L/R channel, into an AUX channel or into an MATRIX channel.
4. GEQ fader indication
GEQ 1–4 tab This indicates the state of the GEQ. The GEQ cannot be
operated in this screen.
fig.ScrGEQRack.eps
5. OUT meter
This indicates the level of the signal being output from the GEQ.
6. BYPASS button
This bypasses the GEQ. If this is on, the GEQ will be bypassed
and the input signal will be output without modification.
7. LINK button
This links adjacent odd-numbered and even-numbered GEQ
processors. If they are linked, the GEQ settings will be identical.
fig.ScrGEQRackGuide.eps
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 When you activate LINK, the odd-numbered unit’s settings will

be applied to the even-numbered processor.
The function buttons specific to the GEQ 1–4 tab have the
[F5 (EDIT GEQ1)] Accesses the GEQ EDIT popup for GEQ1. p. 134
This shows GEQ1–GEQ4. This area is organized as follows.
[F6 (EDIT GEQ2)] Accesses the GEQ EDIT popup for GEQ2. p. 134
1. GEQ number indication [F7 (EDIT GEQ3)] Accesses the GEQ EDIT popup for GEQ3. p. 134
This indicates the GEQ number. [F8 (EDIT GEQ4)] Accesses the GEQ EDIT popup for GEQ4. p. 134
2. GEQ INSERT SELECT popup button

This selects the channel into which the GEQ will be inserted.
The selected channel is shown on the button. When you move
the cursor to the button and press [ENTER], the GEQ INSERT
SELECT popup will appear.
3. IN meter
This indicates the level of the signal being input to the GEQ.
132
2. Move the cursor to the GEQ INSERT SELECT popup button

Inserting a 31-band GEQ for the desired GEQ, and press [ENTER].
fig.ScrGEQInsSel.eps
Use the GEQ INSERT SELECT popup to select the destination into
which you want to insert a 31-band GEQ.
GEQ INSERT SELECT popup

fig.ScrGEQInsSelGuide.eps
3 1 2
The GEQ INSERT SELECT popup will appear.

fig.ScrGEQRack.eps
This popup lets you select the destination into which the 31-band
GEQ will be inserted.
1. Applicable GEQ indication

This indicates the GEQ to which the GEQ INSERT SELECT

popup applies. 3. Move the cursor to the LINK button located at the right of
GEQ1 and GEQ2, and press [ENTER] to turn the button on.
2. Insert-destination channel select buttons
These buttons select the channel into which the GEQ will be 4. Move the cursor to the GEQ INSERT SELECT popup button
inserted. for GEQ1, and press [ENTER].
fig.ScrGEQInsSel.eps
In the GEQ INSERT SELECT popup, the function buttons perform

[F6 (SELECT NONE)] Clears the insert-destination selection.

3. Current insert destination indication

This indicates the current insert destination.
Accessing the GEQ INSERT SELECT The GEQ INSERT SELECT popup will appear.
popup
5. Move the cursor to the MAIN L insert-destination channel
1. Access the EFFECTS screen, and press [F2 (GEQ 1–4)] to select button, and press [ENTER] to select it.
display the GEQ 1–4 tab.
fig.ScrGEQRack.eps

MAIN R as the insert destination for GEQ2.
133
Accessing the GEQ EDIT popup

Editing the 31-band GEQ parameters
1. Access the EFFECTS screen, and press [F2 (GEQ1 - 4)] to
The GEQ EDIT popup is used to edit the 31-band GEQ. access the GEQ 1 - 4 tabs.
fig.ScrGEQRack.eps
GEQ EDIT popup

fig.ScrGEQEditGuide.eps
1 2
2. Press [F5 (EDIT GEQ1)] – [F8 (EDIT GEQ4)] depending on

the GEQ you want to use.
fig.ScrGEQEdit.eps
3
1. ATT knob
This adjusts the input level of the 31-band GEQ in a range of
-42.0 dB–+15.0 dB.
2. LINK button
This links adjacent odd-numbered and even-numbered GEQ
units. If they are linked, the GEQ settings will be identical. The GEQ EDIT popup will appear.
3. GEQ faders
These adjust the amount of boost or cut for each band in a range Controlling the GEQ
of -15.0 dB–+15.0 dB. The value of the operated fader is shown
1. Access the GEQ EDIT popup for the desired GEQ.
in the sub-display area.
fig.ScrGEQEdit.eps
Noise may occur when you operate the GEQ faders, but this is
not a malfunction.
In the GEQ EDIT popup, the function buttons perform the following
operations.
[F4 (FLAT)] Sets the 31-band GEQ to a

flat response.
[F5 (20–4k ON FADER)] Allows you to use the top p. 135 2. Move the cursor to the desired parameter, and use the
panel faders to operate the
value dial to change the value.
20 Hz–4 kHz bands.
[F6 (100–20k ON FADER)] Allows you to use the top p. 135 3. Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
panel faders to operate the
100 Hz–20 kHz bands.
[F7 (LIBRARY)] Accesses the GEQ LIBRARY p. 135
popup.
134
Using the top panel faders to Using the GEQ library

control the GEQ You can recall 31-band GEQ settings from the library, and store the
You can use the top panel faders to control the GEQ. current 31-band GEQ settings in the library.
GEQ library operations are performed in the GEQ LIBRARY popup.
1. Access the EFFECTS screen, and press [F2 (GEQ 1–4)] to
display the GEQ 1–4 tab.
fig.ScrGEQRack.eps GEQ LIBRARY popup
fig.ScrGEQLibGuide.eps
1 2
2. Move the cursor to the GEQ whose parameters you want to

edit, and press [F5 (EDIT GEQ)].
fig.ScrGEQEdit.eps
1. Applicable GEQ indication
This indicates the effect to which the GEQ LIBRARY popup
applies.

In the GEQ LIBRARY popup, the function buttons perform the

[F1 (PRESET)] Accesses the recall-only PRESET library.

[F2 (USER)] Accesses the USER library, which allows
The GEQ EDIT popup will appear. you to recall or store data.
3. Press [F5 (20–4k ON FADER)] or [F6 (100–20k ON FADER)] is selected in the list.
to turn it on, and you’ll be able to use the top panel faders [F4 (RECALL)] Recalls the library data that is selected in
to operate the GEQ. the list.
fig.ScrGEQFaderGuide.eps
[F5 (STORE)]* Stores the current settings to the library
item that is selected in the list.
the list.
[F7 (NAME EDIT)]* Accesses the NAME EDIT popup, where
you can edit the name of the user library
The numbers of the corresponding faders are shown in the data selected in the list.
screen. [F8 (CLOSE)] Closes the popup.

If you’ve enabled top panel fader control of the GEQ, touching a
fader with your hand will cause the cursor to move to the
corresponding GEQ fader in the screen. By lightly touching the
fader before you move it, you can verify the frequency band
that you’ll be operating.
If a fader’s position is anything other than 0 dB, the

corresponding [MUTE] will blink. When you press the blinking
[MUTE], the fader will be reset to the 0 dB position.
135
Accessing the GEQ LIBRARY popup

1. Access the GEQ EDIT popup for the GEQ unit that is the
target of GEQ LIBRARY operations.
fig.ScrGEQEdit.eps
2. Press [F7 (LIBRARY)].

fig.ScrGEQLib.eps
The GEQ LIBRARY popup will appear.

(p. 51).
The GEQ library is shared by GEQ1 -GEQ4 and by the DUAL

GEQ of FX1 - FX4. GEQ1 - GEQ4 will not recall the delay
parameter of the DUAL GEQ. When you store GEQ1 - GEQ4
into the User library, the delay parameter of DUAL GEQ will be
stored with the default value.
136
Inserting an external effects device
About inserting an external effects device

fig.ExtInsDia.eps
EXT EXT
INSERT INSERT
CONSOLE INPUT 1-8 IN
OUT
CH 1 EXT FX INSERT OUT To CH 1 EXT FX INSERT IN
CH 48 EXT FX INSERT OUT To CH 48 EXT FX INSERT IN
SEND RETURN
AUX 1 EXT FX INSERT OUT SEND LEVEL RETURN LEVEL To AUX 1 EXT FX INSERT IN
LEVEL LEVEL
AUX 16 EXT FX INSERT OUT EXT FX 1-8 To AUX 16 EXT FX INSERT IN
MATRIX 1 EXT FX INSERT OUT To MATRIX 1 EXT FX INSERT IN

MATRIX 8 EXT FX INSERT OUT To MATRIX 8 EXT FX INSERT IN
MAIN L EXT FX INSERT OUT To MAIN L EXT FX INSERT IN

MAIN R EXT FX INSERT OUT CONSOLE OUTPUT 1-8 To MAIN R EXT FX INSERT IN
You can use the CONSOLE IN 1–8 and CONSOLE OUT 1–8 jacks located on the M-400’s rear panel to insert up to
eight external effects devices into channels.
The eight external effects devices are shown virtually as an EXT FX1–EXT FX8 rack, allowing you to adjust the
input levels and insert them into channels.
EXT FX1–EXT FX8 use the following input/output jacks.
External effect Output jack Input jack

EXT FX1 CONSOLE OUT 1 CONSOLE IN 1

To insert external effects devices into channels, you’ll use the EXT FX 1–4 tab and EXT FX 5–8 tab of the EFFECTS
screen.
137
6. ReturnLev knob
EXT FX 1–4 tab, EXT FX 5–8 tab This adjusts the input level from the external effect in a range of
-Inf dB–+6.0 dB.
fig.ScrEXT.eps
When you’re using it for insertion of an external effects device,

the CONSOLE IN jack’s nominal input level is fixed at +4 dBu.
The ReturnLev knob adjusts the input level in the digital
domain.
7. IN meter
This indicates the level of the signal being input from the
external effect.
The function buttons specific to the EXT FX 1–4 tab and EXT FX 5–8
• EXT FX1–EXT FX8 tab perform the following operations.
fig.ScrExtRackGuide.eps
[F6 (PEAK CLEAR)] Clears the level meter’s peak hold or over
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 indication.
This area indicates the status of EXT FX1–EXT FX8. This area is
organized as follows.
1. External effect number

This indicates the number of the external effect.
2. ENABLE button
This enables or disables the EXT FX.

If you turn the ENABLE button on, you’ll be able to use the
corresponding CONSOLE IN jack and CONSOLE OUT jack to
insert your external effects device into the assigned channel,
and the buttons, knobs, and meters 3–7 described below will be
shown.
If you turn the ENABLE button off, the corresponding
CONSOLE IN jack and CONSOLE OUT jack can be used as
conventional input/output jacks, and the following buttons,
knobs, and meters 3–7 will not be shown.
3. EXT FX INSERT SELECT popup button

This selects the channel into which the external effect will be
inserted. The selected channel is shown on the button. When
you move the cursor to the button and press [ENTER], the EXT
FX INSERT SELECT popup will appear.
4. Snd Lev knob

This adjusts the output level to the external effect in a range of
-Inf dB–+6.0 dB.
The CONSOLE OUT jack is fixed at a nominal output level of

+4 dBu. The Snd Lev knob adjusts the output level in the digital
domain.
5. OUT meter
This indicates the level of the signal being output to the external
effect.
138
Accessing the EXT FX INSERT SELECT

Inserting an external effects popup
device into a channel
1. Access the EFFECTS screen.
To insert an external effects device into a channel, connect the fig.ScrFxRack.eps
CONSOLE IN jack and CONSOLE OUT jack to your external effects

device, and insert the corresponding EXT FX into the desired
channel.
The EXT FX INSERT SELECT popup is used to insert an EXT FX into
a channel.
EXT FX INSERT SELECT popup

fig.ScrEXTInsSelGuide.eps
3 1 2
2. Press [F3 (EXT FX 1–4)] or [F4 (EXT FX 5–8)] to access the
EXT FX 1–4 tab or EXT FX 5–8 tab.
fig.ScrEXT.eps

This popup lets you select the destination into which the EXT FX will
be inserted.
1. Target EXT FX indication

This indicates the EXT FX to which the EXT FX INSERT 3. Move the cursor to the EXT FX INSERT SELECT popup
SELECT popup applies. button for the desired EXT FX, and press [ENTER].
fig.ScrEXTInsSel.eps
2. Insert-destination channel select buttons

These buttons select the channel into which the EXT FX will be
inserted.
3. Current insert destination indication

This indicates the current insert destination.
In the EXT FX INSERT SELECT popup, the function buttons perform

[F1 (CH 1–24 INSERT)] Displays CH1–CH24 as the in- The EXT FX INSERT SELECT popup will appear.
sert-destination channel select
buttons.
[F2 (CH 25–48 INSERT)] Displays CH25–CH48 as the in-
sert-destination channel select
buttons.
[F3 (BUS INSERT)] Displays AUX1–AUX16,
MATRIX1–MATRIX8 and MAIN
L/R as the insert-destination
channel select buttons.
[F6 (SELECT NONE)] Clears the insert-destination se-
lection.
139
Inserting an EXT FX into a channel

Here we’ll explain how to connect your external effects device to
CONSOLE IN1 and CONSOLE OUT1, and insert it into CH1.
1. Access the EFFECTS screen, and press [F3 (EXT FX 1–4)]

to display the EXT FX 1–4 tab.
fig.ScrEXT.eps
2. Move the cursor to the ENABLE button for EXT FX1, and
press [ENTER] to select it.
3. Connect your external effects device to CONSOLE IN1 and

CONSOLE OUT1.
fig.ExtFxConnect.eps
CONSOLE IN 1
CONSOLE OUT 1
INPUT OUTPUT
External effects device
If you connect your external effects device while the EXT FX

ENABLE button is off, the input and output may loop.
If the EXT FX insert destination is already specified when you

connect your external effects device, noise may be heard in the
channel.
4. Move the cursor to the EXT FX INSERT SELECT popup

button for EXT FX1, and press [ENTER].
fig.ScrEXTInsSel.eps
The EXT FX INSERT SELECT popup will appear.
5. Move the cursor to the CH1 insert-destination channel

select button, and press [ENTER] to select it.
140
DCA groups
About DCA groups DCA group settings

DCA grouping is a function that lets you make relative adjustments The DCA GROUP screen is used to make DCA group settings.
to the output level of channels so that the level of multiple channels
belonging to a group can be controlled together.
fig.DCAGuide.eps
DCA GROUP screen
Faders assigned to DCA
fig.ScrDCAGroupGuide.eps
DCA Fader
-3dB
1
1. DCA group 1–8 faders
These adjust the levels of DCA groups 1–8 in a range of -Inf dB–
+10.0 dB.
In the DCA GROUP screen, the function buttons perform the

-3dB offset to each channel
DCA groups
[F7 (NAME EDIT)] Accesses the NAME EDIT popup. p. 143
A channel can belong to more than one DCA group. This is [F8 (ASSIGN)] Accesses the DCA GROUP AS- p. 142
convenient when grouping drums or instruments. SIGN popup.
Accessing the DCA GROUP screen

1. In the GROUP section, press [DCA].
The DCA GROUP screen will appear.
fig.ScrDCAGroup.eps
141
DCA groups
Assigning a channel to a Accessing the DCA GROUP ASSIGN

DCA group popup
1. In the GROUP section, press [DCA] to access the DCA
The DCA GROUP ASSIGN popup is used to assign a channel to a
GROUP screen.
DCA group.
fig.ScrDCAGroup.eps
You can also use the GROUP ASSIGN popup of the CHANNEL
DISPLAY screen to assign a channel to a DCA group. For
details, refer to “Assigning channels to DCA groups and MUTE
groups” (p. 67).
DCA GROUP ASSIGN popup

fig.ScrDCAGroupAssignGuide.eps
1 2 2. Move the cursor to the DCA group fader of the desired DCA
group, and press [F8 (ASSIGN)].
fig.ScrDCAGroupAssign.eps
1.
DCA groups
Target DCA group indication

This indicates the DCA group to which the settings in the DCA The DCA GROUP ASSIGN popup will appear.
GROUP ASSIGN popup will apply.
2. Channel select buttons Assigning a channel to a DCA

Here you can select the channels that will be assigned to the group
DCA group.
1. Access the DCA GROUP ASSIGN popup for the desired
DCA group.
In the DCA GROUP ASSIGN screen, the function buttons perform fig.ScrDCAGroupAssign.eps
[F1 (CH 1–24)] Displays CH1–CH24 as the channel select

buttons.
[F2 (CH 25–48)] Displays CH25–CH48 as the channel se-
lect buttons.
[F3 (AUX/MAIN/ Displays AUX1–AUX16, MATRIX1–
MATRIX)] MATRIX8 and MAIN L/R as the channel
select buttons.
2. Verify that the target DCA group is correct.

When the DCA GROUP ASSIGN popup is displayed, you can

press a top panel [SEL] to turn on/off the corresponding
channel’s assignment to the DCA group.
142
DCA groups
Specifying a name and color Accessing the NAME EDIT popup

label for the DCA group 1. Access the DCA GROUP screen.
fig.ScrDCAGroup.eps
You can specify a name and color label for each DCA group. A name
of up to six characters can be specified, and you can choose one of
eight colors as the color label.
The NAME EDIT popup is used to edit the name and select a color label.
NAME EDIT popup

1 2
2. Move the cursor to the DCA group fader of the desired DCA
group, and press [F7 (NAME EDIT)].
1. TEMPLATE
• CATEGORY list
Here you can select a category.
The NAME EDIT popup will appear.
• NAME list
DCA groups
Here you can select a name from within the category you specified.
Editing the name of a DCA group
Select the CATEGORY first, and then select the NAME. 1. Access the NAME EDIT popup for the desired DCA group.
2. Name edit field
In this field you can enter any desired name.

Use these buttons to select a color label for the DCA group.
[F1 (Recall Template)] Enters the name selected in the TEM-

PLATE field into the name edit field.
[F2 (HISTORY)] Successively recalls the most recent
names that were entered since the power
2. Move the cursor to the name edit field, and edit the DCA
was turned on.
Group name.
[F3 (INSERT)] Inserts a space at the cursor location. The
characters to the right of the cursor loca- 3. Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
tion will be moved toward the right.
[F4 (A/a)] Changes the character at the cursor loca-
tion between uppercase and lowercase. For details on name editing, refer to “Editing a name” (p. 50).
[F5 (NUM)] Changes the character at the cursor loca-
tion to “0.”
The characters to the right of the cursor lo-
cation will be moved toward the left.
A maximum of sixteen names are remembered by HISTORY.

If HISTORY becomes full, the oldest names will be deleted.
143
DCA groups
Selecting a color label Using the panel to control

1. Access the NAME EDIT popup for the desired DCA group. DCA groups
You can use the AUX/DCA layer of the fader module section to
control DCA groups from the panel.
1. In the layer section, press [AUX/DCA] to access the AUX/

DCA layer.
fig.LayerBtn.eps

Using a template to enter the DCA

group name 2. Use the faders of fader module 17 (DCA1)–24 (DCA8) to
adjust the level of the DCA groups.
1. Access the NAME EDIT popup for the desired DCA group.
3. By pressing [SOLO], you can operate the solo settings of all
channels belonging to the corresponding DCA group.
4. By pressing [MUTE], you can operate the mute settings of

all channels belonging to the corresponding DCA group.
The user preference AUX/DCA LAYER select button (p. 178)

DCA groups
must be set to “16Auxes + 8DCA.”
2. Move the cursor to the CATEGORY list in the TEMPLATE

area, and select the category of name you want to enter.

and select the name you want to enter.
4. Press [F1 (Recall Template)]; the selected name will be

entered in the name edit field.
5. Move the cursor to the name edit field, and edit the name
that you entered.
When you enter a name from the template list, the previous
name in the name edit field will be deleted.
144
Mute groups
About mute groups Accessing the MUTE GROUP screen

Mute grouping is a function that lets you control the mute status of 1. In the GROUP section, press [MUTE].
multiple channels belonging to a mute group. The MUTE GROUP screen will appear.
fig.ScrMUTEGroup.eps
A channel can belong to more than one mute group.
Mute group settings

The MUTE GROUP screen is used to make mute group settings.
MUTE GROUP screen

fig.ScrMUTEGroupGuide.eps
1
1. MUTE group 1–8 buttons
These buttons turn mute groups 1–8 on/off. When you turn on
Mute groups
a mute group, the channels belonging to that group will be
muted.
In the MUTE GROUP screen, the function buttons perform the

[F1 (MUTE1)] Turns MUTE group 1 on/

off.
off.
off.
off.
[F6 (MUTE ALL OUT)] Mutes all outputs of the M-
400 and input/output units.
popup.
[F8 (ASSIGN)] Accesses the MUTE p. 146
GROUP ASSIGN popup.
Output muting controlled by [F6 (MUTE ALL OUT)] cannot be

stored in a scene memory. When the M-400 is started up,
muting caused by [F6 (MUTE ALL OUT)] will be turned off.
145
Mute groups
Assigning a channel to a Accessing the MUTE GROUP

mute group ASSIGN popup
1. In the GROUP section, press [MUTE] to access the MUTE
The MUTE GROUP ASSIGN popup is used to assign a channel to a
GROUP screen.
mute group.
You can also use the GROUP ASSIGN popup of the CHANNEL
DISPLAY screen to assign a channel to a mute group. For
details, refer to “Assigning channels to DCA groups and MUTE
groups” (p. 67).
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN popup

fig.ScrMUTEGroupAssignGuide.eps
1 2
2. Move the cursor to the MUTE group button of the desired
mute group, and press [F8 (ASSIGN)].
fig.ScrMUTEGroupAssign.eps
1. Target mute group indication

This indicates the mute group to which the settings in the The MUTE GROUP ASSIGN popup will appear.
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN popup will apply.
Mute groups
2. Channel select buttons Assigning a channel to a mute

Here you can select the channels that will be assigned to the group
mute group.
1. Access the MUTE GROUP ASSIGN popup for the desired
mute group.
In the MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen, the function buttons perform
fig.ScrMUTEGroupAssign.eps

buttons.
buttons.
[F3 (AUX/MAIN/ Displays AUX1–AUX16, MATRIX1–
select buttons.
2. Verify that the target mute group is correct.

When the MUTE GROUP ASSIGN popup is displayed, you can

press a top panel [SEL] to turn on/off the corresponding
channel’s assignment to the mute group.
146
Mute groups
Using mute groups Specifying a name and

1. Access the MUTE GROUP screen. color label for a mute group
You can specify a name and color label for each mute group. A name
of up to six characters can be specified, and you can choose one of
eight colors as the color label.
The NAME EDIT popup is used to edit the name and select a color
label.
NAME EDIT popup

1 2
2. Move the cursor to the desired mute group button, and
press [ENTER] to turn it on/off.
3
1. TEMPLATE
Mute groups
• CATEGORY list
Here you can select a category.
• NAME list
Here you can select a name from within the category you
specified.
Select the CATEGORY first, and then select the NAME.
2. Name edit field

In this field you can enter any desired name.

Use these buttons to select a color label for the mute group.
147
Mute groups

Editing the name of a mute group
[F1 (Recall Template)] Enters the name selected in the TEM-
PLATE field into the name edit field. 1. Access the NAME EDIT popup for the desired mute group.
[F2 (HISTORY)] Successively recalls the most recent
names that were entered since the pow-
er was turned on.
[F3 (INSERT)] Inserts a space at the cursor location.
The characters to the right of the cursor
location will be moved toward the right.
case.
cation to “0.”
[F6 (DELETE)] Deletes the character at the cursor loca- 2. Move the cursor to the name edit field, and edit the mute
tion. The characters to the right of the group name.
cursor location will be moved toward
the left. 3. Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
For details on name editing, refer to “Editing a name” (p. 50).
A maximum of sixteen names are remembered by HISTORY.

If HISTORY becomes full, the oldest names will be deleted. Selecting a color label
1. Access the NAME EDIT popup for the desired mute group.
Accessing the NAME EDIT popup fig.ScrChNameEdit.eps
1. Access the MUTE GROUP screen.

Mute groups

2. Move the cursor to the MUTE group fader of the desired

mute group, and press [F7 (NAME EDIT)].
148
Mute groups
Using a template to enter the mute

group name
1. Access the NAME EDIT popup for the desired mute group.
2. Move the cursor to the CATEGORY list in the TEMPLATE

area, and select the category of name you want to enter.

and select the name you want to enter.
4. Press [F1 (Recall Template)]; the selected name will be

entered in the name edit field.
5. Move the cursor to the name edit field, and edit the name
that you entered.
When you enter a name from the template list, the previous
name in the name edit field will be deleted.
Mute groups
149
Talkback/Oscillator
About talkback and oscillator

fig.TB-OSCFlow.eps
MAIN AUX SOLO

LR 1 2 16 L R
OSC
OSCILLATOR LEVEL MAIN L, R, AUX 1-16,
OSC OSC MATRIX 1-8 SW
LEVEL ON SW
PINK NOISE
WHITE NOISE
SINE WAVE TO MAIRIX 1-8
TO OUTPUT PATCHBAY
TALKBACK
TALKBACK LEVEL MAIN L, R, AUX 1-16,
PHANTOM GAIN
TALKBACK TALKBACK MATRIX 1-8 SW
+48V
LEVEL ON SW
TALKBACK MIC A/D
TO MAIRIX 1-8
TO OUTPUT PATCHBAY
LR 1 2 16 L R
MAIN AUX SOLO
Talkback is a function that sends the input of a mic connected to the TALKBACK MIC IN on the rear panel jack to
an AUX bus, MATRIX bus or the MAIN L/R bus. This is useful when the mixer operator needs to convey
instructions to performers on stage or to staff.
Oscillator is a function that generates pink noise, white noise, or a sine wave, and sends it to an AUX bus or
MAIN L/R. This is useful when you need to measure the acoustical response of a hall, or when checking the
connections of external devices.
You can also output the talkback or the oscillator directly via the output patchbay without routing the signal
through a bus.
Talkback/Oscillator section TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR

Talkback and oscillator operations are performed in the Talkback/ screen
Oscillator section.
fig.ScrTalkback.eps
fig.TalkbackOscSectGuide.eps
Talkback/Oscillator
B
C
A. MIC LEVEL knob Talkback and oscillator settings are made in the TALKBACK/
This adjusts the preamp gain of the TALKBACK MIC input. OSCILLATOR screen.
You can switch between tabs to change the content shown in the
B. DISP button
TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR screen.
This accesses the TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR screen, where
you can make talkback settings and oscillator settings.
In the TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR screen, the function buttons
C. TALKBACK button perform the following operations.
This turns talkback on/off. It will be lit when talkback is on.
[F1 (TALKBACK)] Accesses the TALKBACK tab, p. 151
where you can make talkback
settings.
[F2 (OSC)] Accesses the OSC tab, where you p. 152
can make oscillator settings.
150
Talkback/Oscillator
Accessing the TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR Using talkback

screen
1. In the talkback/oscillator section, press [DISP]. Talkback settings
The TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR screen will appear.
Talkback settings are made in the TALKBACK tab of the
fig.ScrTalkback.eps
TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR screen.
TALKBACK tab
fig.ScrTalkbackGuide.eps
2
3
4
1. Meters
This area shows the talkback input level, the AUX channel
levels, and the MATRIX channel levels.
2. +48V button
Talkback/Oscillator
This turns +48V phantom power on/off for the TALKBACK
MIC IN jack.
You must turn off phantom power if you’ve connected a device

that does not require +48V phantom power. Inadvertently
supplying phantom power to a dynamic microphone, audio
playback device, or any other device that does not require
phantom power will cause malfunctions. Carefully read the
owner’s manual included with the microphone or other device
you’re using, and check its specifications.
3. LEVEL knob
This adjusts the level at which the signal of the TALKBACK
MIC IN is sent to the AUX buses, MAIN L/R bus, MATRIX
buses or Output patchbay, in a range of -Inf dB–+10.0 dB.
4. Talkback output destination select buttons

These buttons select the buses to which the talkback signal will
be sent.
151
Talkback/Oscillator
Using talkback Using the oscillator

1. Connect your mic to the TALKBACK MIC IN jack located on Oscillator settings are made in the OSC tab of the TALKBACK/
the rear panel. OSCILLATOR screen.
2. In the talkback/oscillator section, press [DISP] to access

the TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR screen. OSC tab
3. Press [F1 (TALKBACK)] to access the TALKBACK tab.
fig.ScrOscGuide.eps
fig.ScrTalkback.eps
2
3
4
4. In the talkback/oscillator section, use the MIC LEVEL knob
to adjust the input gain of the mic.
If you’ve connected a mic that requires +48V phantom power, 5
use the on-screen +48V button to turn on +48V phantom power.
1. Meters
5. Use the talkback output destination select buttons to select This area shows the oscillator output level, the AUX channel
the bus to which the talkback signal will be sent. levels and the MATRIX channel levels.
6. In the talkback/oscillator section, press [TALKBACK] to 2. Oscillator type select buttons

send the talkback signal to the bus you selected in step 5. You can select the type of signal generated by the oscillator
from the following choices.
If talkback is on, [TALKBACK] will lit in the talkback/oscillator
PINK NOISE Pink noise will be generated.
Talkback/Oscillator
section.
WHITE NOISE White noise will be generated.
SINE WAVE A sine wave will be generated.
The way in which [TALKBACK] turns on/off will depend on
3. OSC LEVEL knob
how you press the button.
This adjusts the level at which the signal generated by the
If you press and immediately release the button, the button will
oscillator is sent to the AUX buses, MAIN L/R bus, MATRIX
operate in Latch mode, alternately turning talkback on or off.
buses or Output patchbay, in a range of -Inf dB–0.0 dB.
If you press and hold down the button, the button will operate
in Momentary mode, and talkback will remain on only while 4. SINE FREQ knob
you continue holding down the button. When the oscillator type is SINE WAVE, this adjusts the
frequency of the sine wave in a range of 20 Hz–20 kHz.
5. Oscillator output destination select buttons

These buttons select the buses to which the oscillator will be
sent.
Function buttons specific to the OSC tab perform the following

operations.
[F3 (OSC ON)] Turns the oscillator on/off.
152
Talkback/Oscillator
Using the oscillator

1. In the talkback/oscillator section, press [DISP] to access
the TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR screen.
2. Press [F2 (OSC)] to access the OSC tab.

fig.ScrOsc.eps
3. Use the oscillator type select buttons to select the type of

signal you want to generate.
4. Use the oscillator output destination select buttons to

select the bus to which the oscillator will be sent.
5. When you press [F3 (OSC ON)] to turn it on, the oscillator
signal will be sent to the bus you selected in step 4.
Talkback/Oscillator
153
Monitor/Solo
About monitoring
fig.MonitorFlow.eps
SOLO OUTPUT
LR PATCHBAY
MONITOR
SOLO
LEVEL
MONITOR MONITOR
SELECT LEVEL
AUX 1 OUT SOLO MONITOR

LOGIC LEVEL
AUX 16 OUT
MONITOR OUT L
MAIN OUT L
MAIN OUT R MONITOR OUT R
MAIN MONO OUT PHONES
LEVEL
MATRIX 1 OUT
MATRIX 8 OUT D/A PHONES
OUT
REC OUT L
REC OUT R
LR
SOLO
Monitoring is a function by which the AUX channel, MATRIX

channel, MAIN L/R, or USB memory recorder signal that you select Operations in the MONITOR section
as the monitor source can be sent from the output jacks or
The top panel MONITOR section is used to perform Monitor/Solo
headphone jack. This is used mainly by a mixing engineer to monitor
operations.
the signals.
fig.MonitorSectGuide.eps
The monitor output is split to the MONITOR OUT L/R and
PHONES OUT, and the level of these two can be adjusted
independently. You can use the output patchbay to patch
MONITOR OUT L/R to any desired output jacks.
Solo is a function by which the channel you select using a [SOLO]
A
button is sent from the MONITOR OUT L/R or PHONES OUT jacks.
Monitor/Solo
This is used to monitor a channel temporarily.
Normally, the monitor signal will be output to MONITOR OUT

B
L/R and PHONES. Solo is enabled when you turn on Solo for a C
channel; the signal of the channel for which Solo was turned on
will be automatically sent to the Monitor output.
A. LEVEL knob
This adjusts the monitor output level in a range of -Inf dB–+10.0
dB.
B. DISP button
This accesses the MONITOR screen, where you can make
monitor and solo settings.
C. SOLO CLEAR button

This turns off the solo settings of all channels.
It will blink if any channels are currently being soloed.
154
Monitor/Solo
MONITOR screen Accessing the MONITOR screen

fig.ScrMonitorGuide.eps
1. In the top panel MONITOR section, press [DISP].
1 fig.ScrMonitor.eps
The MONITOR screen will appear.
4
1. Meters
These indicate the level of the MONITOR, AUX channels and
MATRIX channels.
2. SOLO MODE select buttons

These select the solo mode from the following choices.
ADD ON Channels whose [SOLO] are on will be mixed for

monitoring.
LAST Only the channel whose [SOLO] was turned on most
recently will be monitored.
3. SOLO Lev knob

This adjusts the solo level in a range of -Inf dB–+10.0 dB.
The solo output level is affected not only by the SOLO Lev
Monitor/Solo
knob, but also by the LEVEL knob in the monitor section or by
the LEVEL knob of the PHONES jack.
4. Monitor source select buttons

These select the monitor source.
In the MONITOR screen, the function buttons perform the following

operations.
[F1 (CH SOLO AFL)] Selects the point from which the signal
will be sent from the input channel to so-
lo. If this is on, the post-pan signal of the
channel will be sent. If this is off, the pre-
fader signal will be sent.
155
Monitor/Solo
Using Monitor Using Solo

1. In the top panel MONITOR section, press [DISP]. 1. In the top panel MONITOR section, press [DISP].
fig.ScrMonitor.eps fig.ScrMonitor.eps
The MONITOR screen will appear. The MONITOR screen will appear.
2. Use the monitor source select buttons to select the desired 2. Use the SOLO MODE select buttons to select the desired
monitor source. solo mode.
The monitor signal will be output from the output jacks to
3. Use [F1 (CH SOLO AFL)] to select the point from which the
which MONITOR OUT L/R are patched, and from the
input channel signal will be sent to solo.
PHONES jack.
4. On the top panel, press [SOLO] for the desired channel.
3. Use the MONITOR section’s LEVEL knob or the PHONES
The signal of that channel will be sent to Solo, and output from
LEVEL knob to adjust the monitor output level.
the output jacks to which MONITOR OUT L/R are patched,
and from the PHONES jack.
By default, MONITOR L/R is patched to CONSOLE OUT 7/8 5. Use the SOLO Lev knob to adjust the solo level.
and to DIGITAL OUT. You can use the output patchbay to
change the output destination. For details, refer to “Output 6. Use the MONITOR section’s LEVEL knob or the PHONES
patchbay operations” (p. 118). LEVEL knob to adjust the monitor output level.
If the solo mode is ADD ON, soloing will be controlled so that

input channels, output channels (AUX channels, MATRIX
Monitor/Solo
channels and MAIN L/R channels), and DCA groups are not
soloed at the same time. If the Solo mode is ADD ON, the
selection will be controlled so that the solo signal does not
include both input channels and output channels (AUX
channels and MAIN L/R channel). For example, if an input
channel is soloed, and you turn on Solo for an AUX channel, the
solo setting of the input channel will be defeated and Solo will
be turned on for the AUX channel.
156
Scene memory
About scene memory About the scene indication in the

Scene memory is a function that lets you store mixer parameters as a
top display area
scene, and recall them when desired. Scene memory is a function fig.ScrTBSceneDispGuide.eps
that lets you store and recall mixing parameters as “scenes.” The M-
1 3 4
400 can store 300 scenes in its internal memory, and you can assign a
sixteen-character name to each scene.
The following scene functions are also provided.
• Lock
Prohibits overwriting, deletion, renaming, or editing for the
scene. (p. 160)
• Recall Filter function 2
Specifies the parameters that will be recalled for each scene. Basic information about the scene is shown in the top display area.
(p. 160)
1. Scene number
• Global Scope function
This indicates the number of the currently selected scene. If the
Specifies the region (channels, parameters) that will be recalled
number is blinking, a number other than the current scene
for all scenes. (p. 163)
number is selected.
The following mixer parameters are stored in a scene.
• Preamp (input/output unit, and the M-400’s CONSOLE INPUT)
• Input patchbay The current mixer parameters are referred to as the current
• Output patchbay scene. The scene number that was most recently recalled or
stored is called the “current scene number.”
• CH1–CH48
• AUX1–AUX16, MATRIX1–MATRIX8, MAIN L/R 2. Scene name
• Effects This indicates the name of the currently selected scene. The
• Talkback/Oscillator scene name is not shown for a blank scene (a scene in which
• DCA groups, MUTE groups nothing has been stored).
• USB memory recorder
3. E symbol
This will be shown if the mixer parameters have been edited
The following parameter are not stored in a scene. after the scene was recalled or stored.
•The status of the TALKBACL button. Since this means that the mixer parameters no longer match the
•The position of the TALKBACK MIC LEVEL knob. data in scene memory, you’ll need to store them into a scene
•The status of the TALKBACK phantom power. memory if you want to keep them.
•The setting of the monitor.
4. LOCK symbol
Scene memory
•The statuses of the SOLO buttons.
This indicates whether the currently selected scene is locked.
•The recorder status (eg, playing or recording) of the USB You cannot store to a locked scene or delete it.
memory recorder.
•The playback mode of the USB memory recorder.
•The song selection of the USB memory recorder.
157
Scene memory
Storing the mixer parameters into

SCENE MEMORY section scene memory
fig.SceneMemSectGuide.eps
1. Use [PREV] or [NEXT] to select the store-destination scene

number.
A
2. Press [STORE].
B
D C
The top panel SCENE MEMORY section is used to perform scene A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the scene storage
memory operations. operation.
A. DISP button 3. Press [F8 (STORE)] to execute the Store operation.

This accesses the SCENE screen, where you can manage the
scene list and make scene settings. The operation will be cancelled if you press [F7 (CANCEL)].
B. PREV, NEXT buttons

If the “SCENE/LIB STORE” button located in the
Use these buttons to return to the previous scene or advance to
CONFIRMATION area of User Preferences (p.161) is not
the next scene.
selected, no confirmation message will appear in step 2.
Simply changing the scene number does not cause a scene to be

If “LOCK” is indicated next to the scene number, that scene is
recalled or stored.
locked, and you can’t store to it. Use the SCENE screen if you
C. STORE button want to unlock the scene. For details, refer to “Locking or
This stores the current mixer parameters into the currently unlocking a scene” (p. 160).
selected scene number.
D. RECALL button
Recalling a scene memory to the
This recalls the mixer parameters from the currently selected mixer parameters
scene number.
1. Use [PREV] or [NEXT] to select the scene number that you
want to recall.
You can’t recall a blank scene.
2. Press [RECALL]
Scene memory
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the scene recall

operation.
3. Press [F8(RECALL)] to execute the Recall operation.
The operation will be cancelled if you press [F7 (CANCEL)].
If the “SCENE/LIB RECALL” button located in the

CONFIRMATION area of User Preferences (p.161) is not
selected, no confirmation message will appear in step 2.
Noise may occur when you recall a scene, but this is not a
malfunction.
158
Scene memory
2. STATUS EDIT field

Operations in the SCENE Here you can edit the STATUS items of the scene that is selected
screen in the scene list. The settings in the STATUS EDIT field are
applied when you press the APPLY button.
The SCENE screen is used to edit the scene list and make various • FILT button
scene settings. Turns the Recall Filter function on/off.
• Recall parameter select buttons
These buttons select the parameters that will be recalled by the
SCENE screen
Recall Filter function.
fig.ScrSceneListGuide.eps You can specify the following recall parameters.
1 2 IN PATCH Input patchbay settings

PREAMP Preamp 1 (gain, +48V phantom power,
pad) settings
IN CH Input channel settings
FX/GEQ/EXT FX Effect, 31-band GEQ, and external in-
sert settings
AUX/MAIN/MTX AUX channel, MATRIX channel and
MAIN L/R channel settings
OUT PATCH Output patchbay settings
TALKBACK/OSC Talkback/Oscillator settings
DCA/MUTE GROUP DCA group/Mute group settings
RECORDER USB memory recorder settings
• APPLY button
1. Scene list Applies the settings of the STATUS EDIT field.

This is a list of the scenes. The current scene is shown in green.
The list shows the following items. In the SCENE screen, the function buttons perform the following
operations.
Item Explanation
NO. Indicates the scene number. Button Function Reference
NAME Indicates the scene name. page
TIME Indicates the date and time at which the scene was [F1 (LIST EDIT)] Accesses the SCENE p. 161
stored. LIST EDIT popup,
where you can edit the
STATUS If the scene Lock or Recall Filter function is on, this
scene list.
area will indicate LOCK or FILT respectively.
[F4 (CLEAR)] Erases the content of the
scene selected in the
Scene memory
scene list, returning it to
a blank scene.
[F6 (GLOBAL SCOPE)] Accesses the GLOBAL p. 163
SCOPE popup.
[F7 (LOCK)] Locks or unlocks the p. 160
scene that’s selected in
the scene list.
[F8 (UNDO RECALL)] Undoes (cancels) or re-
does the recall opera-
tion you last performed.
159
Scene memory
Using the Recall Filter function

Accessing the SCENE screen
1. Access the SCENE screen.
1. In the SCENE MEMORY section, press [DISP]. fig.ScrSceneList.eps
fig.ScrSceneList.eps
2. Select the desired scene from the scene list.

The SCENE screen will appear.
3. Press the right cursor button to move the cursor to the FILT
button of the STATUS EDIT field.
Editing the status of a scene
4. Press [ENTER] to turn FILT on.
For each scene you can make Lock and Recall Filter settings.
5. Use the recall parameter select buttons to select the
parameters that you want to recall.
Locking or unlocking a scene
6. Move the cursor to the APPLY button and press [ENTER].
A message will ask you to confirm the Apply operation.

Press [F8 (APPLY)] to apply the change to the scene list.
Scene memory
2. Select the desired scene from the scene list.
3. Press [F7 (LOCK)] to lock or unlock the scene.
160
Scene memory
Accessing the SCENE LIST EDIT popup

Editing the scene list
The SCENE LIST EDIT popup is used to edit the scene list. fig.ScrSceneList.eps
SCENE LIST EDIT popup

fig.ScrSceneListMoveGuide.eps
2. Press [F1 (LIST EDIT)].

fig.ScrSceneListMove.eps
In the SCENE LIST EDIT popup you can edit the scene names, and
copy, cut, paste, insert, or clear scenes in the list.
1. Scene list
This is a list of the scenes. The SCENE LIST EDIT popup will appear.
The items shown in the scene list are the same as in the scene Editing the name of a scene
list of the SCENE screen (p. 159). You can assign a name of up to sixteen characters to each scene.
In the SCENE LIST EDIT popup, the function buttons perform the
1. Access the SCENE LIST EDIT popup.
following operations. fig.ScrSceneListMove.eps
Button Function Reference

page
popup, where you can edit
the scene name.
[F2 (COPY)] Copies the scene selected in p. 162
Scene memory
the scene list.
[F3 (CUT)] Cuts (removes) the scene se- p. 162
lected in the scene list.
[F4 (PASTE)] Pastes the copied or cut scene p. 162 2. From the scene list, select the scene whose name you want
to the selected number. to edit.
[F5 (INSERT)] Inserts the copied or cut p. 162
scene to the selected number. 3. Press [F1 (NAME EDIT)].
fig.ScrNameEdit.eps
[F6 (CLEAR)] Erases the content of the p. 162
scene selected in the scene
list, returning it to a blank
scene.
[F7 (LOCK)] Locks or unlocks the scene
that’s selected in the scene
list. The NAME EDIT popup will appear.
4. Move the cursor to the name edit field, and edit the scene
name.
When you use [F2 (COPY)] or [F3 (CUT)], the contents of the
selected scene will be temporarily saved in the clipboard. [F4 5. Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
(PASTE)] or [F5 (INSERT)] paste or insert the contents that were
saved in the clipboard. The contents of the clipboard will For details on name editing, refer to “Editing a name” (p. 50).
disappear when you close the SCENE LIST EDIT popup.
You can’t edit the name of a scene that is locked.
161
Scene memory
Copying a scene to another number Cutting a scene

1. Access the SCENE LIST EDIT popup. 1. Access the SCENE LIST EDIT popup.
2. From the scene list, select the copy-source scene, and
press [F2 (COPY)].
A message will ask you to confirm the Copy operation.

Press[F8 (COPY)] to save the selected scene in the clipboard.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled. 2. From the scene list, select the scene that you want to cut,
and press [F3 (CUT)].
3. Select the desired copy-destination scene from the scene
list.
4. Press [F4 (PASTE)] or [F5 (INSERT)] to copy the scene.
If you press [F4 (PASTE)], a message will ask you to confirm the
Paste operation.
A message will ask you to confirm Cut operation.
Press [F8 (CUT)] to carry out the Cut operation. The selected
scene will be cut, and the numbers that follow the selected scene
number will be renumbered downward by one.
Press [F8 (PASTE)] to carry out the Paste operation. The scene Following step 2, you can use [F4 (PASTE)] or [F5 (INSERT)] to
you selected in step 2 will be overwritten onto the number you paste or insert the cut scene to any desired scene number.
selected in step 3.
Erasing the contents of a scene
If you press [F5 (INSERT)], a message will ask you to confirm 1. Access the SCENE LIST EDIT popup.
the Insert operation.
2.
Scene memory
From the scene list, select the scene whose contents you
want to erase.
3. Press [F6 (CLEAR)].

A message will ask you to confirm the Clear operation.
Press [F8 (INSERT)] to carry out the Insert operation. The scene
you selected in step 3 and all subsequent scene will be
renumbered upward by one, and the scene you copied in step 2
will be copied to the number you selected in step 3.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be canceled. Press [F8 (CLEAR)] to carry out the Clear operation. The
contents of the scene you selected in step 2 will be erased.
If a scene exists at scene number 299, you won’t be able to use
[F5 (INSERT)] to insert a scene.
You can’t erase a scene that is locked.
You can’t paste to a scene that’s locked.
162
Scene memory
For AUX/MAIN/MATRIX
The Global Scope function Item Setting
Global Scope is a function that lets you limit the channels and ATT Attenuator
parameters that will be recalled; its settings apply to all scenes. EQ Four-band EQ
The GLOBAL SCOPE popup is used to make settings for the Global Sends AUX/MAIN sends
Scope function. Fader Faders
Balance Balance
Limiter Limiter
GLOBAL SCOPE popup
2. Channel recall scope buttons
fig.ScrRecallSafeGuide.eps These buttons specify the channels that will be included in the
1 2 recall scope.
Select the channels that you want to include in the scope of
recall, and de-select the channels that you don’t want to be
recalled.
3. DCA/MUTE group recall scope buttons

These buttons specify the DCA/MUTE groups that will be
included in the recall scope.
Select the DCA/MUTE groups that you want to include in the
scope of recall, and de-select the DCA/MUTE groups that you
don’t want to be recalled.
fig.ScrRecallSafeGuide2.eps
3 4 4. OTHER parameter recall scope buttons

Use these to specify other parameters that will be included in
the scope of recall.
Select the parameters that you want to include in the scope of
recall, and de-select the parameters that you don’t want to be
recalled.
In the GLOBAL SCOPE popup, the function buttons perform the

Button Function
1. Parameter recall scope buttons [F1 (CH 1–24)] Displays CH1–CH24 as the channel recall
(CH 1–24, CH 25–48, AUX/MAIN/MATRIX tab) scope buttons.
These buttons specify the scope of the parameters that will be [F2 (CH 25–48)] Displays CH25–CH48 as the channel recall
Scene memory
recalled for the channels selected by the channel recall scope scope buttons.
buttons. [F3 (AUX/MAIN/ Displays AUX1–AUX16, MATRIX1–
Select the parameters that you want to include in the scope of
recall scope buttons.
recall, and de-select the parameters that you don’t want to be
[F4 (OTHER)] Displays the DCA/MUTE group recall
recalled. scope buttons and the OTHER parameter
The parameter recall scope buttons correspond to the following recall scope buttons.
parameters. [F8 (CLOSE)] Closes the popup.
For CH1–CH48
Item Explanation
Preamp Preamp gain, pad, and +48V phantom power
Phase Phase
ATT Attenuator
Filter Filter
Gate Gate/Expander
Comp Compressor
EQ Four-band EQ
Sends AUX sends
Direct Direct out point
Fader Faders
Pan Pan
163
Scene memory
5. Use the channel recall scope buttons of [F3 (AUX/MAIN/

Using the Global Scope function MATRIX)] to specify the channel recall scope.
fig.ScrRecallSafeOut.eps

6. Specify the scope of parameters that will be recalled for the

channels you selected in step 5 using the channel recall
scope buttons.
2. Press [F6 (GLOBAL SCOPE)]. 7. Use the DCA/MUTE group recall scope buttons of [F5
fig.ScrRecallSafe.eps
(OTHER)] to specify the DCA/MUTE groups that will be
recalled.
fig.ScrRecallSafeOther.eps
The GLOBAL SCOPE popup will appear.
3. Use the channel recall scope buttons of [F1 (CH 1–24)] and
[F2 (CH 25–48)] to specify the channel recall scope. 8. Use the OTHER parameter recall scope buttons of [F5
fig.ScrRecallSafe.eps (OTHER)] to specify the other parameters that will be
recalled.
Scene memory
4. Specify the scope of parameters that will be recalled for the

channels you selected in step 3 using the channel recall
scope buttons.
164
USB memory recorder
About the USB memory Location of the WAV files

recorder WAV files will be recorded in the “/RSS/M-400/SONGS” folder of
the USB memory, and WAV files in the same folder can be played.
The M-400 provides a two-track recorder function that uses USB fig.RcdrFiles.eps
memory. This function allows you to choose any two sources from USB MEMORY
AUX1–AUX16, MAIN L, MAIN MONO, MATRIX1–MATRIX8 and
MAIN R and record the audio signal to USB memory as a WAV file, RSS
or to play back a WAV file from USB memory. M-400
SONGS
About WAV files WAV FILE1
The recorded WAV files will be in the following formats. WAV FILE2
The sampling frequency of the recorded WAV file will be the same .
as the sampling frequency of the M-400. .
.
Sampling frequency Bit depth Number of channels WAV FILEn
48 kHz 16 bits 2 channels
44.1 kHz 16 bits 2 channels
Do not disconnect the USB memory or power-off the M-400

WAV files in the following formats can be played.
while data is being saved to USB memory. Doing so may
If the sampling frequency of the WAV file differs from the sampling
damage the data saved on USB memory.
frequency of the M-400 itself, the file will be resampled and played
back.
About USB memory

Sampling frequency Bit depth Number of channels
The USB memory used by the USB memory recorder must be
48 kHz 16 bits 1 channel
able to read or write data with sufficient speed when used with
48 kHz 16 bits 2 channels
the M-400. To check the speed of USB memory, use the SYSTEM
44.1 kHz 16 bits 1 channel
screen USB MEMORY popup (p. 203).
44.1 kHz 16 bits 2 channels
The M-400 cannot display filenames that use multi-byte

characters such as Japanese.
USB memory recorder
165
USB memory recorder
5. Recorder display
Using the USB memory fig.ScrRcdrDisp.eps
recorder B A E
USB memory recorder settings are made in the RECORDER screen.
RECORDER screen
fig.ScrRecorderGuide.eps
1 C D
A. WAV file name
This indicates the name of the WAV file currently being
recorded or currently selected for playback.
B. Recorder status
This indicates the recording or playback status of the USB
memory recorder.
fig.TportIconPlay.eps
Playing
fig.TportIconRec.eps
2 3 4 5 6 7
Record-ready or recording
The USB memory recorder plays WAV files located in the “/RSS/M-
400/SONGS” folder of USB memory in the order of their name. C. Time indication
This indicates time information for the WAV file currently
1. Song list
being recorded or played.
This area shows the WAV files in the SONGS folder. The WAV
file currently being recorded or the WAV file selected for D. REMAIN
playback will be underlined. If a WAV file is playing, this indicates the remaining playback
time of the WAV file.
NO. Indicates the alphabetical order of the WAV files. During recording, this indicates the remaining amount of time
NAME Indicates the name of the WAV file. that can be recorded to USB memory.
TIME Indicates the date and time that the WAV file was
last edited. E. Playback mode
USB memory recorder
FORMAT Indicates the format of the WAV file. This indicates the playback mode. The following playback
LENGTH Indicates the time length of the WAV file. modes are provided.
fig.RptIconOnce.eps
To select songs in the song list, use [ ] and [ ] of the USB

MEMORY RECORDER section. Play one song
fig.RptIconRpt.eps
2. RECORDER SOURCE SELECT popup buttons
These buttons access the RECORDER SOURCE SELECT popup,
where you can select the input source for the USB memory
Repeat one song
recorder. The current input source channel is shown on the
fig.RptIconAllOnce.eps
button. This can be set separately for the L and R channels.
3. RecLev knob
This adjusts the recording level of the USB memory recorder in Play to the last song
a range of -Inf dB–+10.0 dB. fig.RptIconAllRpt.eps
4. REC meter
This indicates the recording level of the USB memory recorder.
Repeat all songs
166
USB memory recorder
6. PLAY meter
This indicates the playback level of the USB memory recorder. Specifying the input/output for the
7. RECORDER DESTINATION SELECT popup buttons
USB memory recorder
These buttons access the RECORDER DESTINATION SELECT By default, the input and output of the USB memory recorder are
popup, where you can select the output destination for the USB specified as follows.
memory recorder. The current output destination channel is
shown on the button. This can be set separately for the L and R Input Input source
channels. RECORDER IN L MAIN L
RECORDER IN R MAIN R
The PLAY meter will not work if no output destination for the
Output Output destination
USB memory recorder has been specified by the RECORDER
RECORDER OUT L CH45
DESTINATION SELECT popup buttons.
RECORDER OUT R CH46
In the RECORDER screen, the function buttons perform the The RECORDER SOURCE SELECT popup and RECORDER
following operations. DESTINATION SELECT popup are used to specify the input and
output.
up, where you can edit the name
of the WAV file. RECORDER SOURCE SELECT popup
[F3 (DELETE SONG)] Deletes the WAV file that’s se- p. 169
lected in the song list. fig.ScrRcdrSrcSelectGuide.eps
[F6 (PLAY MODE)] Cycles through the available

playback modes.
1 2
Accessing the RECORDER screen

1. In the USB MEMORY RECORDER section, press [DISP].
fig.ScrRecorderPlay.eps
1. Current source indication

This indicates the current input source.
2. Input source channel select buttons

Use these to select the input source channel for the USB USB memory recorder
memory recorder.

The RECORDER screen will appear.
167
USB memory recorder
Specifying the input source Specifying the output destination

1. Access the RECORDER screen. 1. Access the RECORDER screen.
fig.ScrRecorderPlay.eps fig.ScrRecorderPlay.eps
2. Move the cursor to the L channel of the RECORDER

DESTINATION SELECT popup, and press [ENTER].
2. Move the cursor to the L channel of the RECORDER
SOURCE SELECT popup, and press [ENTER]. The RECORDER DESTINATION SELECT popup will appear.
The RECORDER SOURCE SELECT popup will appear. 3. Move the cursor to the channel that you want to use as the
output destination, and press [ENTER] to select it.
3. Move the cursor to the channel that you want to use as the 4. Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
input source, and press [ENTER] to select it.
5. Make settings for the R channel in the same way.
5. Make settings for the R channel in the same way. USB memory recorder operations
The USB MEMORY RECORDER section is used to perform USB
RECORDER DESTINATION SELECT memory recorder operations.
fig.RecorderSect.eps
popup
fig.ScrRcdrDestSelectGuide.eps
2 1
Recording to USB memory
1. Specify the input source for the USB memory recorder (p.
168).
2. In the USB MEMORY RECORDER section, press [REC].

The USB memory recorder will be in record-ready condition.
3. In the USB MEMORY RECORDER section, press [ ].

USB memory recorder
Recording to USB memory will begin, and the sub-display area

will indicate the recording time.
1. Current destination indication

This indicates the current output-destination channel.
2. Output destination channel select buttons

Use these to select the output destination channel for the USB
memory recorder.
[F1 (CH 1–24)] Displays CH1–CH24 as the output-destina-

tion channel select buttons.
[F2 (CH 25–48)] Displays CH25–CH48 as the output-desti-
nation channel select buttons.
[F6 (SELECT NONE)] Clears the output-destination selection.
168
USB memory recorder
Deleting a WAV file

Playing WAV files from USB memory
1. Access the RECORDER screen.
1. Make output-destination settings for the USB memory
recorder. (p. 168)
2. Press [ ] or [ ] in the USB MEMORY RECORDER
section to select a WAV file.
The selected WAV file is shown in the sub-display area.
If you press [DISP] in the USB MEMORY RECORDER section to

access the RECORDER screen, you’ll be able to see the WAV
files in the song list.
3. In the USB MEMORY RECORDER section, press [ ].

The selected WAV file will play.
The sub-display area shows the playback time.
fig.SubDispRcdr.eps
2. From the song list, select the WAV file that you want to
delete.
3. Press [F3 (DELETE SONG)].

fig.ScrDelWavConf.eps
Managing WAV files
Renaming a WAV file

1. Access the RECORDER screen.
A message will ask you to confirm that you want to delete the
WAV file.
4. Press [F8 (DELETE)] to delete the WAV file you selected in

step 2.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the WAV file will not be deleted.
2. From the song list, select the desired WAV file. USB memory recorder
3. Press [F1 (NAME EDIT)].
fig.ScrNameEdit.eps
4. Use the name edit field to edit the USER name.
5. Press [F8 (OK)] to finalize the name you edited and close
the popup.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], your edits will be discarded and
the popup will close.
169
User settings
About user settings Types of user settings

Each user who uses the M-400 can have their own individual user There are three types of user settings as follows.
settings. These settings can be used according to the level of the user • ADMIN
to restrict the range of channels and parameters that can be operated, These are user settings of a user who manages the M-400. The
and to customize the user buttons, user faders, and preference settings are stored in internal memory. There are no limitations
settings to the user’s liking. User settings include the following to operation; the GUEST user settings can be edited and users
items. can be created and edited. A password can be specified.
• User name • GUEST
A name of up to eight characters. This user setting can be used by anyone. The settings are stored
• Password in internal memory. The features available to the GUEST are
The password that will be required in order to use the user specified by an ADMIN user. A password cannot be specified.
settings.
• User level A user who can use user settings with ADMIN privileges is
This setting specifies whether the user has privileges to manage referred to as an ADMIN user.
the M-400, and specifies the range of channels and parameters
that can be operated.
A GUEST cannot be given ADMIN privileges.
• USER
The privileges to manage the M-400 are called ADMIN
These are user settings that an ADMIN user creates on USB
privileges.
memory. A name of up to eight characters can be assigned. The
• User preferences user level is specified by an ADMIN user. A password can be
This includes user fader, user button, and other preference specified.
settings.
Any user can make their own user preference settings.
Do not disconnect the USB memory or switch off the M-400’s

power while data is being saved to USB memory. Doing so may
destroy the data saved in USB memory.
Multiple USERs can be created on separate USB memory

devices so that the USB memory can be used as a physical user
authentication key, or multiple USERs can be created on a
single USB memory device, with passwords used to
authenticate users.
User settings
On the M-400, one setting is in use at all times. The user setting is
remembered even when the power is turned off, and the same user
settings will be active the next time the power is turned on.
The user password will not be requested when the power is

turned on. If you want to ensure that the user settings are not
used by unauthorized persons, switch to GUEST before you
turn off the power.
In the default condition, the M-400 will start up with the

ADMIN settings without any password.
170
User settings
Accessing the USER screen

Creating and editing user
1.
settings In the USER section, press [DISP].
fig.ScrUser.eps
The USER screen is used to create and edit user settings.
USER screen
fig.ScrUserGuide.eps
1 2 3
Switching user settings

1. Access the USER screen.
fig.ScrUser.eps
1. Current user indication

This shows the current user name.
2.3. User list

This lists the user settings saved in internal memory and in USB
memory.
The following items are shown.
FILE NAME Indicates the name of the user settings. 2. From the user list, select the desired user.
TIME Indicates the date and time at which the settings
were last changed. 3. Press [F1 (CHANGE USER)].
STATUS If a password has been specified, the indication If a password has been specified, the ENTER PASSWORD
PASSWORD appears here. In the case of a user popup will appear.
who has ADMIN privileges, ADMIN is indicated.
In the USER screen, the function buttons perform the following

operations.
User settings
[F1 (CHANGE USER)] Switches to the user settings p. 171

[F2 (CREATE USER)] Creates a new user in USB p. 173
memory.
[F3 (SAVE CURRENT)] Saves the user settings tempo- p. 173
rarily held in internal memory
to USB memory.
[F4 (DELETE USER)] Deletes the user selected in the p. 174
USB MEMORY user list.
[F5 (USER LEVEL)] Edits the user level setting. p. 176
[F6 (USER PREF)] Edits the user preference set- p. 177
tings.
up, where you can edit the name
of the user settings selected in
the USB memory user list.
[F8 (CHANGE Password)] Changes the password for the p. 175
user settings selected in the
list.
171
User settings
fig.ScrUserPasswdGuide.eps
A B Switching to user settings in USB memory is performed as

follows.
• The user settings in USB memory are copied to internal
memory.
• Operation will switch to the user settings that were copied to
internal memory.
This means that the current user settings will become the user
settings in internal memory.
fig.UserLogin.eps
A. Applicable user indication INTERNAL MEMORY
This indicates the user settings to which the ENTER
PASSWORD popup applies.
CHANGE
USER
B. Password entry field USER
Enter the password in this field.
Use the left/right cursor buttons to move the cursor, and use
the value dial to change the character at the cursor position.
COPY
“*” is shown for characters not at the cursor position.
USB MEMORY
In the ENTER PASSWORD popup, the function buttons
USER
[F1 (A/a)] Changes the letter at the cursor location be-
tween uppercase and lowercase. If the charac-
ter is not a letter, it will be replaced by the
letter “A.”
This allows user settings to be used even after the USB memory
[F2 (NUM)] Changes the character at the cursor location to
has been exchanged; for example, in order to use the USB
“0.”
MEMORY recorder. The user settings copied to internal
The characters to the right of the cursor loca- memory are temporary, and will disappear if you switch to
tion will be moved toward the left. other user settings.
[F7 (CANCEL)] Cancels password entry and closes the popup. For this reason, a confirmation message like the following will
[F8 (OK)] Finalizes password entry and closes the popup. appear when you switch to other user settings, suggesting that
you save to USB memory.
4. When you enter the password and press [F8 (OK)], you will fig.ScrUserChgnSave.eps
switch to the user settings you selected in step 2.

If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the user change will be cancelled.
If the password you entered was incorrect, the following error
message will appear. Press [F8 (OK)] to return to the ENTER
PASSWORD popup.
fig.ScrUserPwdErr.eps
User settings
In this confirmation message, the function buttons perform the

[F6 (DON’T SAVE)] Discards the user settings in

internal memory and
switches the user settings.
[F7 (CANCEL)] Cancels the change in user
settings.
[F8 (SAVE)] Saves the user settings from
internal memory to USB
memory, and then switches
the user settings.
172
User settings
Creating user settings Saving the current user settings in

You can create user settings if the current user setting has ADMIN USB memory
privileges. Here’s how to save the current user settings in USB memory. This
User settings are created on USB memory. can be done if the current user setting is other than ADMIN or
GUEST.
1. Connect USB memory to the USB memory connector.
1. Connect USB memory to the USB memory connector.
fig.ScrUser.eps
fig.ScrUser.eps
3. Press [F2 (CREATE USER)].

3. Press [F3 (SAVE CURRENT)].
A message will ask whether you want to create user setting.

A message will ask whether you want to save the current user
4. Press [F8 (CREATE USER)] to create user settings.
settings to USB memory.
The user settings will be created in USB memory.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled. 4. To save the settings, press [F8 (SAVE CURRENT)].
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], saving to USB memory will be
cancelled.
The created user settings will be as follows:
If you save to identically named user settings in USB memory, a
•Name will be USER** (** is a number)
caution message will caution you that the previous data will be
•User level will be all operations permitted, without ADMIN
overwritten.
privileges fig.UsrExists.eps
•User preferences will be the default condition

User settings
To save and overwrite the old data, press [F8 (REPLACE)].

If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], saving to USB memory will be
cancelled.
173
User settings
Deleting user settings Editing the name of user settings

Here’s how to delete user settings from USB memory. You can edit the name of a user. A name of up to eight characters can
You can delete user settings if the current user setting has ADMIN be specified.
privileges.
fig.ScrUser.eps
fig.ScrUser.eps
2. From the user list, select the desired user.

2. From the USB memory user list, select the user that you
want to delete.
fig.ScrNameEdit.eps
3. Press [F4 (DELETE USER)].

fig.ScrUserDelConf.eps
4. Use the name edit field to edit the user name.

A message will ask you to confirm that you want to delete the
user settings. 5. Press [F8 (OK)] to finalize the name you edited and close
the popup.
4. When you press [F8 (DELETE USER)], the user settings you If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the name edit will be cancelled and
selected in step 2 will be deleted. the popup will close.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], deletion of the user settings will be
cancelled.
User settings
174
User settings
C. CONFIRM field
Changing the password of user This field is used to confirm the entry in the PASSWORD field.
settings Enter the same password as you did in the PASSWORD field.
If the contents entered in the PASSWORD field and the
You can change the password for ADMIN or USER settings.
CONFIRM field do not match, the following error message will
If you have specified a password, an ENTER PASSWORD popup appear.
will appear when you switch user settings. fig.ScrUserPwdMatchErr.eps
If you don’t specify a password, you won’t need to enter a password

when you switch users.
Editing the password for users other than the current one can be
done only by a user who has ADMIN privileges.

fig.ScrUser.eps
In the CHANGE PASSWORD popup, the function buttons perform
[F1 (A/a)] Changes the letter at the cursor loca-

tion between uppercase and lower-
case. If the character is not a letter, it
will be replaced by the letter “A.”
[F2 (NUM)] Changes the character at the cursor
location to “0.”
[F3 (DELETE)] Deletes the character at the cursor lo-
cation. The characters to the right of
the cursor location will be moved to-
ward the left.
2. From the user list, select the desired user name. [F5 (CLEAR Password)] Clears the password.
[F7 (CANCEL)] Cancels password entry and closes
3. Press [F8 (CHANGE PASSWORD)]. the popup.
The CHANGE PASSWORD popup will appear. [F8 (OK)] Finalizes password entry and closes
fig.ScrUserPasswdChgGuide.eps the popup.
A B C 4. Enter the desired password in password entry fields 1

and 2.
If you don’t want to specify a password, press [F5 (CLEAR
Password)].
5. Press [F8 (OK)] to finalize the password you specified and

close the popup.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the password edit will be cancelled
and the popup will close.
User settings
A. Applicable user indication

This indicates the user name to which the CHANGE
PASSWORD popup applies.
B. PASSWORD entry field

Specify the password in this field.
Use the left/right cursor buttons to move the cursor, and use
the value dial to change the character at the cursor position.
The characters at other than the cursor position are displayed as
“*.”
175
User settings
• OTHER tab
Editing user settings fig.ScrUserAccessOthGuide.eps
User settings consist of the following two types of settings. 5

• User level (p. 176)
This specifies whether the user has ADMIN privileges, and
specifies the range of channels and parameters that the user is
allowed to manipulate.
• User preferences (p. 177)
These include user fader, user button, and other preference
settings.
You must have ADMIN privileges in order to edit the user

level.
5. Other parameter access permission buttons
Editing the user level These buttons select other parameters that the user will be able
to operate. The parameters that are selected here will be
The USER LEVEL popup is used to edit the user level. operable.
USER LEVEL popup The “TALKBACK” button in the OTHER PARAMETER

ACCESS PERMISSION section enables or disables operation of
This has four tabs: [F1 (CH 1–24)], [F2 (CH 25–48)], [F3 (AUX/
the talkback output destination select button (p. 151).
MAIN/MATRIX)], and [F4 (OTHER)].
• CH 1–24, CH 25–48, AUX/MAIN/MATRIX tabs
fig.ScrUserAccessGuide.eps The “OSCILLATOR” button in the OTHER PARAMETER
ACCESS PERMISSION section enables or disables operation of
1 2 3 4
the oscillator output destination select button (p. 152).
In the USER LEVEL popup, the function buttons perform the

[F1 (CH 1–24)] Accesses the CH 1–24 tab.

[F2 (CH 25–48)] Accesses the CH 25–48 tab.
[F3 (AUX/MAIN/ Accesses the AUX/MAIN/MATRIX tab.
MATRIX)]
[F4 (OTHER)] Accesses the OTHER tab.
[F7 (CANCEL)] Cancels the changes and closes the popup.
[F8 (OK)] Confirms the changes and closes the popup.
1. Applicable user indication
This indicates the user settings to which the USER LEVEL
User settings
popup applies.
2. ADMIN button
Select this option if you want to give ADMIN privileges to the
user.
3. Channel access permission buttons

These buttons select the channels that the user will be able to
operate. The channels that are selected here will be operable.
4. Parameter access permission buttons

These buttons select the parameters that the user will be able to
operate for the channels selected by the channel access
permission buttons. The parameters that are selected here will
be operable.
176
User settings
Editing the user level

Editing the user preferences
fig.ScrUser.eps The USER PREFERENCE popup is used to edit the user preferences.
USER PREFERENCE popup

This contains three tabs: [F1 (USER FADER)], [F2 (USER BUTTON)],
and [F3 (OTHER)].
• USER FADER tab
fig.ScrUserFaderGuide.eps
You can’t specify the user level for ADMIN.
3. Press [F5 (USER LEVEL)].

fig.ScrUserAccess.eps
2
This tab lets you make user fader settings.
1. Applicable user indication

The USER LEVEL popup will appear. This indicates the user settings to which the USER
PREFERENCE popup applies.
4. Use the ADMIN button to specify whether the user will have
ADMIN privileges. 2. User fader assign 1–24
This area indicates the channels that are assigned to user faders
5. Use [F1 (CH 1–24)] or [F2 (CH 25–48)] to access the CH 1–24 1–24.
or CH 25–48 tabs, and specify the channels and parameters
• BUTTON 1–8 tab (or BUTTON 9-16 tab)
to which the user will have access.
fig.ScrUserBtnGuide.eps
6. Press [F3 (AUX/MAIN/MATRIX)] to access the AUX/MAIN/

MATRIX tab, and specify the channels and parameters to
which the user will have access.
User settings
7. Press [F4 (OTHER)] to access the OTHER tab, and specify

the parameters to which the user will have access.
8. Press [F8 (OK)] to finalize the changes and close the popup.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the changes will be cancelled and
If a user who does not have ADMIN privileges attempts to 3

access the USER LEVEL popup, an ENTER PASSWORD popup
This tab lets you make user button settings.
will appear, requesting that the ADMIN password be entered.
• Enter the ADMIN password and press [F8 (OK)] to access 3. User button assign 1–8 (or User button assign 9–16)
the USER LEVEL popup, where you can edit the user level. This area indicates the functions that are assigned to user
• If you press [F7 (CANCEL], the USER LEVEL popup will buttons 1–8.
appear in view-only mode. In view-only mode you can’t
edit the user level.
177
User settings
• OTHER tab 8. SHIFT LOCK select buttons

fig.ScrUserPrefGuide.eps These change the behavior of the SHIFT button. [SHIFT] will
light if SHIFT is on.
4 5 6 7 8
OFF SHIFT will be on only while you hold down [SHIFT].
ON SHIFT will alternately turn on or off each time you
press [SHIFT].
ONCE SHIFT will turn on when you press [SHIFT], and will
turn off when you execute a function associated with
SHIFT.
In the USER PREFERENCE popup, the function buttons perform the

This tab lets you make other preference settings.
[F1 (USER FADER)] Accesses the USER FADER tab.
4. CONFIRMATION select buttons [F2 (BUTTON 1-8)] Accesses the BUTTON 1–8 tab.
These buttons select the operations for which a CONFIRM [F3 (BUTTON 9–16)] Accesses the BUTTON 9–16 tab.
popup will appear. When you perform an operation for which [F4 (OTHER)] Accesses the OTHER tab.
the corresponding button is selected here, a CONFIRM popup [F5 (EDIT)] If you’re in the USER FADER tab, this
will appear, asking you to confirm the operation. accesses the USER FADER ASSIGN
popup, where you can edit the user
This area contains the following items.
fader assignment at the cursor loca-
tion.
SCENE/LIB STORE Scene or library store operations If you’re in the USER BUTTON tab,
SCENE/LIB RECALL Scene or library recall operations this accesses the USER BUTTON
PATCHBAY CHANGE Changes to the input/output patch- EDIT popup, where you can edit the
bay user button assignment at the cursor
location.
5. HOME SCREEN select buttons [F7 (CANCEL)] Cancels the changes and closes the
popup.
Use these to select the Home screen (p. 46). You can choose one
[F8 (OK)] Confirms the changes and closes the
of the following.
popup.
CHANNEL DISPLAY The CHANNEL DISPLAY screen will

be the home screen.
METER The METER will be the home screen.
6. CHANNEL SELECT operation select buttons

These buttons choose the way in which channel selection will
occur. The channel selection mode whose button is selected will
be used.
You can choose one of the following two channel select modes.
User settings
Channel SELECT follows [SOLO] will select the channel.

SOLO button
Channel SELECT chang- The selected channel for each layer is
es with Layer Selection remembered, and button operations
in the layer section will change the
selected channel.
CHANNEL DISPLAY Pressing [SEL] will access the
follows CH SELECT CHANNEL DISPLAY screen.
button
7. AUX/DCA LAYER select buttons

These select the channels that will be assigned to the fader
module section when you press the AUX/DCA layer button (p.
33).
16Auxes + 8DCA AUX1–AUX16, DCA1–DCA8
16Auxes + 8Matrices AUX1–AUX16, MATRIX1–MATRIX8
178
User settings
Accessing the USER PREFERENCE fig.ScrUserFdrAsgn.eps
popup B A C
fig.ScrUser.eps
The USER FADER ASSIGN popup will appear.
A. Applicable user fader

This indicates the user fader to which the USER FADER
ASSIGN setting applies.
3. Press [F6 (USER LEVEL)].
fig.ScrUserFader.eps
B. Current assignment
This indicates the channel that is currently assigned to the user
fader.
C. Assignment channel select buttons

Here you can select the channel that will be assigned to the user
fader. The selected channel will be assigned to the user fader.
In the USER FADER ASSIGN popup, the function buttons

The USER PREFERENCE popup will appear. [F1 (CH 1–24)] Displays CH1–CH24 as the assignment
[F2 (CH 25–48)] Displays CH25–CH48 as the assignment
Editing the user fader assignments channel select buttons.
[F3 (AUX/MA- Displays AUX1–AUX16, MATRIX1–
1. Access the USER PREFERENCE popup. TRIX)] MATRIX8 as the assignment channel se-
fig.ScrUserFader.eps lect buttons.
[F4 (DCA)] Displays DCA1–DCA8 as the assignment
[F8 (CLOSE)] Confirms the changes and closes the pop-
up.
User settings
4. Use [F1 (CH 1–24)], [F2 (CH 25–48)], [F3 (AUX/MATRIX)], or

[F4 (DCA)] to access the tab that contains the desired
channel.
5. Move the cursor to the desired channel, and press [ENTER]

to select it.
2. Press [F1 (USER FADER)] to access the USER FADER tab.
6. Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to finalize the changes and close the
3. Move the cursor to the desired user fader assignment, and USER FADER ASSIGN popup.
press [F5 (EDIT)].
7. Press [F8 (OK)] to finalize the changes and close the USER
PREFERENCE popup.
the USER PREFERENCE popup will close.
As an alternative to pressing [F5 (EDIT)] in step 3, you can use

the value dial to edit the user fader assignment.
179
User settings
Editing the user button assignments In the USER BUTTON ASSIGN popup, the function buttons
1. Access the USER PREFERENCE popup.
[F8 (CLOSE)] Confirms the changes and closes the popup.
4. In the FUNCTION list, select the desired function.
5. Next, use the PARAMETER 1 list and PARAMETER 2 list to

select the parameters.
For a list of the functions that can be assigned, refer to “User

button functions” (p. 209).
6. Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to finalize the changes and close the

USER BUTTON ASSIGN popup.
2. Press [F2 (BUTTON 1–8)] (or [F2 (BUTTON 9–16)]) to access
the BUTTON 1–8 tab (or the BUTTON 9–16 tab.) If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the changes will be cancelled and
fig.ScrUserBtn.eps the USER BUTTON ASSIGN popup will close.
7. Press [F8 (OK)] to finalize the USER PREFERENCE changes

Editing other user preferences

1. Access the USER PREFERENCE popup.
3. Move the cursor to the desired user button assignment, and

press [F5 (EDIT)].
fig.ScrUserBtnAsgn.eps
B A C
2. Press [F3 (OTHER)] to access the OTHER tab.

fig.ScrUserPref.eps
User settings
The USER BUTTON ASSIGN popup will appear.
A. Applicable user button

This indicates the user button to which the USER BUTTON
ASSIGN popup applies.
B. FUNCTION list
You can select a function from this list.
3. Move the cursor to the desired item, and press [ENTER] to
C. PARAMETER 1 and 2 lists change it.
Here you can select the parameters of the function you’ve 4. Press [F8 (OK)] to finalize the USER PREFERENCE changes
selected in the FUNCTION list. and close the popup.
180
REAC applications and settings
REAC applications About the M-400’s REAC functionality

fig.REACSystem.eps
This chapter explains more advanced ways to use REAC.
REAC A SYSTEM REAC B SYSTEM
For basic information about REAC, refer to “Basic knowledge about
REAC” (p. 13).
SPLIT REAC A REAC B

REAC splitting /BACKUP
By connecting a REAC splitter between the REAC master and slave,

you can split the output from the master REAC device and distribute
it to multiple split REAC devices. REAC A port, SPLIT/BACKUP port
fig.REACsplit.eps
The REAC A port and SPLIT/BACKUP port belong to the same
REAC A system. From the SPLIT/BACKUP port, you can take the
SLAVE same output as the REAC A port, or create a redundant REAC
connection between the M-400 and an S-4000S (p. 182). If you
SPLIT SPLIT SPLIT
connect an input/output unit to these ports, please observe the
following points.
• You cannot connect multiple master REAC devices or multiple
slave REAC devices to a single REAC system. For example, you
REAC SPLITER
cannot connect a slave REAC device to both the REAC A port
and the SPLIT/BACKUP port.
MASTER • When receiving input from a REAC device connected to the
SPLIT/BACKUP port, it will be treated as input from REAC A.
To assign a REAC device to operate in split mode, you must set its REAC
mode to Split. The split REAC device will function solely to receive • The same forty channels will be output from the M-400 to the
signals from the master REAC device. REAC A port and to the SPLIT/BACKUP port.
The output of REAC A port and SPLIT/BACKUP

Caution when using a REAC splitter port
For a REAC splitter, you can use either the S-4000-SP or an Ethernet If the M-400’s REAC setting is FOH or BACKUP(p. 187), the output
switching hub. Switching hubs that meet the following conditions to REAC A and the output to SPLIT/BACKUP will include the
can be used with the M-400. following signals.
• 1000BASE-T compatible device (IEEE 802.3ab, Gigabit
a. 8 channels of output from the output patchbay to REAC A
Ethernet) that supports 100 BASE-TX (IEEE 802.3u, Fast
Ethernet) b. The inputs from the input/output unit connected to REAC A
• Full duplex communication (simultaneous bidirectional c. The inputs from the input/output unit connected to REAC B
communication) These will be assigned to the REAC A output in the order of “a,” “b,”
The network transmission time between REAC devices is and “c,” up to maximum total of 40 channels.
approximately 375 microseconds, but if the signal passes through a fig.ReacAOuts.eps
REAC splitter (S-4000-SP or an Ethernet switching hub), (a) OUTPUT PATCHBAY
approximately 200 microseconds of delay will occur for each device.

8ch
A maximum of four REAC splitters can be connected in series.
1
REAC A OUT
8
SPLIT/BACKUP OUT
(b) REAC A INPUT
9
(c) REAC B INPUT
40 40ch
181
fig.REACsplit2.eps
BROADCAST BROADCAST MONITOR

CONSOLE 2 CONSOLE 1 CONSOLE S-1608(A) S-1608(B) Redundant REAC connections using
the REAC A port and SPLIT/
SPLIT SPLIT SPLIT SLAVE SLAVE BACKUP port (Backup Connection)
To create a redundant REAC connection between the M-400 and an
S-4000S, set the M-400’s REAC setting to BACKUP (p. 187). Connect
the M-400’s REAC A port to the S-4000S’ MAIN REAC port, and
REAC SPLITER REAC SPLITER connect the SPLIT/BACKUP port to the S-4000S’ BACKUP REAC
port. With these connections, even if the REAC A port –– MAIN
REAC port cable should be broken, the connection will
automatically be switched to the SPLIT/BACKUP port–BACKUP
REAC port cable, and the audio will continue nearly without
interruption.
SPLIT REAC A REAC B
/BACKUP MASTER MASTER fig.ReacS4000S.eps
S-4000S
SLAVE
FOH CONSOLE
You can split the outputs assigned to REAC A output by connecting

a REAC splitter between the REAC A master and slave.
To the SPLIT/BACKUP port, you can either connect the split REAC
device directly, or connect a REAC splitter to distribute the REAC A BACKUP MAIN
output to multiple split REAC devices.
Possible uses include using the REAC A port splits for

distribution in the stage area, and SPLIT/BACKUP port for SPLIT REAC A
/BACK UP
distribution in the FOH (Front Of House) area.
REAC B port
The REAC B port belongs to the REAC B system, which is separate
from the REAC A port and SPLIT/BACKUP port. The REAC B port MASTER
always operates as the master REAC.
REAC B port output

The forty channels from the output patchbay are output to the REAC
B port.
fig.ReacBOuts.eps
OUTPUT
PATCHBAY
1
REAC B OUT
40
40ch
If you connect a REAC splitter to the M-400’s REAC B port and

split REAC B, the signals received by the split REAC devices
will be the forty channels of output from the M-400’s output
patchbay to REAC B.
182
REAC connection examples By using the S-1608 and S-4000S-3208 as input/output units,
Here we show some examples of REAC setups and connections. For you’ll be able to receive forty-eight channels of input from the
details on REAC settings for the M-400, refer to “REAC settings” (p. stage. In this case, the following signals will be received by the
186). monitor console and broadcast console.
• REAC A port: S-4000S-3208, REAC B port: S-1608

FOH console setup fig.REAC3208_type1.eps
fig.REACsplit2_2.eps 1:
2:
1: 3:
2: 4:
FOH Console
3: 5: OUTPUT 1–8
4:
FOH Console
6:
5: OUTPUT 1–8 7:
6: 8:
7: 9:
8: 10:
9: 11:
10: 12: To Monitor / Broadcast Console
11: 13:
12: To Monitor / Broadcast Console 14:
13: 15: S-4000S-3208 S-1608
14: 16:
15: S-1608 (A) S-1608 (B) 17:
16: S-1608 (A) 18:
17: INPUT 1–16 19:
18: 20:
19: 21:
20:
SLAVE SLAVE
22:
21: SLAVE SLAVE 23:
22: 24: S-4000S
23: 25: INPUT 1–32
24: 26:
25: 27: REAC SPLITER REAC SPLITER
26: 28:
27: REAC SPLITER REAC SPLITER 29:
28: 30:
29: 31:
30: 32:
31: 33: SPLIT REAC A REAC B
32: S-1608 (B) 34: /BACKUP MASTER MASTER
33: INPUT 1–16 SPLIT REAC A REAC B 35:
34: /BACKUP MASTER MASTER 36:
35: 37:
36: 38:
37: 39:
38: 40:
39:
40: FOH CONSOLE
FOH CONSOLE
Set the M-400’s REAC setting to FOH (p. 187). The M-400’s REAC A • REAC A port: S-1608, REAC B port: S-4000S-3208
and REAC B will both be the master. Connect the REAC A port split fig.REAC3208_type2.eps
to the monitor console, and connect the SPLIT/BACKUP port to the 1:

2:
broadcast console. 3:
FOH Console
4:
5: OUTPUT 1–8
The REAC A (split REAC) of the monitor console and the broadcast 6:
7:
console will receive the following signals. 8:
9:
10:
REAC A INPUT 1–8 FOH console REAC A OUTPUT 1–8 11:
12: To Monitor / Broadcast Console
REAC A INPUT 9–24 S-1608(A) INPUT 1–16 13:
14:
15: S-1608 S-4000S-3208
REAC A INPUT 25– 40 S-1608(B) INPUT 1–16 16: S-1608
17: INPUT 1–16
18:
19:
20:
21:
If a slave REAC device is not connected to the REAC A port of 22:
SLAVE SLAVE
23:
the FOH console, you cannot connect a split REAC device to the 24:
25:
SPLIT/BACKUP port. 26:
REAC SPLITER REAC SPLITER
27:
28:
29:
30:
31:
32: S-4000S
33: INPUT 1–16 SPLIT REAC A REAC B
34: /BACKUP MASTER MASTER
35:
36:
37:
38:
39:
40:
FOH CONSOLE
183
Monitor console setup Broadcast console setup

fig.ReacMonitor_2.eps fig.ReacBcast_2.eps
S-1608(B)
1: 1:
2: REAC B 2:
3: MASTER 3:
FOH Console 4:
FOH Console
4: OUTPUT 1–8
5: OUTPUT 1–8 5:
6: 6:
7: SLAVE 7:
8: 8:
9: 9:
10: S-1608(A) 10:
11: 11:
12: REAC SPLITER 12:
13: 13:
14: REAC A 14:
15: MASTER 15:
S-1608 (A) 16: S-1608 (A)
16:
17: INPUT 1–16
17: INPUT 1–16
FOH CONSOLE 18:
18:
SLAVE 19:
19:
20:
S-1608(A) S-1608(B)
20:
21:
21: 22:
22: 23:
23: 24: SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE
24: 25:
25: 26:
26: SLAVE 27:
27: 28:
28: 29:
29: 30:
30: 31:
31: 32: S-1608 (B)
32: S-1608 (B) REAC A REAC B SPLIT REAC A REAC B
33: INPUT 1–16
33: INPUT 1–16 34: SPLIT SPLIT /BACKUP MASTER MASTER
34: 35:
35: 36:
36: REAC A REAC B
SPLIT MASTER 37:
37: 38:
38: 39:
39: 40:
40:
MONITOR CONSOLE BROADCAST CONSOLE FOH CONSOLE
Set the M-400’s REAC setting to MONITOR/BROADCAST A (p. Set the M-400’s REAC setting to MONITOR/BROADCAST A (p.
187). REAC A will be the split, and REAC B will be the master. The 187). The M-400’s REAC A will be the split and REAC B will be the
FOH console’s REAC A port split is received by the monitor master. The FOH console’s SPLIT/BACKUP port is connected to the
console’s REAC A (split). The input/output unit connected to REAC broadcast console’s REAC A port (split). The input/output unit
B port and the rear panel CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks are used as the connected to REAC B port and the rear panel CONSOLE OUTPUT
outputs of the monitor console. jacks are used as the outputs of the broadcast console.
The monitor console’s REAC A will receive the following signals. The broadcast console’s REAC A will receive the following signals.
REAC A INPUT 1–8 FOH console REAC A OUTPUT 1–8 REAC A INPUT 1–8 FOH console REAC A OUTPUT 1–8
REAC A INPUT 9–24 S-1608(A) INPUT 1–16 REAC A INPUT 9–24 S-1608(A) INPUT 1–16
REAC A INPUT 25–40 S-1608(B) INPUT 1–16 REAC A INPUT 25–40 S-1608(B) INPUT 1–16
You can connect an S-4000S, S-1608, or S-0816 to the REAC B You can connect an S-4000S, S-1608, or S-0816 to the REAC A
port as input/output units. Connection of an S-4000H FOH unit port as input/output units. Connection of an S-4000H FOH unit
is not supported. is not supported.
The sampling frequency of the monitor console must match the The sampling frequency of the monitor console must match the
sampling frequency of the FOH console. sampling frequency of the FOH console.
If the M-400’s REAC is set to MONITOR/BROADCAST A, the If the M-400’s REAC is set to MONITOR/BROADCAST A, the
SPLIT/BACKUP port cannot be used. SPLIT/BACKUP port cannot be used.
184
Backup connections with the S-4000S

fig.Reac_Backup_2.eps
Outputting the FOH split as analog
audio signals or AES/EBU
S-4000S-3208
S-1608 An S-4000S in which a total of ten output modules (SO-DA4 or
SOAES4) have been installed (giving it forty output channels) can be
1:
2:
connected as a split REAC device, allowing the FOH console’s REAC
SLAVE SLAVE
3:
4:
FOH Console A port split or the SPLIT/BACKUP port output to be output as
5: OUTPUT 1–8
6:
BACKUP MAIN
analog audio signals (SO-DA4) or in AES/EBU format (SO-AES4).
7:
8: fig.REACAES-EBU_2.eps
9:
10: 1:
11: 2:
12: 3:
13: SPLIT SPLIT 4:
FOH Console
14: 5: OUTPUT 1–8
15: 6:
16: 7:
17:
18: 8:
19: 9:
20: 10:
21: 11: S-4000S
22: 12: (40 output channels)
REAC SPLITER REAC SPLITER 13: S-1608(A) S-1608(B)
23:
24: S-4000S 14:
25: INPUT 1–32 15:
26: 16: S-1608 (A)
27: 17: INPUT 1–16
28: 18: SLAVE SLAVE
29: 19: SPLIT
30: 20:
31: 21:
32: 22:
33: 23:
34: 24:
35: SPLIT REAC A REAC B 25:
36:
37:
/BACKUP MASTER MASTER 26:
38: 27:
39: 28:
40: 29:
30:
31: SPLIT REAC A REAC B
FOH CONSOLE 32: S-1608 (B) /BACKUP MASTER MASTER
33: INPUT 1–16
34:
Set the M-400’s REAC A to master, and the S-4000S to slave. Connect 35:
36:
the M-400’s REAC A port to the MAIN REAC port of the S-4000S, 37:
38:
and connect the M-400’s SPLIT/BACKUP port to the BACKUP 39:
40:
REAC port of the S-4000S.
FOH CONSLE
With these connections when a REAC splitter is connected between In this case, the S-4000S will output the following signals.
the M-400 and the S-4000S, and a split REAC device is connected, the
split REAC device will receive the following signals. REAC INPUT 1 - 8 FOH console REAC A OUTPUT 1-8
REAC INPUT 9- 24 S-1608(A) INPUT 1 -16
REAC INPUT 1–8 M-400 REAC A OUTPUT 1–8 REAC INPUT 25 - 40 S-1608(B) INPUT 1 - 16
REAC INPUT 9–40 S-4000S INPUT 1–32
(when you use S-4000S-3208)
185
Recording to a PC via the SPLIT/ REAC settings

BACKUP port
The REAC CONFIG popup of the SYSTEM screen is used to make
You can use a REAC driver with SONAR DAW software to record REAC settings.
from the M-400’s SPLIT/BACKUP port to your computer.
For details, refer to the following website.
REAC CONFIG popup
http://www.cakewalk.com/
fig.ScrSysReacConf1.eps
EDIROL FA-66
(DIGITAL IN SYNC)
Firewire DIGITAL IN
(IEEE1394)
S-1608 S-1608
PC The content shown in the REAC CONFIG popup will depend on the
to Ethernet connector SLAVE SLAVE tab you’ve selected.
In the REAC CONFIG popup, the function buttons perform the

DIGITAL OUT
(Optical) [F1 (SETUP)] Accesses the SETUP tab p. 187
where you can make REAC
settings for the M-400.
SPLIT REAC A REAC B
/BACKUP MASTER MASTER [F2 (REAC A)] Accesses the REAC A tab p. 188
where you can make set-
tings for the device connect-
ed to the REAC A port.
FOH CONSOLE [F3 (REAC B)] Accesses the REAC B tab p. 188
where you can make set-
tings for the device connect-
ed to the REAC B port.
[F4 (SPLIT/BACKUP)] Verifies the signals being p. 188
output to the SPLIT/BACK-
UP port.
186
4. Move the cursor to the REAC SETUP select buttons, select

Making REAC settings the desired application, and press [ENTER].
You can choose from the following applications.
The SETUP tab of the REAC CONFIG popup is used to make REAC
settings for the M-400. FOH Use the M-400 as a FOH (Front
Of House) console. Normally,
1. In the SETUP section, press [SYSTEM] to access the
you should choose this setting.
SYSTEM screen.
MONITOR/BROADCAST A Use the M-400 as a monitor con-
fig.ScrSystem.eps
sole or broadcast console. The
split (distribution) from FOH
will be received at REAC A.
BACKUP (S-4000S) Connect the S-4000S using back-
up connections.
For details on example connections for various applications,

refer to “REAC connection examples” (p. 183).
5. Use the setup display area to check the input/output unit

connections, REAC mode settings for the input/output
units, and the signal flow.
For basic knowledge about REAC, refer to “Basic knowledge

about REAC” (p. 13).
For more advanced applications of REAC, refer to “REAC

applications” (p. 181).
In some cases, a message like the following may appear after

you select MONITOR/BROADCAST A in step 4.
3. Press [F1 (SETUP)] to access the SETUP tab.

fig.ScrSysReacConf1Guide.eps
A B
This confirmation message will appear if there is a difference in
sampling frequency between the FOH console (master) and the
MONITOR/BROADCAST console (split).
If you press [F8 (SET)], the cutoff frequency of the MONITOR/
BROADCAST console will be set to match that of the FOH
console.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the current sampling frequency

will be maintained. If you cancel, it will not be possible to
receive the split from the FOH console.
A. REAC SETUP select buttons

These buttons select REAC settings appropriate for the desired
application.
B. Setup indication
This area shows the content of the REAC SETUP select buttons
at cursor location, and the types of connections.
187
B. List of displayed information

Checking the devices connected to This lists the information that can be viewed for the device
REAC A and REAC B connected to REAC A or REAC B. If the S-4000S is connected,
you’ll be able to view the modules that are installed in SLOT1 -
To view information about the devices connected to REAC A and SLOT10.
REAC B, you can use the REAC A tab and REAC B tab of the REAC
CONFIG popup. 4. Note the information for the connected REAC device in the
device indication and the list of displayed information.
SYSTEM screen.
fig.ScrSystem.eps Checking the output to the SPLIT/
BACKUP port
You can use the SPLIT tab of the REAC CONFIG popup to check the
output to the SPLIT/BACKUP port.

SYSTEM screen.
fig.ScrSystem.eps


3. Press [F2 (REAC A)] (or [F3 (REAC B)]) to access the REAC
A tab (or the REAC B tab).
fig.ScrSysReacConfABGuide.eps
A B
3. Press [F4 (SPLIT)] to access the SPLIT tab.

fig.ScrSysReacConfSpGuide.eps
A. Device indication area

This area shows information on the devices connected to REAC
A or REAC B.
The name of the connected device, the number of inputs and
outputs, and the following information are shown.
A. SPLIT output indication
This area shows the signals that are being output to the SPLIT/
Firmware Version Firmware version
BACKUP port.
REAC Version REAC version
4. In the SPLIT output indication area, verify the outputs for
the SPLIT/BACKUP port.
188
Remote
This chapter explains remote functionality and settings.
USB MIDI
Remote functions By connecting the rear panel USB port to a PC, you can use USB
MIDI to remotely control the M-400.
USB MIDI can transmit and receive the following messages.
MIDI
Message Explanation Transmitted/
Received
You can use the rear panel MIDI IN/OUT connectors to remotely
Control change Control of channel faders Transmitted/
control the M-400 from an external device, or control an external
and mute Received
device from the M-400. You can use either MIDI or RS-232C, not
Program change Recall scene memories Transmitted/
both. If you want to use MIDI, set the rear panel RS-232C/MIDI Received
select switch to the MIDI position. System exclusive Control of mixer parame- Transmitted/
ters Received
MMC Control of the USB memo- Received only
Always make sure to switch off the M-400’s power before you ry recorder
change the setting of the MIDI/RS-232C select switch.
MIDI can transmit and receive the following messages. You’ll need to install the USB MIDI driver on the PC that’s to be
connected to the M-400 using USB. Download the USB MIDI
Message Explanation Transmitted/ driver from the Roland website below.
Received
Control change Control of channel faders Transmitted/ http://www.rolandsystemsgroup.net/
and mute Received
Program change Recall scene memories Transmitted/
Received
System exclusive Control of mixer parame- Transmitted/ The M-400 can be remotely controlled from M-400RCS via its
ters Received rear panel USB connector. M-400RCS is application software
MMC Control of the USB memo- Received only
that runs on Microsoft® Windows® XP or Microsoft® Windows
ry recorder
Vista™. It allows you to edit M-400 project files and to remotely
control the M-400. You can obtain the “M-400RCS” software
and the “M-400RCS Users Guide” (PDF version) from the
Roland website listed below. For details on using M-400RCS,
refer to the “M-400RCS Users Guide.”
http://www.rolandsystemsgroup.net/
Remote
189
Remote
V-LINK Remote settings

If you connect a V-LINK compatible video device such as the V- The REMOTE popup of the SYSTEM screen is used to make remote
440HD to the rear panel MIDI IN connector, you’ll be able to use settings.
your video device to control the volume of specific channels.
The M-400 allows up to eight audio sources to be controlled via V-
LINK. REMOTE popup
The following V-LINK compatible video devices can be connected to fig.ScrSysRemote.eps
the M-400.
V-440HD (Ver. 2.07 or later)
V-44SW (Ver. 1.07 or later)
In order to use V-LINK, the MIDI/RS-232C select switch must

be set to the MIDI position.
The M-400 can use MIDI and USB MIDI simultaneously. If the
same message is received via both MIDI and USB MIDI, the
last-received message will be used. You can switch between tabs to change the content shown in the
REMOTE popup.
RS-232C In the REMOTE popup, the function buttons perform the following
operations.
You can use the RS-232C connector located on the rear panel to
control the M-400 from an external computer or other device. For
[F1 (MIDI)] Accesses the MIDI tab which p. 191
details on the RS-232C commands, refer to the “M-400RS-232C
lets you make MIDI settings.
Reference” (PDF version), which you can obtain from the Roland [F2 (USB MIDI)] Accesses the USB MIDI tab p. 192
website listed below. where you can make USB MIDI
settings.
http://www.rolandsystemsgroup.net/ [F3 (V-LINK)] Accesses the V-LINK tab p. 193
where you can make V-LINK
settings.
[F4 (RS-232C)] Accesses the RS-232C tab p. 194
where you can make RS-232C
settings.
[F8 (CLOSE)] Close the popup
Remote
190
Remote
B. MIDI/RS-232C selection indication

MIDI settings This shows the status of the rear panel MIDI/RS-232C select
switch.
The MIDI tab of the REMOTE popup is used to make MIDI settings.
The functionality of the selected connector(s) is active.
SYSTEM screen. MIDI MIDI is selected.
fig.ScrSystem.eps RS-232C RS-232C is selected.
Always make sure to switch off the M-400’s power before you
change the setting of the MIDI/RS-232C select switch.
C. RECEIVE select buttons

Here you can select the items of MIDI data that the M-400 will
receive.
FADER, MUTE Change Faders and mute changes

(CC) (control changes)
SCENE Change (PC) Scene changes (program changes)
2. Press [F4 (REMOTE)].
Sys Ex System exclusive
fig.ScrSysRemote.eps
MMC MMC for the USB memory recorder
D. SEND select buttons

Here you can select the items of MIDI data that the M-400 will
transmit.
FADER, MUTE Change (CC) Fader and mute changes

(control changes)
The REMOTE popup will appear.

E. MIDI OUT/THRU select buttons
3. Press [F1 (MIDI)]. These select the function of the rear panel MIDI OUT/THRU
fig.ScrSysRemoteGuide.eps connectors.
AB C D E OUT Use as a MIDI OUT connector.

THRU Use as a MIDI THRU connector.
If you select THRU, the settings of the SEND buttons will have
no effect.
4. In the MIDI/RS-232C select indication, verify the status of

the rear panel MIDI/RS-232C select switch.
Remote
5. Move the cursor to the Dev ID knob and specify the device
ID.
The MIDI tab will appear. 6. Move the cursor to the RECEIVE select buttons for each
item that you want MIDI to receive, and press [ENTER] to
A. Dev ID knob select the button.
This sets the M-400’s device ID in a range of 1–32. This setting is
common to the MIDI tab, USB MIDI tab, and V-LINK tab. 7. Move the cursor to the SEND select buttons for each item
that you want MIDI to transmit, and press [ENTER] to select
the button.
8. Move the cursor to the desired MIDI OUT/THRU select

191
Remote
B. RECEIVE select buttons

USB MIDI settings These buttons select the items that USB MIDI will receive.
To make USB MIDI settings, use the USB MIDI tab of the REMOTE
popup. (control changes)
SYSTEM screen.
fig.ScrSystem.eps MMC MMC for the USB memory re-
corder
C. SEND select buttons

These buttons select the items that USB MIDI will transmit.

(control changes)
ID.
2. Press [F4 (REMOTE)]. 5. Move the cursor to the RECEIVE select buttons for each
item that you want USB MIDI to receive, and press [ENTER]
to select the button.
6. Move the cursor to the SEND select buttons for each item
that you want USB MIDI to transmit, and press [ENTER] to
select the button.
The REMOTE popup will appear.
3. Press [F2 (USB MIDI)].

fig.ScrSysRemoteUSBGuide.eps
A B C
Remote
The USB MIDI tab will appear.
A. Dev ID knob
This specifies the device ID of the M-400 in a range of 1–32. This
setting is common to the MIDI tab, the USB MIDI tab, and the
V-LINK tab.
192
Remote
C. SOURCE field 1–8

V-LINK settings Here you can specify the channels that will correspond to V-
LINK sources 1–8, and the maximum level and minimum level
To make V-LINK settings, use the V-LINK tab of the REMOTE
for each channel.
popup. fig.ScrSysRmtVLSrcGuide.eps
1. In the SETUP section, press [SYSTEM] to access the b a c

SYSTEM screen.
fig.ScrSystem.eps
a. V-LINK SOURCE CHANNEL SELECT popup button

This accesses the V-LINK SOURCE CHANNEL SELECT popup,
where you can select the channel that corresponds to each
2. Press [F4 (REMOTE)]. source.
b. MaxLev knob
This specifies the level when the source level is at the maximum
(100%), in a range of -Inf dB–+10.0 dB.
c. MinLev knob
This specifies the level when the source level is at the minimum
(0%), in a range of -Inf dB–+10.0 dB.
ID.
The REMOTE popup will appear. 5. Move the cursor to the V-LINK SOURCE CHANNEL SELECT
popup button for the desired source, and press [ENTER].
3. Press [F3 (V-LINK)]. fig.ScrSysVlnkSrcSel.eps
fig.ScrSysRmtVLnkGuide.eps
A B C
AB C
Remote
The V-LINK SOURCE CHANNEL SELECT popup will appear.

The V-LINK tab will appear.
A. Current V-LINK source channel indication
A. V-LINK button This indicates the current V-LINK source channel.
Turns the V-LINK function on/off.
B. Applicable V-LINK source indication
B. Dev ID knob This indicates the V-LINK source to which the settings of the V-
This specifies the device ID of the M-400 in a range of 1–32. This LINK SOURCE SELECT popup will apply.
setting is common to the MIDI tab, the USB MIDI tab, and the
V-LINK tab.
193
Remote
C. SOURCE CHANNEL select buttons fig.ScrSysRemote.eps
These buttons select the channel that will correspond to the

source.
In the V-LINK SOURCE CHANNEL SELECT popup, the

function buttons perform the following operations.
[F1 (CH1–24)] Displays CH1–CH24 as the SOURCE

CHANNEL select buttons.
[F2 (CH25–48)] Displays CH25–CH48 as the SOURCE
CHANNEL select buttons.
[F6 (SELECT NONE)] Clears the source channel selection. The REMOTE popup will appear.
3. Press [F4 (RS-232C)].
fig.ScrSysRS232CGuide.eps
6. Move the cursor to the desired channel, and press [ENTER]
to select it. A B
If you’re using a stereo source, specify one of the stereo-linked

channels.
7. Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the V-LINK SOURCE CHANNEL

SELECT popup.
8. Move the cursor to MaxLev in the desired SOURCE field,

and use the value dial to specify the maximum level of the
channel.
9. Move the cursor to MinLev in the desired SOURCE field,

and use the value dial to specify the minimum level of the The RS-232C tab will appear.
channel.
A. MIDI/RS-232C selection indication
10. Move the cursor to the V-LINK button and press [ENTER] to This shows the status of the rear panel MIDI/RS-232C select
turn it on.
switch.
The functionality of the selected connector(s) is active.
RS-232C settings
MIDI MIDI is selected.
The RS-232C tab of the REMOTE popup is used to make RS-232C RS-232C RS-232C is selected.
settings.

SYSTEM screen. Always make sure to switch off the M-400’s power before you
fig.ScrSystem.eps change the setting of the MIDI/RS-232C select switch.
B. RS-232C rate select buttons

These buttons specify the RS-232C communication speed.
Choose the setting that matches the speed setting on your
Remote
computer. Make sure to switch OFF the M-400’s power before

operating the MIDI/RS-232C select switch.
4. In the MIDI/RS-232C select indication, verify the status of

the rear panel MIDI/RS-232C select switch.
5. Move the cursor to the RS-232C rate select button that

matches the communication speed of your computer, and
press [ENTER] to select the button.
2. Press [F4 (REMOTE)].
194
Other settings and functions

This chapter explains other settings and functions.
Accessing the SYSTEM screen
SYSTEM screen 1. In the SETUP section, press [SYSTEM].
fig.ScrSystem.eps
fig.ScrSystemGuide.eps
1 2 3
The SYSTEM screen will appear.
In the SYSTEM screen you can view or edit various types of

information.
1. MIXER CONFIG field

Here you can view system information and make basic mixer
settings. (p. 196)
2. BRIGHTNESS field
Here you can adjust the brightness of the lamp, panel, and
display. (p. 197)
3. FADER TOUCH SENSE field

Here you can adjust the touch sensitivity of the faders. (p. 197)
In the SYSTEM screen, the function buttons perform the following

operations.
[F1 (INIT)] Accesses the INITIALIZE p. 198

popup, where you can ini-
tialize the mixer settings.
[F2 (REAC CONFIG)] Accesses the REAC CON- p. 186
FIG popup, where you can
make REAC settings.
[F3 (LOAD/SAVE)] Accesses the LOAD/SAVE p. 199
popup, where you can load
or save mixer settings.
[F4 (REMOTE)] Accesses the REMOTE pop- p. 190
up, where you can make re-
mote settings.
[F5 (DATE TIME)] Accesses the DATE&TIME p. 202
popup, where you can spec-

ify the date and time.
[F6 (USB MEMORY)] Accesses the USB MEMO- p. 203
RY popup, where you can
manage USB memory.
[F7 (SYSTEM UPDATE)] Updates the system pro-
gram.
[F8 (LOCK CONSOLE)] Locks the console to prohib- p. 207
it operation.
SYSTEM UPDATE is for future system program updates. For

details on the system update procedure, refer to the operating
instructions provided with the updater.
195
3. Use the INTERNAL SAMPLING FREQ select buttons to

Viewing system information select either 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz as the sampling frequency
at which the M-400 will operate.
and making basic mixer fig.ScrSetFreqConf.eps
settings
The MIXER CONFIG field of the SYSTEM screen is used to view
system information and make basic mixer settings.
1. Access the SYSTEM screen.

fig.ScrSysMixConfGuide.eps A message will ask you to confirm that you want to change the
sampling frequency.
B A C Press [F8 (SET)] to switch to the sampling frequency you
selected in step 3.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the change will be cancelled.
The internal word clock setting also determines the sampling

frequency of the M-400’s DIGITAL OUT connector and the
sampling frequency for recording and playback on the USB
memory recorder.
4. Make the desired MAIN L/R setting.
If you turn Disable MAIN MUTE on, the MUTE for MAIN L/R
A. INFORMATION area will be fixed at off, and cannot be changed by button operations,
This area shows the firmware version and the state of the scene memories, or mute groups.
internal lithium battery.
B. INTERNAL SAMPLING FREQ select buttons

These buttons select the sampling frequency at which the M-400
will operate.
C. MAIN L/R setting

This specifies the MAIN L/R setting.
Disable MAIN MUTE Disables MUTE for MAIN L/R.
2. View the system information in the INFORMATION area.
The INFORMATION area shows the following items.
System Version System firmware version

Panel Version Panel firmware version
Fader Version Version of the fader firmware
Lithium Battery Status of the internal lithium
battery
If the Battery indication shows OK, the internal lithium battery

voltage is satisfactory.
If this shows LOW or NG, the voltage is low. Replace the
internal lithium battery as described in “About the internal
lithium battery” (p. 18).
196
Adjusting the brightness of the Adjusting the fader touch

lamp, panel, and display sensitivity
The BRIGHTNESS field of the SYSTEM screen is used to adjust the To adjust the touch sensitivity of the faders, use the FADER TOUCH
brightness of the lamp, panel, and display. SENS field of the SYSTEM screen.
1. Access the SYSTEM screen. 1. Access the SYSTEM screen.

fig.ScrSysBrightGuide.eps fig.ScrSysTouchGuide.eps
B A C A
A. LAMP knob A. SENSE knob

This adjusts the brightness of the lamp connected to the rear This adjusts the touch sensitivity of the faders.
panel LAMP connector.
2. Move the cursor to the SENSE knob, and use the value dial
B. PANEL knob to adjust the touch sensitivity of the faders.
This adjusts the brightness of the panel buttons and meters. Higher values produce greater sensitivity.
C. DISPLAY knob
This adjusts the brightness of the display. If this is set to 0, fader touch sensitivity will be off.
2. Move the cursor to the LAMP knob, and use the value dial
to adjust the brightness of the lamp. If you turn [TOUCH SELECT] on in the CHANNEL EDIT
Higher values produce greater brightness. section, you’ll be able to select a channel by touching its fader.
If a channel is not selected when you touch its fader, increase
At a setting of 0, the lamp will be off. the setting of the SENSE knob.
If the faders are too sensitive, turn down the SENSE knob.
3. Move the cursor to the PANEL knob, and use the value
knob to adjust the brightness of the panel buttons and
meters.
Higher values produce greater brightness. Depending on the environment in which you’re using the M-
400, fader touch sensitivity may not operate correctly, and the
4. Move the cursor to the DISPLAY knob, and use the value
fader motor may operate incorrectly while you’re operating the
dial to adjust the brightness of the display.
fader. If this occurs, use the M-400 with the SENSE knob set to 0
Higher values produce greater brightness.
so that touch sensitivity is turned off.
197
4. Press [F8 (OK)].

Initializing the mixer settings fig.ScrInitConf.eps

fig.ScrSystem.eps
A message will ask you to confirm that you want to initialize

the settings.
5. When you press [F8 (INIT)], the section you selected in step
3 will be initialized.
If you attempt to initialize the scenes or libraries when a locked

2. Press [F1 (INIT)]. scene or library exists, the following caution message will
The INITIALIZE popup will appear. appear.
fig.ScrInitGuide.eps fig.ScrInitLockedCaut.eps
If you press [F6 (DON’T INIT)], the locked data will not be
initialized; only the data that was not locked will be initialized.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the initialization operation will be
cancelled.
A. Initialize section select buttons
If you press [F8 (INIT)], all data (including the locked data) will
These buttons select the section(s) to be initialized.
be initialized.
3. Use the initialize section select buttons to select the
section(s) that you want to initialize.
You can select the following sections.
MIXER PARAMETER The mixer parameters will be initialized.

SYSTEM SETTING The system settings will be initialized.
SCENE MEMORY The scene memory will be erased.
ALL LIBRARY All user libraries will be initialized.
SYSTEM SETTING includes the following items.

• The M-400’s sampling frequency setting
• Lamp, panel, and display brightness settings
• Fader touch sensitivity setting
• REAC settings
• Remote settings
198
In the LOAD/SAVE popup, the function buttons perform the

Saving and loading mixer following operations.
settings [F1 (LOAD)] Loads the project file that is select- p. 200
ed in the list.
You can use USB memory to save or load mixer settings as a project [F2 (SAVE)] Saves the current mixer settings as p. 200
file. The LOAD/SAVE popup of the SYSTEM screen is used to save a project file to USB memory.
or load mixer settings. [F3 (NAME EDIT)] Opens the NAME EDIT popup p. 201
where you can edit the name of the
project file selected in the list.
LOAD/SAVE popup [F4 (DELETE)] Deletes the project file that is se- p. 201
lected in the list.
fig.ScrSysLoadSaveGuide.eps
1 2
1. Project file list

This lists the project file that are saved in USB memory.
2. LOAD SECTION select buttons

Use these buttons to select the section(s) for which you want to
load mixer settings.
You can select the following sections.
MIXER PARAMETER Mixer parameters

SYSTEM SETTING System settings
SCENE MEMORY Scene memories
IN PATCH LIBRARY Input patchbay library
OUT PATCH LIBRARY Output patchbay library
CH LIBRARY Channel library
AUX/MAIN LIBRARY AUX/MAIN library
GATE LIBRARY Gate/Expander library
COMP LIBRARY Compressor library
LIMITER LIBRARY Limiter library
EQ LIBRARY EQ library
FX LIBRARY Effect library
GEQ LIBRARY GEQ library
The libraries that can be selected by the LOAD SECTION select

buttons are USER libraries.
199
Saving mixer settings to USB Loading mixer settings from USB

memory memory
fig.ScrSystem.eps fig.ScrSystem.eps
2. Press [F3 (LOAD/SAVE)].

2. Press [F3 (LOAD/SAVE)].
fig.ScrSysLoadSave.eps
fig.ScrSysLoadSave.eps
The LOAD/SAVE popup will appear.

The LOAD/SAVE popup will appear.
3. Move the cursor to the project file list, and select the file
3. Press [F2 (SAVE)].
that you want to load.
4. Move the cursor to the LOAD SECTION select buttons, and

select the sections that you want to load.
5. Press [F1 (LOAD)].

fig.ScrLoadConf.eps
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the Save

operation.
4. Press [F8 (SAVE)] to execute the Save; a “now processing”

message will indicate the progress of the operation. When
saving is completed, the progress indication will close. A message will ask you to confirm that you want to load the
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled. mixer settings.
6. Press [F8 (LOAD)] to execute the Load; a “now processing”

Do not disconnect the USB memory or switch off the M-400’s message will indicate the progress of the operation. When
power while data is being saved to USB memory. Doing so may loading is completed, the progress indication will close.
destroy the data saved in USB memory. If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled.
Mixer settings are saved in the “RSS/M-400/PROJ” folder of

the USB memory. All settings except for user settings are saved. Do not disconnect the USB memory or switch off the M-400’s
power while data is being loaded from USB memory. Doing so
may destroy the data saved in USB memory.
It’s a good idea to save your mixer settings, since in the unlikely
event that the M-400 should malfunction, this will allow you to
move your settings to a backup M-400 unit and continue
operating.
200
Renaming a project file Delete a project file

fig.ScrSystem.eps fig.ScrSystem.eps
2. Press [F3 (LOAD/SAVE)]. 2. Press [F3 (LOAD/SAVE)].

fig.ScrSysLoadSave.eps fig.ScrSysLoadSave.eps
The LOAD/SAVE popup will appear. The LOAD/SAVE popup will appear.
3. Move the cursor to the project file list, and select the project 3. Move the cursor to the project file list, and select the project
file that you want to rename. file that you want to delete.
4. Press [F3 (NAME EDIT)]. 4. Press [F4 (DELETE)].

fig.ScrNameEdit.eps
The NAME EDIT popup will appear. A message will ask you to confirm the delete file operation.
5. Use the name edit field to edit the name of the project files. 5. Press [F8 (PASTE)] to carry out the delete operation.
You can specify a name of up to eight characters. If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled.
the popup.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the name edit will be cancelled and
201
Date and time settings Specifying the time

Use the DATE&TIME popup of the SYSTEM screen to set the date 1. Access the SYSTEM screen.
fig.ScrSystem.eps
and time.
DATE&TIME popup
fig.ScrSysDateTimeGuide.eps
1 2 3
2. Press [F5 (DATE TIME)].

fig.ScrSysDateTime.eps
4 5 6 7 The DATE&TIME popup will appear.
1. HOUR knob 3. Use the HOUR, MINUTE, and SECOND knobs to specify the
This specifies the current hour in a range of 0–23. time.
2. MINUTE knob 4. Press [F6 (SET)] to finalize the setting.

This specifies the current minute in a range of 0–59.
Specifying the date
3. SECOND knob
This specifies the current second in a range of 0–59. 1. Access the SYSTEM screen.
fig.ScrSystem.eps
4. FORMAT select buttons

These buttons select the format of the date.
You can choose one of the following formats.
MM/DD/YYYY Month/Date/Year
DD/MM/YYYY Date/Month/Year
YYYY/MM/DD Year/Month/Date
5. YEAR knob 2. Press [F5 (DATE TIME)].

This specifies the year in a range of 2000 to 2099. fig.ScrSysDateTime.eps
6. MONTH knob
This specifies the month in a range of 1–12.
7. DATE knob
This specifies the date in a range of 1–31.
In the DATE&TIME popup, the function buttons perform the

The DATE&TIME popup will appear.
[F6 (SET)] Finalizes the specified date and time.
3. Use the FORMAT select buttons to select the date format.
4. Use the YEAR, MONTH, and DATE knobs to specify the
date.
5. Press [F6 (SET)] to finalize the setting.
202
Accessing the USB MEMORY popup

Managing USB memory
The USB MEMORY popup of the SYSTEM SCREEN is used to fig.ScrSystem.eps
perform USB memory management.

power while data is being saved to USB memory or being
loaded from it. Doing so may destroy the data saved in USB
memory.
USB MEMORY popup

fig.ScrSysUSBMemGuide.eps
1 2 2. Press [F6 (USB MEMORY)].

fig.ScrSysUSBMem.eps
1. USB memory information The USB MEMORY screen will appear.

This area shows information about the USB memory.
The following information is shown.
Format Type of format

Volume Size Total capacity of USB memory
Free Size Available space in USB memory
2. File list
This area shows the files in the USB memory.
If you move the cursor to a folder and press [ENTER], you’ll

move to the level below that folder. If you move the cursor to
“..” and press [ENTER], you’ll move to the level above the
current folder.
In the USB MEMORY popup, the function buttons perform the

[F1 (FORMAT)] Formats the USB memory. p. 204

[F2 (MAKE FOLDER)] Creates a folder in the list. p. 204
up, where you can edit the file
name.
[F4 (COPY)] Copies the file at the cursor po- p. 205
sition in the list.
[F5 (PASTE)] Pastes the copied file into the p. 205
list.
[F6 (DELETE)] Deletes the file at the cursor po- p. 205
sition in the list.
[F7 (SPEED TEST)] Tests the speed of USB memory.
203
Formatting USB memory Editing the file or folder name

1. Access the USB MEMORY screen. 1. Access the USB MEMORY screen.
fig.ScrSysUSBMem.eps fig.ScrSysUSBMem.eps
2. Press [F1 (FORMAT)]. 2. In the file list, move the cursor to the desired file or folder.
fig.ScrFormatConf.eps
fig.ScrNameEdit.eps
A message will ask you to confirm that you want to format the
USB memory. The NAME EDIT popup will appear.
3. Press [F8 (FORMAT)] to carry out the Format operation. 4. Use the name edit field to edit the name. You can specify a
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled. name of up to twelve characters.
A progress message will indicate the state of formatting.
When the “Completed” indication appears, formatting is
Even if the original name exceeded twelve characters, the name
complete.
after editing will not exceed twelve characters.
the popup.
power while USB memory is being formatted.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the name edit will be cancelled and
Creating a folder
1. Access the USB MEMORY screen.
fig.ScrSysUSBMem.eps
2. In the file list, move to the level at which you want to create
a folder.
3. Press [F2 (MAKE FOLDER)].
4. A folder named “Folderxx” (xx is a number) will be created

in the file list.
204
Copying a file Deleting a file

1. Access the USB MEMORY screen. 1. Access the USB MEMORY screen.
fig.ScrSysUSBMem.eps fig.ScrSysUSBMem.eps
2. In the file list, move the cursor to the file you want to delete.
2. In the file list, move the cursor to the desired file.
3. Press [F6 (DELETE)].
You can’t copy a folder.
3. Press [F4 (COPY)].
A message will ask you to confirm the Delete operation.

Press [F8 (DELETE)] to carry out the Delete operation.
A message will ask you to confirm the Copy operation.

Press [F8 (COPY)] to carry out the Copy operation. The file you
selected in step 2 will be copied to the clipboard.
4. In the file list, move to the level at which you want to paste
the copied file.
5. Press [F5 (PASTE)].

fig.ScrPasteConf.eps
A message will ask you to confirm the Paste operation.

Press [F8 (PASTE)] to carry out the Paste operation.
You can’t paste while you playing/recording the USB memory

recorder.
205
Testing the speed of USB memory

Here’s how to test your USB memory’s reading and writing speed to
verify whether it can be used by the USB memory recorder for
playback and recording.
1. Access the USB MEMORY screen.
2. Press [F7 (SPEED TEST)].

A “now processing” message will appear, and the USB memory
will be tested. When the test is completed, the results will be
displayed.
Playing Speed Indicates whether the USB memory can be

used for playback by the USB memory re-
corder. If this is OK, the memory can be used.
Recording Speed Indicates whether the USB memory can be
used for recording by the USB memory re-
corder. If this is OK, the memory can be used.
If the test result is “NG” (Not Good), we do not recommend

that you use this USB memory with the USB memory recorder.
In order for the speed of USB memory to be tested, the USB

memory must have several MB of free space.
206
Console Lock Unlocking the console

You can lock the console to prevent it from being operated. If a 1. When the console is locked, press [ENTER].
fig.ScrSysLockCons.eps
password has been specified for the current user settings, you will
need to enter the password in order to unlock the console.
If you turn off the power while the console is locked, the
console lock setting will be defeated the next time you turn on
the power.
Locking the console

fig.ScrSystem.eps
fig.ScrUserPasswd.eps
If a password has been specified for the current user settings,

the ENTER PASSWORD popup will appear.
Enter the user password and press [F8 (OK)].
2. Press [F8 (LOCK CONSOLE)]. 2. The console will be unlocked.

fig.ScrSystem.eps
fig.ScrUserPasswd.eps
If a password has been specified for the current user settings,

the ENTER PASSWORD popup will appear.
Enter the user password and press [F8 (OK)].
fig.ScrSysLockCons.eps
The console will be locked.
207
Help function Help shortcuts

The Help function explains how to use the M-400. By holding down [HELP] and pressing a top panel button, you can
access the Help content related to that button.
You can use the following buttons as Help shortcuts.
The Help contents are provided only in English.
• [EFFECTS]
• [METER]
Using the Help function • [SYSTEM]
• [PATCHBAY]
1. Press [HELP]. • GROUP section [DCA]
fig.ScrHelpContGuide.eps
• GROUP section [MUTE]
A • [COMP]
• [GATE]
• [EQ]
• [AUX SENDS]
• SCENE section [DISP]
• USER section [DISP]
• RECORDER section [DISP]
• TALKBACK/OSC section [DISP]
• MONITOR section [DISP]
The HELP CONTENTS popup will appear.
A. CONTENTS list
This lists the Help contents.
In the HELP CONTENTS popup, the function buttons perform the

[F1 (OPEN)] Displays the content selected in the list.

2. In the CONTENTS list, select the desired content and press

[F1 (OPEN)].
fig.ScrHelp.eps
The HELP popup will appear.

Use the up/down cursor buttons or the value dial to scroll the
display.
Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the HELP popup.
208
Appendix
User button functions

FUNCTION PARAM1 PARAM2 LED Explanation
NONE - - Unlit
SCENE PREV RECALL - Lit while held Recalls the scene of the previous number
NEXT RECALL - Lit while held Recalls the scene of the next number
DIRECT RECALL - Lit while held Recalls the scene of the specified number
UNDO RECALL - Lit if UNDO is available Cancels the scene recall
OSCILLA- OSC ON - ON: lit, OFF: unlit Oscillator on/off
TOR
MONITOR SOURCE SELECT AUX1–16, Lit if assignment is Changes the monitor source to the specified source
MAIN L/R, identical
REC L/R
EFFECT BYPASS FX FX1 L–FX4 R ON: lit, OFF: unlit Turns Bypass on/off for the specified FX
BYPASS GEQ GEQ1–GEQ4 ON: lit, OFF: unlit Turns Bypass on/off for the specified GEQ
EDIT FX FX1–FX4 Lit when the specified
screen is displayed
EDIT GEQ1 GEQ1–GEQ4 Lit when the specified
screen is displayed
TAP TEMPO Blinks in time with the
tempo
MUTE 1-8 ON: lit, OFF: unlit Turns the specified mute group on/off
GROUP
METER PEAK CLEAR - Lit while held Clears the meter peak hold and Over indications
CHANGE METER INPUT CH, Lit while held down The level detection point of the specified meter will
POINT AUX/MAIN be changed each time you press the button.
CH SELECT PREV - Lit while held Selects the channel that precedes the current channel
NEXT - Lit while held Selects the channel that follows the current channel
CH EDIT +48V SW - ON: lit, OFF: unlit Turns +48V phantom power on/off for the current
channel
PHASE SW - ON: lit, OFF: unlit Turns PHASE on/off for the current channel
GATE SW - ON: lit, OFF: unlit Turns GATE on/off for the current channel
COMP SW - ON: lit, OFF: unlit Turns COMP on/off for the current channel
SET UNITY - Lit while held Sets the fader of the current channel to 0.0 dB
Appendix
209
Appendix
Error message list

Message Explanation
xxx is directory. You attempted to copy the xxx directory of the USB memory.
xxx is used for EXT FXx Port xxx is being used by EXT FXx. Do you want to disable EXT FXx?
Do you want to disable it?
Cannot operate the USB memory. The device connected to the USB MEMORY connector used more than the maximum allowable electri-
It exceeds the power capability. cal current.
Directory is not empty. You attempted to delete a non-empty directory in USB memory.
Internal battery is low. The internal lithium battery has run down.
Internal data were damaged. Data was initialized because the internal memory data was lost when the internal lithium battery was
M-400 starts with initialized setting. depleted or was replaced.
Invalid USER NAME. You attempted to assign a blank user name.
Media is abnormal. The USB memory has malfunctioned.
Media not formatted. The USB memory has not been formatted.
MIDI/RS-232C Rx Error An inappropriate signal is being input to MIDI/RS-232C.
Framing.
MIDI/RS-232C Rx Error xxx Too much data is being received via MIDI/RS-232C.
Buffer Full.
Passwords do not match. The two passwords you entered to change the user password do not match.
REAC x Error The cooling fan of the input/output unit connected to REAC x has stopped.
Fan Stop.
REAC x Error The temperature of the input/output unit connected to REAC x has become abnormally high.
Temp High.
REAC x Error A reception error occurred at the M-400’s REAC x port.
Packet.
REAC x Error Packet. (I/O unit Rx) A reception error occurred at the input/output unit connected to the REAC x port.
REAC x: Wrong sampling frequency. A REAC device whose sampling frequency is not supported by the M-400 is connected to REAC x.
The data is locked You attempted to edit a locked scene or library item.
The internal FAN has stopped. The cooling fan located on the bottom panel has stopped.
This operation is not allowed. You attempted to perform an operation that is prohibited by your user settings.
USB MIDI Rx Error Too much data is being received via USB MIDI.
Buffer Full.
Now Playing/Now Recording You attempted to copy a file in USB memory while the USB memory recorder was playing or recording.
Appendix
210
Appendix
Can’t input successfully from REAC;

Troubleshooting noise is heard
If REAC devices are connected incorrectly or if the REAC mode
Overall operation setting is incorrect, it will not be possible to input from REAC, and
noise may be heard.
In this case, first check the connections between the M-400 and the
No sound
input/output units.
● A device is not powered on. • Make sure that the input/output units are connected to the
● An input/output unit is not connected correctly. correct REAC port
● The devices are not connected correctly. • Make sure that the REAC mode of the input/output units is
● The volume of a connected amp or other device is lowered. correct
● A volume level setting is lowered.
• Channel fader
After changing the REAC mode of an input/output unit, you
• MAIN fader, AUX faders must cycle the power to that input/output unit.
• MONITOR LEVEL knob Then initialize the REAC connection.
• PHONES LEVEL knob
• MAIN or AUX channel attenuator 1. Disconnect the REAC cable, and wait for about five
seconds.
● Output patchbay settings are incorrect.
● The MUTE ALL OUTPUTS button is turned on for a connected 2. Reconnect the REAC cable.
input/output unit.
You’ve forgotten the ADMIN

Sound is not being input
password
● A device is not powered on.
● To clear the ADMIN password, switch on the M-400’s power
● An input/output unit is not connected correctly.
while holding down the [DISP] button in the USER section and the
● The devices are not connected correctly.
[SOLO CLEAR] button in the MONITOR section.
● Input patchbay settings are incorrect.
● The channel fader is lowered.
Top panel faders do not work
● The channel is muted.
● The channel’s MAIN switch is off. ● SENDS ON FADER is turned on.
● The DCA fader to which the channel belongs is lowered. ● The M-400 is in a mode where the faders are used to control the
GEQ.
The preamp of a specific channel is

Fader touch sensitivity does not work
not shown
● CHANNEL DISPLAY [TOUCH SELECT] is turned off.
● The input is not patched in the input patchbay.
● The fader touch sensitivity is not adjusted appropriately.
● The input that is patched in the input patchbay does not have a
preamp.
“Adjusting the fader touch sensitivity” (p. 197)
Sound is noisy or distorted
● The preamp gain is inappropriate
You experience a “sticking”
The sound will be distorted if the preamp gain is too high. The sensation when operating the
proportion of noise will be greater if the preamp gain is too low. faders
● The channel’s dynamics, EQ, etc. are overloading.
● The ground is not connected (p. 43)
Appendix
Check the overload indication or level meter in the CHANNEL

If the ground is not connected, the fader touch sensitivity will
DISPLAY to see if any section is overloading. If you find a section
not operate correctly, and the fader motor may malfunction
that’s overloading, adjust the parameters for it.
when you operate a fader.
● The fader touch sensitivity is not working correctly
Depending on the environment in which you’re using the M-
400, the fader touch sensitivity may not operate correctly,
possibly causing the fader motor to malfunction when you
operate a fader.
If this occurs, use the M-400 with the touch sensitivity set to 0
(p. 197) so that touch sensitivity is disabled.
211
Appendix
Can’t read or write USB memory If REAC connection is unsuccessful, check the following points.
• Make sure that all REAC devices are powered on.
● The USB memory is not formatted
• Check the Cat5e cable connections.
● The USB memory is formatted as other than FAT (e.g., NTFS or
• Make sure that the Cat5e cables are not damaged.
HFS)
• Verify that you’re using the appropriate type of cables. (See
● The USB memory does not have sufficient free space
“About cables” (p. 13))
• If you’re using a switching hub, is it operating?
Remote • If you’re using a switching hub, is it connected correctly?
• If you’re using a switching hub, does it have the correct
specifications? (See “Requirements for switching hubs”
Can’t control an external device (p. 214))
● The settings of the external device are incorrect.
● The external device is not connected correctly.
● The cable is broken.
● The MIDI OUT setting is set to THRU.
● The RS-232C baud rate is not set correctly.
● The M-400 is not set to transmit messages.
Can’t control the M-400 from an

external device
● The settings of the external device are incorrect.
● The external device is not connected correctly.
● The cable is broken.
● The RS-232C baud rate is not set correctly.
● The M-400 is not set to receive messages.
Other
Insufficient volume from a device

connected to the output jacks
● You’re using a cable that contains a built-in resistor.
Data disappeared from USB memory

● You switched off the power or disconnected the USB memory
while writing or reading USB memory.
Settings don’t change when you

recall a scene
● The recall is being filtered by the RECALL PARAMETER and
GLOBAL SCOPE settings.
Appendix
REAC indicator
The REAC A port, REAC B port, and SPLIT/BACKUP port provide
a REAC indicator that shows the REAC communications status.
The following table shows the meaning of the REAC indicator status.
Status Meaning
Lit REAC communication is established
Blinking REAC communication is taking place
Unlit No communication
212
Appendix
Pin configuration diagrams LAMP connector

fig.PinLamp.eps
Cat5e Ethernet cables

(RJ45 EtherCon type connectors)
LAMP
Cat5e crossover cables
(REAC cables SC-W100S) Pin number Signal name
fig.PinCat5eCross.eps 1 NC
TX+ TX+ 2 NC
TX- TX- 3 GND
RX+ RX+
4 DC +12V
Lamps rated up to 6W (12V/500mA) are supported.
RX- RX-
Audio jacks (XLR)
INPUT and OUTPUT
Balanced connections are recommended.
Cat5e straight cables If you use unbalanced connections, connect the cold and ground.
fig.PinCat5eStraigt.eps
• Balanced connection
TX+ TX+ fig.XLRJack.eps
TX- TX-
RX+ RX+
HOT GND
RX- RX-
COLD
• Unbalanced connection
fig.XLRJack2.eps
HOT GND
INPUT jacks provide phantom power (+48V/14mA).
Appendix
213
Appendix
Requirements for switching

hubs
Switching hubs used to connect REAC devices must meet the
following conditions.
• We recommend a switching hub that supports 1000BASE-T
(IEEE 802.3ab, Gigabit Ethernet)
• 100BASE-TX interface must be supported (IEEE 802.3u,
Fast Ethernet)
• Full duplex communication (simultaneous bidirectional
communication) must be supported
Caution when using a switching hub

• The network propagation time between REAC devices is
approximately 375 microseconds, but if the signal passes
through a switching hub, there will be approximately 200
microseconds of delay for each unit.
• Up to four switching hubs can be connected in series.
• Connect REAC devices to a switching hub that supports
100BASE-TX.
• Carefully read the owner’s manual of the switching hub you
use.
Appendix
214
Appendix
Main specifications
M-400: LIVE MIXING CONSOLE
Number of Channels
48 in, 18 BUS, 8 MATRIX, 58 out
AD/DA Conversion
Sample Rate: 48.0 kHz or 44.1 kHz
Signal Processing: 24 bits
Internal processing
56 bits
Frequency Response
CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks (1 to 8): -2 dB / +0 dB (20k ohms load, +4 dBu)
PHONES jack: -3 dB / +0 dB (40 ohms load, 150 mW)
* Sample Rate: 48.0 kHz or 44.1 kHz
* Input Connector: CONSOLE INPUT (Pad: ON, Input gain: +4 dBu, 20 Hz to 20 kHz)
Total Harmonic Distortion + Noise

CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks (1 to 8): 0.05 % (typ., +4 dBu)
PHONES jack: 0.05 % (typ., 40 ohms load, 150 mW)
* Input Connector: CONSOLE INPUT (Pad: ON, Input gain: +4 dBu, 20 Hz to 20 kHz)
Dynamic Range
CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks (1 to 8): 110 dB (typ.)
* Input Connector: CONSOLE INPUT (Pad: ON, Input gain: +4 dBu)
Crosstalk@ 1 kHz
CONSOLE INPUT jacks (1 to 8): -80dB (Pad: ON, Input gain: +10 dBu, typ.)
CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks (1 to 8): -100 dB (typ.)
Nominal Input Level (Variable)

CONSOLE INPUT jacks (1 to 8): -65 to -10 dBu (Pad: OFF) or -45 to +10 dBu (Pad: ON)
STEREO IN jacks (L / R): -18 to 0 dBu
TALKBACK MIC IN jack: -50 to -10 dBu
Pad
20 dB ON / OFF
Appendix
Input Impedance
CONSOLE INPUT jacks (1 to 8): 14 k ohms
STEREO IN jacks (L / R): 10 k ohms
TALKBACK MIC IN jack: 41 K ohms
Non Clip Maximum Input level

CONSOLE INPUT jacks (1 to 8): +8 dBu (Pad: OFF) or +28 dBu (Pad: ON)
STEREO IN jacks (L / R): +18 dBu
TALKBACK MIC IN jack: +8 dBu
215
Appendix
Nominal Output Level

CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks (1 to 8): +4 dBu (Load impedance: 10 k ohms)
Output Impedance
CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks (1 to 8): 600 ohms
PHONES jack: 100 ohms
Recommended Load Impedance

CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks (1 to 8): 10 k ohms or greater
PHONES jack: 8 ohms or greater
Non Clip Maximum Output level

CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks (1 to 8): +22 dBu (1 kHz, 10 k ohms load)
PHONES jack: 150 mW + 150 mW (1 kHz, 40 ohms load)
Residual Noise Level (IHF-A, typ.)

-88 dBu (All faders: Min)
-80 dBu (Main Fader: Unity, Channel faders: Unity only one CONSOLE IN channel, Preamp gain: Min)
-61 dBu (Main Fader: Unity, Channel faders: Unity only one CONSOLE IN channel, Preamp gain: Max)
-73 dBu (All faders: Unity, Preamp gain: Min, S-1608 + S-4000S-3208, Total 48CH)
-41 dBu (All faders: Unity, Preamp gain: Max, S-1608 + S-4000S-3208, Total 48CH)
* Input 150 ohms terminate
* Output Connector: CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks (1 to 8)
Equivalent Input Noise Level (E.I.N.)

-126 dBu (Main Fader: Unity, Channel faders: Unity only one CONSOLE IN channel, Preamp gain: Max)
* Output Connector: CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks (1 to 8)
Network Latency
2.8 mS (typ.) *1
* Total System Latency of audio signal from S-1608 inputs to outputs via M-400’s REAC ports (A or B).
* Sample Rate: 48.0 kHz
* Effects : No insert effects
Connectors
CONSOLE INPUT jacks (1 to 8): XLR-3-31 type (balanced, phantom power)
TALKBACK MIC IN jack: XLR-3-31 type (balanced, phantom power)
STEREO IN jacks (L / R): RCA phono type
CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks (1 to 8): XLR-3-32 type (balanced)
PHONES jack: Stereo 1/4 inch phone type
DIGITAL OUT jacks x 2: Optical type, Coaxial type
REAC ports Å~3: RJ-45 EtherCon type
Appendix
RS-232C connector: 9-pin D-sub type

MIDI connectors (OUT/THRU, IN): 5-pin DIN type
USB connectors: USB Type A and Type B
LAMP connector: XLR-4-31 type
Grounding terminal
AC INPUT connector
* XLR type: 1 GND, 2 HOT, 3: COLD

* phantom power: DC+48V(unloaded maximum), 14mA(maximum load) (All XLR type inputs)
* LAMP power: DC+12V/500mA
216
Appendix
Display
800 x 480 dots Wide VGA backlit TFT color screen
Power Supply
AC 115 V, AC 117 V, AC 220 V, AC 230 V, AC 240 V (50/60 Hz)
Power Consumption
95 W
Dimensions
749.0 (W) x 626.0 (D) x 229.0 (H) mm
29-1/2(W) x 24-11/16(D) x 9-1/16(H) inches
Weight
19.8 kg
43 lbs 11 oz
Operation Temperature
+5 to +40 degrees Celsius
+41 to +104 degrees Fahrenheit
Accessories
Power Cord
REAC Connector Covers x 3
Ferrite Core x 3
Cover
Channel number sticker
Owner’s Manual
Options
Stage unit: S-1608
Stage unit: S-4000S-3208
FOH unit: S-0816
REAC Splitter: S-4000-SP
REAC Optical Converter: S-OPT
Cat5e Ethernet Crossover Cable with Neutrik(R) EtherCon(R) Plug: SC-W100S (100 m)
Cat5e Ethernet Crossover Cable with Neutrik(R) EtherCon(R) Plug and reel: W100S-R (100 m)
* 0dBu = 0.775Vrms
* In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice.
*1: When a REAC Splitter S-4000-SP or a switching hub is used in-line with REAC cables, the network latency will increase by the
amount of processing delay introduced by the splitting device itself.
Appendix
The actual delay is dependant upon the specifications of the splitting device, though the maximum delay amount for a single
splitting device should be about 200 microseconds.
217
Appendix
Dimensions
680
636
749 229
626
Dimensions are shown in millimeters.

Appendix
218
Preset libraries
FX library
Number Name Type Description
P000 St.REVERB St.REVERB Default settings for St.REVERB.
P001 REVERB+GATE REVERB+GATE Default settings for REVERB+GATE.
P002 DELAY x2 DELAY x2 Default settings for DELAY x2.
P003 LONG DELAY LONG DELAY Default settings for LONG DELAY.
P004 M.TAP DELAY M.TAP DELAY Default settings for M.TAP DELAY.
P005 X.MOD DELAY X.MOD DELAY Default settings for X.MOD DELAY.
P006 St.CHORUS St.CHORUS Default settings for St.CHORUS.
P007 St.FLANGER St.FLANGER Default settings for St.FLANGER.
P008 St.PHASER St.PHASER Default settings for St.PHASER.
P009 P.SHIFTER x2 P.SHIFTER x2 Default settings for P.SHIFTER x2.
P010 CH STRIP x2 CH STRIP x2 Default settings for CH STRIP x2.
P011 Small Hall1 St.REVERB Small size hall using HALL1 setting of St.REVERB. 1 second reverb time.
P012 Med Hall1 St.REVERB Medium size hall using HALL1 setting of St.REVERB. 1.3 second reverb time.
P013 Large Hall1 St.REVERB Large size hall using HALL1 setting of St.REVERB. 2.3 second reverb time.
P014 Concert Hall1 St.REVERB Large size hall using HALL1 setting of St.REVERB. 3.4 second reverb time.
P015 Small Hall2 St.REVERB Small size hall using HALL2 setting of St.REVERB. 1.2 second reverb time.
P016 Med Hall2 St.REVERB Medium size hall using HALL2 setting of St.REVERB. 1.5 second reverb time.
P017 Large Hall2 St.REVERB Large size hall using HALL2 setting of St.REVERB. 2.4 second reverb time.
P018 Long Hall2 St.REVERB Long, large size hall using HALL2 setting of St.REVERB. 3.3 second reverb time.
P019 Small Plate St.REVERB Small size PLATE setting of St.REVERB. 1.2 second reverb time.
P020 Med Plate St.REVERB Medium size PLATE setting of St.REVERB. 1.9 second reverb time.
P021 Long Plate St.REVERB Large size PLATE setting of St.REVERB. 2.6 second reverb time.
P022 PracticeRoom St.REVERB Medium size room using ROOM1 setting of St.REVERB. 1.8 second reverb time.
P023 Garage St.REVERB Small room using ROOM1 setting of St.REVERB. 0.6 second reverb time.
P024 Bathroom St.REVERB Small, hard room using ROOM1 setting of St.REVERB. 1.3 second reverb time.
P025 Tiny Room St.REVERB Small tight room using ROOM2 setting of St.REVERB. 0.9 second reverb time.
P026 Small Club St.REVERB Small room using ROOM2 setting of St.REVERB. 0.8 second reverb time.
P027 Med Club St.REVERB Medium room using ROOM2 setting of St.REVERB. 1.0 second reverb time.
P028 Large Club St.REVERB Large room using ROOM2 setting of St.REVERB. 1.6 second reverb time.
P029 Cave St.REVERB Long space using HALL2 setting of St.REVERB. 6.8 second reverb time.
P030 Pipe St.REVERB Hard ringing chamber using ROOM2 setting of St.REVERB. 6.8 second reverb time.
P031 Ambient Gate REVERB+GATE Gated reverb with 1.7 second reverb time, -30.0dB gate threshold, 94ms release time.
P032 Soft Gate REVERB+GATE Gated reverb with 2.2 second reverb time, -30.0dB gate threshold, 125ms release time.
P033 Hard Gate REVERB+GATE Gated reverb with 1.7 second reverb time, -30.0dB gate threshold, 0ms release time.
P034 SimpleEchoLR DELAY x2 Stereo Echo with both sides at 400ms delay time, feedback level at 40.
P035 Dual Echo LR DELAY x2 Stereo Echo with right side at 233ms delay time and feedback level at 60, left side at
330ms delay time and feedback level at 40.
P036 LongDelay LR LONG DELAY Long Echo with right side at 2400ms delay time, left side at 1200ms delay time, feed-
back level at 0.
P037 Accelerate LONG DELAY Long Echo right side at 1100ms delay time, left side at 700ms delay time, feedback
with 300ms time and level at 40.
P038 Accelerando M.TAP DELAY Multitap echo with 12 taps ranging from 500ms to 2625ms, panning from left to right.
P039 1+3=4 M.TAP DELAY Multitap Delay for Echo with 3 repeats added to original signal.
P040 1+4=5 M.TAP DELAY Multitap Delay for Echo with 4 repeats added to original signal.
P041 Warmth X.MOD DELAY Cross Modulation Delay uses vibrato to add warm detuned sound behind piano, gui-
Appendix
tar, or other instruments.

P042 Send Chorus St.CHORUS Basic Stereo Chorus setting designed to be used on an effects loop via AUX send
P043 InsertChorus St.CHORUS Basic Stereo Chorus setting designed to be inserted into a channel.
P044 Send Flange St.FLANGER Basic Stereo Flanger setting designed to be used on an effects loop via AUX send
P045 InsertFlange St.FLANGER Basic Stereo Flanger setting designed to be inserted into a channel.
P046 Send Phaser St.PHASER Basic Stereo Phaser setting designed to be used on an effects loop via AUX send
P047 InsertPhaser St.PHASER Basic Stereo Phaser setting designed to be inserted into a channel.
P048 Sweep St.PHASER Stereo Phaser with 8stages, Rate at 0.06Hz, and Feedback at 77.
219
Appendix
GEQ library
Number Name Description
P000 Flat Flat setting.
Channel library
P000 Default Default channel settings.
P001 Kick Kick
P002 Snare Snare
P003 HiHat HiHat
P004 Toms Toms
P005 DrumOverHead Drum Over Head
P006 Percussion Percussion
P007 Bass Bass
P008 AGuitar Band Acoustic Guitar Band
P009 EGuitar Band Electric Guitar Band
P010 Synthesizer Synthesizer
P011 Piano Band Piano Band
P012 Female Vocal Female Vocal
P013 Male Vocal Male Vocal
P014 Spoken Word Spoken Word
P015 Choir Choir
P016 Brass & Wind Brass and Wind
AUX/MAIN library
P000 Default Default settings for aux/main.
Appendix
220
Appendix
GATE/EXP library
P000 Gate Default settings for gate.
P001 Expander Default settings for expander.
P002 Ducking Default settings for ducking.
P003 Gate 1 Gate 1
P004 Gate Kick Gate Kick
P005 Gate Snare Gate Snare
P006 Expand Toms Expander Toms
P007 Expander 1 Expander 1
P008 Expander 2 Expander 2
P009 Noise Gate Noise gate
COMP library
P000 Comp Default settings for compressor.
P001 Vocalist 1 Vocalist 1
P002 Vocalist 2 Vocalist 2
P003 Narrator Narrator
P004 Spoken Word Spoken Word
P005 Kick Kick
P006 Snare Snare
P007 Bass Bass
P008 Slap Bass Slap Base
P009 Piano Piano
P010 Guitar Guitar
P011 Synthesizer Synthesizer
P012 Strings Strings
P013 Brass & Wind Brass & Wind
P014 Choir Choir
P015 Limiter Limiter
P016 Hard Limiter Hard Limiter
P017 Heavy Comp Heavy Comp
LIMITER library
P000 Limiter Default settings for limiter.
Appendix
221
Appendix
EQ library
P000 EQ Flat Default settings for EQ.
P001 Hi Pass Hi Pass
P002 Notch Notch
P003 Band Pass Band Pass
P004 Lo Pass Lo Pass
P005 Kick 1 Full bass sound suitable for bass drum. Enhances lows and highs with reduction of frequencies around
280Hz. No Filter.
P006 Deep Kick Extra boost on low end and frequencies around 3kHz to enhance sound of bass drum. No Filter.
P007 Snare 1 Boosted frequencies around 2.00kHz, enhanced highs for snare drum. Hi Pass Filter to reject rumble and
leakage from bass drum.
P008 Snare 2 Enhanced highs, reduction of frequencies around 266Hz for snare drum. No Filter.
P009 Toms For tom tom drums, reduced frequencies around 560kHz to avoid ringing, enhanced highs for clarity. No Filter.
P010 Crash Cymbal Boosted high frequencies to enhance cymbal sounds. Hi Pass Filter to reject rumble and leakage from drums.
P011 Ride Cymbal Boosted mid and high frequencies to enhance cymbal sounds. Hi Pass Filter to reject rumble and leakage
from drums.
P012 Shaker Boosted mid and high frequencies to enhance handheld shaker and other high pitched percussion instru-
ments. Hi Pass Filter to reject rumble and leakage from drums.
P013 Percussion Enhanced frequencies around 3kHz for percussion instruments. Hi Pass Filter to reject rumble and leakage
from drums.
P014 Bass 1 Boosted frequencies around 100Hz for Bass. Enhanced high mids for clarity, Hi Pass Filter at 30Hz.
P015 Deep Bass Boosted low frequencies, reduced frequencies around 190kHz for deeper bass sound. No Filter.
P016 Piano Solo Full and rich sound for solo piano or to accompany another instrument or vocalist. No Filter.
P017 Piano Band Allows piano to fit well in a typical pop band. Enhanced frequencies above 3.0kHz to add clarity. Low end
reduced to avoid clash with bass player. Hi Pass Filter at 80Hz.
P018 AGuitar Solo Full and rich sound for solo Guitar or to accompany another instrument or vocalist in small group. Hi Pass
Filter at 50Hz.
P019 AGuitr Band Allows guitar to blend in a typical pop band. Low end reduced to avoid clash with bass player. Hi Pass Filter
at 100Hz.
P020 Nylon Guitar Lightly enhances frequencies above 3.0kHz for Nylon Guitar. Hi Pass Filter at 100Hz.
P021 EGuitr Band Boosted frequencies around 3.0kHz to help guitar cut through and blend in a typical pop band, using vari-
ous guitar sounds and effects. Hi Pass Filter at 50Hz.
P022 EGuitr Jazz Lightly enhanced bass for full and rich sound for jazz guitar in solo or ensemble. Hi Pass Filter at 50Hz.
P023 EGuitr Clean Clear sound for Electric Guitar with no overdrive or distortion. Hi Pass Filter at 50Hz.
P024 EGuitr Disto Enhances Electric Guitar with overdrive or distortion. Hi Pass Filter at 50Hz.
P025 EGuitr Heavy Big sound for heavy metal style Electric Guitar with distortion. Boosts frequencies around 170Hz and above
3.5kHz. Hi Pass Filter at 67Hz.
P026 Synthesizer Good for wide range of synthesizers sounds, solo or in a typical pop band. No Filter.
P027 Female Voc 1 Near flat EQ for female singing voice. Hi Pass Filter at 100Hz to reduce rumble.
P028 Female Voc 2 Reduced bass, enhanced frequencies around 315Hz and above 5kHz for female singing voice. Hi Pass Filter
at 80Hz to reduce rumble.
P029 Male Voc 1 Enhanced frequencies around 2.0kHz for clarity of Male singing voice. Hi Pass Filter at 80Hz to reduce rumble.
P030 Male Voc 2 Reduced 400Hz, enhanced bass and frequencies above 2.0kHz for clarity of Male singing voice. Hi Pass Fil-
ter at 80Hz to reduce rumble.
P031 Narrator Enhances clarity for Narration occurring over music or other background sounds. Bass reduced to avoid
muddiness. Hi Pass Filter at 80Hz to reduce rumble.
P032 Radio Voice Boosted bass, reduced frequencies around 422Hz, and enhanced frequencies above 2.0kHz sound for spo-
Appendix
ken word. Hi Pass Filter at 80Hz to reduce rumble.

P033 Spoken Word Basic setting for voice for solo spoken word. Enhanced high mid for added clarity. Hi Pass Filter at 80Hz to
reduce rumble.
P034 HiHat EQ to enhance the sound of hihat cymbals. Bass reduced to avoid leakage from kick and other drums. Hi
Pass Filter at 100Hz to reduce rumble.
P035 DrumOverHead Lightly enhanced high mids adds clarity for overhead mic on drum kit. Hi Pass Filter at 100Hz to reduce rumble.
P036 Brass & Wind Lightly enhanced high mids adds clarity for brass or wind instruments. Hi Pass Filter at 80Hz to reduce rumble.
P037 Choir Reduced frequencies below 600Hz to help clarity for choir. Hi Pass Filter at 80Hz to reduce rumble.
222
Appendix
Patchbay library
Input patchbay library

P000 Default Default settings for input patchbay.
CH1–16 from INPUT1–16 of REAC A.
CH17–32 from INPUT1–16 of REAC B.
CH33–40 from CONSOLE IN1-8.
CH41–48 from FX3 OUT L/R, FX4 OUT L/R, PLAY L/R, and STEREO IN L/R.
P001 16A + 32B CH1–16 from INPUT1–16 of REAC A.
CH17–48 from INPUT1–32 of REAC B.
P002 16A + 24B + 8C CH1–16 from INPUT1–16 of REAC A.
CH17–40 from INPUT 1–24 of REAC B.
CH41–48 from FX3 OUT L/R, FX4 OUT L/R, PLAY L/R, and STEREO IN L/R.
P003 Monitor CH1–32 from INPUT9–40 of REAC A.
CH33–40 from CONSOLE IN 1–8.
CH41-48 from FX3 OUT L/R, FX4 OUT L/R, PLAY L/R, and STEREO IN L/R.
Output patchbay library

P000 Default Default settings for output patchbay.
AUX1–6 to OUTPUT1–6 of REAC A.
MAIN L/R to OUTPUT7–8 of REAC A.
AUX9–14 to OUTPUT1–6 of REAC B.
MAIN L/R to OUTPUT7–8 of REAC B.
AUX1–6 to CONSOLE OUT1-6.
MONITOR L/R to CONSOLE OUT 7–8 and DIGITAL OUT.
P001 1-8A 9-14LRB AUX1–8 to OUTPUT1–8 of REAC A.
AUX9–14 to OUTPUT1–6 of REAC B.
MAIN L/R to OUTPUT 7–8 of REAC B.
MAIN L/R to CONSOLE OUT1–2 and DIGITAL OUT.
MONITOR L/R to CONSOLE OUT 3–4.
REC L/R to CONSOLE OUT5–6.
AUX15–16 to CONSOLE OUT7–8.
Appendix
223
Effect types
Reverb
St.REVERB (Stereo Reverb)
fig.AlgoStRev.eps
Input L DRY Output L
Stereo 4 Band EQ
Reverb
Input R DRY Output R
This is a stereo-in, stereo-out reverb. It adds reverberation without impairing the position of the sound image that’s been set
for the stereo input, by panning or other means.
Reverb
Parameter (name) Setting Explanation

TYPE Type of reverb
ROOM1 Typical room reverb
ROOM2 Room reverb with a softer tone than ROOM1
HALL1 Typical hall reverb
HALL2 Room reverb with a softer tone than HALL1
PLATE Plate reverb
SIZE (Room size) 5–40 m Size of the room or hall
TIME (Reverb time) 0.1–32.0 s Length of the reverberation
PreDly (Pre-delay time) 0–200 ms Time until the reverb is heard
ER Lev (Early reflection level) -INF–0.0 dB Level of the early reflections
Diffus (Diffusion) 0–100 Amount of scattering for the early reflections
Density 0–100 Density of the reverb sound
LO FREQ DAMP GAIN -36.0–0.0 dB Low-frequency attenuation of the reverb sound
LO FREQ DAMP FREQ 20 Hz–2.00 kHz Frequency at which the low-frequency region of the reverb sound begins to be
attenuated
HI FREQ DAMP GAIN -36.0–0.0 dB High-frequency attenuation of the reverb sound
HI FREQ DAMP FREQ 200 Hz–20.00 kHz Frequency at which the high-frequency region of the reverb sound begins to be
attenuated
HI CUT FREQ 200 Hz–20.00 kHz Frequency at which the high-frequency region of the reverb sound will be cut
WET (Wet Level) -INF–+6.0 dB Level of the reverb sound
DRY (Dry Level) -INF–+6.0 dB Level of the original sound
BAL (Balance) L63-C-R63 L/R output level balance of the reverb
Appendix
224
Appendix
EQ

EQ SW (EQ switch) OFF, ON Turns the EQ on/off
EQ ATT (EQ attenuator) -42.0–+6.0 dB Attenuator for the EQ
LOW TYPE PEAK, LSV, HSV, LPF1, HPF1 Filter type for the Lo band (*1)
LPF2, HPF2, BPF, BEF, THRU
LO GAIN -15.0–+15.0 dB Gain of the Lo band (*1)
LO FREQ 20 Hz–20.00 kHz Center frequency of the Lo band (*1)
LO Q 0.36–16.00 Steepness of the frequency response curve at the Lo band center fre-
quency (*1)
LO-MID TYPE PEAK, LSV, HSV, LPF1, HPF1 Filter type for the Lo-Mid band (*1)
LO-MID GAIN -15.0–+15.0 dB Gain of the Lo-Mid band (*1)
LO-MID FREQ 20 Hz–20.00 kHz Center frequency of the Lo-Mid band (*1)
LO-MID Q 0.36–16.00 Steepness of the frequency response curve at the Lo-Mid band center
frequency (*1)
HI-MID TYPE PEAK, LSV, HSV, LPF1, HPF1 Filter type for the Hi-Mid band (*1)
HI-MID GAIN -15.0–+15.0 dB Gain of the Hi-Mid band (*1)
HI-MID FREQ 20 Hz–20.00 kHz Center frequency of the Hi-Mid band (*1)
HI-MID Q 0.36–16.00 Steepness of the frequency response curve at the Hi-Mid band center
frequency (*1)
HI TYPE PEAK, LSV, HSV, LPF1, HPF1 Filter type for the Hi band (*1)
HI GAIN -15.0–+15.0 dB Gain of the Hi band (*1)
HI FREQ 20 Hz–20.00 kHz Center frequency of the Hi band (*1)
HI Q 0.36–16.00 Steepness of the frequency response curve at the Hi band center fre-
quency (*1)
(*1) Depending on the Type setting of each band, there are certain combinations for which the Freq, Gain, and Q values will
have no effect, as listed below.
Type Operation Freq Gain Q

PEAK (Peaking) Creates a hill or valley in the region of FREQ. Valid Valid Valid
LSV (Low Shelving) Boosts/cuts the region below FREQ. Valid Valid -
HSV (High Shelving) Boosts/cuts the region above FREQ. Valid Valid -
LPF1 (Low-Pass Filter 1) Passes the frequency region below FREQ. Valid - -
HPF1 (High-Pass Filter 1) Passes the frequency region above FREQ. Valid - -
LPF2 (Low-Pass Filter 2) A sharper response curve than LPF1. Valid - Valid
HPF2 (High-Pass Filter 2) A sharper response curve than HPF1. Valid - Valid
BPF (Band Pass Filter) Passes the frequency region around FREQ. Valid - Valid
BEF (Band Eliminate Filter) Removes the frequency region around FREQ. Valid - Valid
THRU (Thru) Passes all frequency regions. - - -
Appendix
225
Appendix
Types of sound
fig.RevExp01.eps
early reflections
reverberation
direct sound
source
listener
The sound you normally hear is divided into three types: “direct sound,” “early reflections,” and
“reverberation.” The “direct sound” is the sound that reaches the listener directly from the source. “Early
reflections” are sounds that have reflected one to several times from the walls or other surfaces of the room.
“Reverberation” is sound that has reflected many times before reaching the listener.
How sound and time are related

fig.RevExp02.eps
level
direct sound
early reflections
reverberation
time
pre-delay reverb time
The reflected sounds reach the listener in the following order. The pre-delay is the time from when the direct
sound is heard until the reverb arrives. The reverb time is the duration until the reverb disappears.
Tonal character of reverb

The tonal character of reverb is affected by the material of the walls and other reflective surfaces. This is
because the reflectivity of the surfaces will affect the proportion of high and low frequencies that are reflected.
You can use the DFP (Damp Filter) to vary this property of the sound. The high-frequency range or low-
frequency range of the reverb will be attenuated as you decrease the value of the HI FREQ DAMP GAIN or
LO FREQ DAMP GAIN parameters, respectively.
Appendix
If you want to produce soft-sounding reverb, lower the HI FREQ DAMP FREQ. If you want to produce crisp-
sounding reverb, raise the LO FREQ DAMP FREQ.
226
Appendix
REVERB+GATE
fig.AlgoRevwGate.eps
Reverb 4 Band EQ Gate
Key-In
This is a mono-in, stereo-out reverb. It provides a gate that can be used for gating or ducking, allowing you to cut the reverb
during its decay, or to cut the reverb when the level of the original sound is high.
Reverb

SIZE (Room size) 5–40 m Size of the room or hall
TIME (Reverb time) 0.1–32.0 s Length of the reverberation
PreDly (Pre-delay time) 0–200 ms Time until the reverb is heard
ER Lev (Early reflection level) -INF–0.0 dB Level of the early reflections
Diffus (Diffusion) 0–100 Amount of scattering for the early reflections
Density 0–100 Density of the reverb sound
LO FREQ DAMP GAIN -36.0–0.0 dB Low-frequency attenuation of the reverb sound
LO FREQ DAMP FREQ 20 Hz–2.00 kHz Frequency at which the low-frequency region of the reverb sound begins to be
attenuated
HI FREQ DAMP GAIN -36.0–0.0 dB High-frequency attenuation of the reverb sound
HI FREQ DAMP FREQ 200 Hz–20.00 kHz Frequency at which the high-frequency region of the reverb sound begins to be
attenuated
HI CUT FREQ 200 Hz–20.00 kHz Frequency at which the high-frequency region of the reverb sound will be cut
WET (Wet Level) -INF–+6.0 dB Level of the reverb sound
Appendix
227
Appendix
EQ

LO Q 0.36–16.00 Steepness of the frequency response curve at the Lo band
center frequency (*1)
LO-MID TYPE PEAK, LSV, HSV, LPF1, HPF1, Filter type for the Lo-Mid band (*1)
LO-MID Q 0.36–16.00 Steepness of the frequency response curve at the Lo-Mid
band center frequency (*1)
HI-MID Q 0.36–16.00 Steepness of the frequency response curve at the Hi-Mid
HI Q 0.36–16.00 Steepness of the frequency response curve at the Hi band

GATE

GT SW (GATE switch) OFF, ON Turns the gate on/off
Appendix
GT MODE (Gate mode) GATE Sound lower than the THRESHOLD level will be attenuated by the amount
specified by RANGE
DUCK Sound that exceeds the THRESHOLD level will be attenuated by the amount
specified by RANGE
THRE (Threshold level) -80.0 dB–0.0 dB Threshold level of the gate
RANGE (Range) -INF–0.0 dB Range of the gate
ATK (Attack time) 0.0–800.0 ms Attack time of the gate
REL (Release time) 0–8000 ms Release time of the gate
HOLD (Hold time) 0–8000 ms Hold time for the gate
228
Appendix
Delay
DELAY x2
fig.AlgoDualDelay.eps
Input A DRY Output A
PRE DPF
Delay
DPF WET POSITION

FB
POST DPF
Input B DRY Output B
PRE DPF
Delay
DPF WET POSITION

FB
POST DPF
This is a dual-mono delay.
Delay A/B

DELAY UNIT msec, Meter, Feet, Specifies the units for delay
Frame (24, 25,
29.97, 30), Note
TIME 0.0–1350 ms Time between the original sound and when the delay is heard
FB (Feedback) 0–100 Amount of delayed sound returned to the input of the delay
LO FREQ DAMP GAIN -36.0–0.0 dB Low-frequency attenuation of the delay sound
LO FREQ DAMP FREQ 20Hz–2.00 kHz Frequency at which the low-frequency region of the delay sound begins to be at-
tenuated
HI FREQ DAMP GAIN -36.0–0.0 dB High-frequency attenuation of the delay sound
HI FREQ DAMP FREQ 200 Hz–20.00 kHz Frequency at which the high-frequency region of the delay sound begins to be
attenuated
WET POSITION PRE DAMP Takes the wet sound from before the damp filter
POST DAMP Takes the wet sound from after the damp filter
WET (Wet level) -INF–+6.0 dB Level of the delay sound
DRY (Dry level) -INF–+6.0 dB Level of the original sound
In a delay processor, “feedback” refers to returning the delayed sound back to the input of the delay. The
Appendix
feedback level specifies the amount of sound that is returned. Increasing this setting will increase the number
of delay repetitions.
229
Appendix
The wet position specifies how the delay’s wet signal is related to the position of the DPF (Damp Filter).
With the PRE DPF (Pre-damp filter) setting, the signal before passing through the damp filter is used as the
wet signal. In this case, the damp filter is applied only to the delay feedback.
With the POST DPF (Post damp filter) setting, the signal after passing through the damp filter is used as the
wet signal. In this case, the damp filter is applied to all of the delay sound.
As delay units, you can use msec, Meter, Feet, Frame (24, 25, 29.97, 30fps), or Note. The M-400’s delay is based
on msec units, and simply changing the delay unit parameter will not change the delay time in msec units.
This means that after changing the delay unit, there may be a discrepancy between the msec value and the
value that is displayed in the specified units. If this occurs, the value is shown in green. To correct this
discrepancy, please re-specify the delay time.
The relationship between Meter, Feet, Frame, and msec is shown below. (Rounded values are shown as the
calculated results.)
Meter
Delay [msec] = Delay [Meter] x 1000 / 343.59 [Meter/sec]
Feet
Delay [msec] = Delay [Feet] x 1000 / 1127.26 [Feet/sec]
Frame (24, 25, 29.97, 30fps)

Delay [msec] = Delay [Frame] x 1000 / FrameRate (24, 25, 29.97, 30) [Frame/sec]
If you specify Note as the delay unit, the delay time will be determined by the relation between Tempo and
Note. In some cases, the relation between Tempo and Note may mean that the result would exceed the
maximum allowable delay time. If this occurs, the value is shown in red.
The Note values are as follows.
Off, 1/64T, 1/64, 1/32T, 1/64D, 1/32, 1/16T, 1/32D, 1/16, 1/8T, 1/16D, 1/8, 1/4T, 1/8D, 1/4,
1/2T, 1/4D, 1/2, 1/1T, 1/2D, 1/1
* T signifies Triplet, and D signifies Dotted. For example, 1/4 means quarter note, 1/4T means quarter-note triplet, and 1/4D means dotted
quarter note.
Appendix
230
Appendix
LONG DELAY
fig.AlgoLongDelay.eps
Delay
FEEDBACK
LEVEL
DPF
R

This is a mono-in, stereo-out long delay.
Delay

Frame (24, 25,
29.97, 30), Note
L TIME 0.0–2700 ms Time from the original sound until the left-channel delay is heard
R TIME 0.0–2700 ms Time from the original sound until the right-channel delay is heard
FEEDBACK TIME 0.0–2700 ms Time until the delayed sound is returned to the input of the delay
(Feedback time)
FEEDBACK LEVEL 0–100 Amount of delayed sound returned to the input of the delay
(Feedback level)
LO FREQ DAMP FREQ 20 Hz–2.00 kHz Frequency at which the low-frequency region of the delay sound begins to be at-
tenuated
attenuated
WET (Wet Level) -INF–+6.0 dB Level of the delay sound
DRY (Dry Level) -INF–+6.0 dB Level of the original sound Appendix
231
Appendix
M.TAP DELAY (Multi Tap Delay)

fig.AlgoMTPDly.eps
Pan 1
Pan 2
Pan 12
Multi Tap Delay
DPF
FEEDBACK
LEVEL

This is a mono-in, stereo-out twelve-stage tap delay.
Delay

Frame (24, 25,
29.97, 30), Note
DELAY 1–12 TIME 0.0–2700 ms Time from the original sound until the delay is heard
DELAY 1–12 LEVEL -INF–+6.0 dB Level of the delay sound
DELAY 1–12 PAN L63-C-R63 Panning of the delay sound
FEEDBACK TIME 0.0–2700 ms Time until the delayed sound is returned to the input of the delay
(Feedback time)
FEEDBACK LEVEL 0–100 Amount of delayed sound returned to the input of the delay
(Feedback level)
LO FREQ DAMP FREQ 20 Hz–2.00 kHz Frequency at which the low-frequency region of the delay sound begins to be at-
tenuated
attenuated
Appendix
232
Appendix
X.MOD DELAY (Cross-modulation Delay)

fig.AlgoXModDelay.eps

FB
PRE DPF WET
POSITION
Delay L DPF
POST DPF
XFB Modulation
WET
POST DPF POSITION
Delay R DPF
PRE DPF
FB

This is a stereo-in, stereo-out cross-modulation delay.
Delay

Frame (24, 25, 29.97,
30), Note
MODULATION WAVE SIN, SQR, EXP+, EXP- Waveform used for modulation
MODULATION RATE 0.1–10.0 Hz
MODULATION DEPTH 0–100 Depth of modulation
MODULATION PHASE -180–180 deg Phase difference between modulation L and R
L TIME 0.0–1000 ms Time from the original sound until the left-channel delay is heard
R TIME 0.0–1000 ms Time from the original sound until the right-channel delay is heard
FB (Feedback) -100–100 Amount of delayed sound returned to the input of the delay
XFB (Cross feedback) -100–100 Amount of delayed sound returned to the input of the delay of the opposite
side
LO FREQ DAMP FREQ 20 Hz–2.00 kHz Frequency at which the low-frequency region of the delay sound begins to
be attenuated
HI FREQ DAMP FREQ 200 Hz–20.00 kHz Frequency at which the high-frequency region of the delay sound begins to
be attenuated
Appendix
Cross feedback will feed back the effect sound to the opposite input (left or right).
233
Appendix
Modulation
St.CHORUS (Stereo Chorus)
fig.AlgoStCho.eps
DIR SW
Input L Output L
EFF SW
Chorus L
XMIX
Chorus R
EFF SW
Input R DIR SW Output R

This is a stereo-in, stereo-out chorus. It lets you apply chorus without impairing the position of the sound image that’s been
set for the stereo input, by panning or other means.
Chorus

RATE 0.1–10.0 Hz Chorus rate
DEPTH 0–100 Chorus depth
PreDly (Pre-delay) 0–100 ms Time until the chorus sound is output
XMIX (Cross mix) -100–100 Mix amount for the opposite-side chorus
LEVEL 0–100 Chorus level
DIR SW (Direct switch) OFF, ON Turns the unprocessed sound on/off
EFF SW (Effect switch) OFF, ON Turns the effect sound on/off
Appendix
234
Appendix
St.FLANGER (Stereo Flanger)

fig.AlgoStFlang.eps
DIR SW
Input L Output L
FB EFF SW
Flanger L
XFB
Flanger R
EFF SW
FB

This is a stereo-in, stereo-out flanger. It lets you apply flanging without impairing the position of the sound image that’s
been set for the stereo input, by panning or other means.
Flanger

RATE 0.01–10.0 Hz Flanger rate
DEPTH 0–100 Flanger depth
Manual 0–100 Center frequency at which the flanger effect is applied
LFO PHASE -180–180 deg Phase difference between L and R for the LFO (Low-Frequency Oscillator)
FB (Feedback) -100–100 Amount of flanger sound that is returned to the input of the flanger
XFB (Cross feedback) -100–100 Amount of flanger sound that is returned to the opposite-side input of the flanger
LEVEL 0–100 Flanger level
Feedback means returning the effect sound back into the input. The feedback level specifies the amount of
sound that is returned. Cross-feedback is when the effect sound is returned back to the opposite-side (left or
right) input. The cross-feedback level specifies the amount of sound that is returned. In modulation-type
effects, raising the feedback value will make the sound richer and more spacious. Negative values will invert
the phase.
Appendix
235
Appendix
St.PHASER (Stereo Phaser)

fig.AlgoStPhase.eps
DIR SW
Input L Output L
FB
EFF SW
Phaser L
XFB
Phaser R
EFF SW
FB

This is a stereo-in, stereo-out phaser. It lets you apply a phaser effect without impairing the position of the sound image
that’s been set for the stereo input, by panning or other means.
Phaser

RATE 0.01–10.0 Hz Phaser rate
DEPTH 0–100 Phaser depth
Manual 0–100 Center frequency at which the phaser effect is applied
LFO PHASE -180–180 deg Phase difference between L and R for the LFO (Low-Frequency Oscillator)
FB (Feedback) -100–100 Amount of phaser sound that is returned to the input of the phaser
XFB (Cross feedback) -100–100 Amount of phaser sound that is returned to the opposite-side input of the phaser
LEVEL 0–100 Phaser level
MODE 4STAGE, 8STAGE Type of phaser
Appendix
236
Appendix
Pitch shift
P.SHIFTER x2 (Pitch Shifter x2)
fig.AlgoDualPS.eps
Pitch Shifter
Pitch Shifter
This is a dual-mono pitch shifter.
Pitch Shift A/B

MODE MONO VOICE This mode is suitable for a monophonic voice
MONO INST This mode is suitable for a monophonic instrument
POLY FAST, POLY MID, POLY These modes are suitable for polyphonic instruments (*2)
SLOW
COARSE -12–12 Amount of pitch shift (in semitone steps)
FINE -100–100 Amount of pitch shift (in one-cent steps)
WET (Wet level) -INF–+6.0 dB Level of the pitch-shifted sound
(*2) The difference between Poly Fast, Poly Mid, and Poly Slow is in the length of time (delay) it takes before the pitch-shifted
sound is produced. Poly Fast offers a shorter time until the pitch-shifted sound is heard, but the pitch-shifted sound will be
less stable. Poly Slow takes a longer time until the pitch-shifted sound is heard, but the pitch-shifted sound will be more
stable. Poly Mid has a response time for the pitch-shifted sound that is between Poly Fast and Poly Slow.
Use the Coarse setting to specify the approximate pitch, and make fine adjustments using Fine.
Appendix
237
Appendix
Channel strip
CH STRIP x2 (Channel Strip x2)
fig.AlgoDualChStrip.eps
Input A
Gate Compressor Enhancer/ 4 Band EQ Delay
De-esser
Input B
Gate Compressor Enhancer/ 4 Band EQ Delay
De-esser
This is a dual-mono channel strip. It provides gate, compressor, enhancer/de-esser, EQ, and delay.
GATE A/B

GATE SW (Gate switch) OFF, ON Turns the gate on/off
MODE EXPANDER, GATE, DUCKING Mode
THRE (Threshold level) -80.0–0.0 dB Threshold level
RATIO 1.00:1–INF:1 Expander ratio
KNEE HARD, SOFT1–SOFT9 Expander knee
RANGE -INF–0.0 dB Range of GATE or DUCKING
ATK (Attack time) 0.0–800.0 ms Attack time
REL (Release time) 0–8000 ms Release time
HOLD (Hold time) 0–8000 ms GATE or DUCKING hold time
COMPRESSOR A/B

COMP SW (GATE switch) OFF, ON Turns the compressor on/off
THRE (Threshold level) -40.0–0.0 dB Threshold level of the compressor
RATIO 1.00:1–INF:1 Compression ratio
KNEE HARD, SOFT1–SOFT9 Compressor knee
ATK (Attack time) 0.0–800.0 ms Compressor attack time
REL (Release time) 0–8000 ms Compressor release time
GAIN -40.0–+40.0 dB Compressor gain
AUTO GAIN OFF, ON Turns compressor auto gain on/off
ENHANCER/DE-ESSER A/B

ENHANCER/DE-ESSER SW OFF, ON Turns the enhancer/de-esser on/off
(Enhancer/De-esser switch)
MODE ENHANCER, DE-ESSER Selects the mode (*3)
Appendix
SENS (Enhancer sensitivity) 0–100 Enhancer sensitivity

FREQ (Frequency) 200 Hz–20.00 kHz Frequency above which is handled as the high-frequency region
MIX (Enhancer mix) 0.0–12.0 dB Enhancer mix level
THRE (De-esser threshold) -36.0–0.0 dB Threshold level for the de-esser
238
Appendix
(3) The mode of operation depending on the ENHANCER/DE-ESSER select setting, and the parameters that will be invalid,
are described below.
Select Operation
ENHANCER Enhances the harmonic content of the sound, giving the sound greater clarity. If the high-frequency region is
weak, it will be strengthened. The DE-ESSER threshold setting is not used.
DE-ESSER Restrains the sibilants, softening the sound. If the high-frequency region is excessive, it will be moderated. The
ENHANCER sensitivity and ENHANCER mix level are not used.
EQ A/B

LO Q 0.36–16.00 Steepness of the frequency response curve at the Lo band
LO-MID TYPE PEAK, LSV, HSV, LPF1, HPF1 Filter type for the Lo-Mid band (*1)
LO-MID Q 0.36–16.00 Steepness of the frequency response curve at the Lo-Mid
HI-MID Q 0.36–16.00 Steepness of the frequency response curve at the Hi-Mid
HI Q 0.36–16.00 Steepness of the frequency response curve at the Hi band

Appendix
239
Appendix
Delay A/B

DELAY UNIT msec, Meter, Feet, Frame (24, 25, 29.97, 30), Specifies the units for delay
Note
DELAY SW (Delay switch) OFF, ON Turns the delay on/off
TIME 0.0–1350 ms Time from the original sound until when the
delay is heard
FB (Feedback) 0–100 Amount of delayed sound returned to the
input of the delay
LO FREQ DAMP GAIN -36.0–0.0 dB Low-frequency attenuation of the delay
sound
LO FREQ DAMP FREQ 20 Hz–2.00 kHz Frequency at which the low-frequency re-
gion of the delay sound begins to be attenu-
ated
HI FREQ DAMP GAIN -36.0–0.0 dB High-frequency attenuation of the delay
sound
HI FREQ DAMP FREQ 200 Hz–20.00 kHz Frequency at which the high-frequency re-
gion of the delay sound begins to be attenu-
ated
WET POSITION PRE DAMP Takes the wet sound from before the damp
filter
POST DAMP Takes the wet sound from after the damp fil-
ter
Appendix
240
Appendix
GEQ
Dual GEQ
fig.AlgoDualGEQ.eps

31 Band GEQ
PRE DPF
Delay
DPF WET POSITION

FB
POST DPF

31 Band GEQ
PRE DPF
Delay
DPF WET POSITION

FB
POST DPF
This is a dual-mono 31-band GEQ. A delay is provided after the GEQ.
GEQ A/B

ATT (Attenuator) -42.0–+15.0 dB Attenuator for the GEQ
20 Hz Gain–20 kHz Gain -15.0–+15.0 dB Gain of each band
Delay A/B

Frame (24, 25, 29.97,
30), Note
DELAY SW (Delay switch) OFF, ON Turns the delay on/off
TIME 0–1350 ms Time from the original sound until when the delay is heard
FB (Feedback) 0–100 Amount of delayed sound returned to the input of the delay
LFD GAIN (LF damp gain) -36.0–0.0 dB Low-frequency attenuation of the delay sound
LFD FREQ (LF damp frequency) 20 Hz–2.00 kHz Frequency at which the low-frequency region of the delay sound begins to
be attenuated
Appendix
HFD GAIN (HF damp gain) -36.0–0.0 dB High-frequency attenuation of the delay sound
HFD FREQ (HF damp frequency) 200 Hz–20.00 kHz Frequency at which the high-frequency region of the delay sound begins to
be attenuated
241
Index
Symbols C
+48V button ............................................................ 58, 121 C meter .......................................................................... 121
CATEGORY list ............................................................. 63
Numerics Caution message ............................................................ 53
100–20k ON FADER ................................................... 134 CH COPY popup ........................................................... 65
20–4k ON FADER ....................................................... 134 CH DISP button ............................................................. 34
31-band GEQ ................................................................ 132 CH LIBRARY popup .................................................... 66
4 BAND EQ .............................................................. 54, 69 CH meter point ............................................................ 120
CH METERING POINT selection buttons ............... 122
A CH meters ..................................................................... 120
AC INPUT connector .................................................... 43 CH SOLO AFL ............................................................. 155
ADD ON ....................................................................... 155 CH STRIP x2 (Channel Strip x2) ............................... 238
ADMIN ......................................................................... 170 CH1-24 button ................................................................ 33
ADMIN button ............................................................ 176 CH25-48 button .............................................................. 33
ALL LIBRARY ............................................................. 198 CHANGE PASSWORD popup ................................. 175
ALL/CLR buttons ......................................................... 49 CHANNEL DISPLAY screen ........................... 58, 73, 88
APPLY button .............................................................. 159 CHANNEL EDIT section ............................................. 34
ATT (Attenuator) ............................................... 54, 69, 85 Channel indication ........................................................ 47
ATT knob ............................................................ 59, 74, 88 Channel library ............................................................ 220
ATTACK knob ......................................... 94–95, 100, 104 Channel meter .................................................... 61, 77, 90
Attenuator .............................................. 59, 70, 74, 87–88 Channel name .......................................................... 63, 79
AUTO GAIN ................................................................ 100 CHANNEL SELECT operation select buttons ........ 178
AUX LINK switch ....................................................... 112 Channel Strip x2 .......................................................... 238
AUX name ................................................................ 61, 76 Check buttons ................................................................ 49
AUX number ............................................................ 61, 76 Color label ................................................................ 63, 79
AUX pan slider ................................................ 61, 76, 112 Command function buttons ......................................... 49
AUX send ................................................... 54, 61, 76, 111 COMP area ..................................................................... 35
AUX SEND (MAIN L/R only) .................................... 69 COMP button ................................................................. 59
AUX sends 1–16 ....................................................... 61, 76 COMP library ............................................................... 221
AUX sends 1–8 ............................................................. 112 COMP LIBRARY popup ............................................ 103
AUX sends 9–16 ........................................................... 112 COMP REMAIN .......................................................... 102
AUX SENDS area .......................................................... 36 COMPRESSOR .................................................. 54, 59, 99
AUX SENDS popup .................................................... 112 Compressor graph ......................................................... 99
AUX/DCA layer button ............................................... 33 COMPRESSOR OVERVIEW popup ......................... 102
AUX/DCA LAYER select buttons ............................ 178 COMPRESSOR popup .................................................. 99
AUX/MAIN COPY popup .......................................... 81 CONFIRM field ........................................................... 175
AUX/MAIN library .................................................... 220 Confirmation message .................................................. 53
AUX/MAIN LIBRARY popup .................................... 82 CONFIRMATION select buttons .............................. 178
AUX/MAIN/MATRIX meter point ......................... 120 CONSOLE INPUT jacks ............................................... 41
AUX/MAIN/MATRIX METERING POINT selection Console Lock ................................................................ 207
buttons .......................................................................... 122 CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks ........................................... 41
AUX/MAIN/MATRIX meters ................................. 120 Control change ............................................................. 189
Cooling vent ................................................................... 43
B
Cross-modulation Delay ............................................ 233
BACKUP (S-4000S) ...................................................... 187
Cursor ............................................................................. 49
Backup Connection ..................................................... 182
Cursor buttons ............................................................... 37
Backup connections with the S-4000S ...................... 185
Balance .......................................................... 69, 77, 85, 89 D
BAND PASS ................................................................. 107 Date and time ............................................................... 202
BATTERY slot ................................................................ 43 DATE&TIME popup ................................................... 202
BRIGHTNESS field ..................................................... 195 Date/time indication .................................................... 47
Broadcast console setup ............................................. 184 DCA button .................................................................... 38
Button .............................................................................. 49 DCA GROUP ASSIGN popup ................................... 142
BUTTON 1-8 tab .......................................................... 177 DCA GROUP screen ................................................... 141
BUTTON 9-16 tab ........................................................ 177 DCA groups ..................................................... 67, 83, 141
BYPASS button ............................................................ 132 delay unit ...................................................................... 230
BYPASS L, R buttons .................................................. 125 DELAY x2 ..................................................................... 229
Dev ID knob ......................................................... 191–193
242
Index
DIGITAL OUT jacks ..................................................... 42 FX DESTINATION SELECT popup ......................... 127

DIRECT OUT POINT ................................................... 54 FX DESTINATION SELECT popup buttons ........... 125
Display ............................................................................ 36 FX EDIT popup ............................................................ 129
DISPLAY knob ............................................................ 197 FX INS ................................................................. 60, 74, 88
Display select tabs ......................................................... 49 FX INSERT (Effect insert) ................................. 54, 69, 85
DUAL GEQ .......................................................... 130, 241 FX INSERT/SOURCE SELECT popup .................... 126
Dual mono .................................................................... 125 FX INSERT/SOURCE SELECT popup button ........ 125
DUCKING ...................................................................... 94 FX library ...................................................................... 219
FX LIBRARY popup .................................................... 130
E
E symbol ....................................................................... 157 G
EFFECT ................................................................. 124, 130 G meter ......................................................................... 121
EFFECTS button ............................................................ 36 GAIN knob ........................................... 34, 58, 60, 75, 100
EFFECTS screen ........................................................... 123 GATE ............................................................................... 94
ENABLE button ........................................................... 138 GATE area ...................................................................... 35
ENTER button ................................................................ 37 GATE button .................................................................. 59
ENTER PASSWORD popup ...................................... 171 GATE REMAIN ............................................................. 97
EQ ATT knob ............................................................... 108 GATE/EXP library ...................................................... 221
EQ button ................................................................. 60, 75 GATE/EXP LIBRARY popup ...................................... 98
EQ library ..................................................................... 222 GATE/EXPANDER .......................................... 54, 59, 93
EQ LIBRARY popup ................................................... 109 Gate/expander graph ................................................... 94
EQUALIZER area .......................................................... 35 GATE/EXPANDER OVERVIEW popup .................. 97
EQUALIZER popup ................................................... 107 GATE/EXPANDER popup ......................................... 94
Error message ................................................................ 53 GEQ 1–4 tab .................................................................. 132
Ethernet switching hub .............................................. 181 GEQ EDIT popup ........................................................ 134
EXIT button .................................................................... 37 GEQ INS ................................................................... 74, 88
EXPANDER ................................................................... 94 GEQ INSERT ............................................................ 69, 85
EXT FX ................................................................ 60, 74, 88 GEQ INSERT SELECT popup ................................... 133
EXT FX 1–4 tab ............................................................. 138 GEQ INSERT SELECT popup button ....................... 132
EXT FX 5–8 tab ............................................................. 138 GEQ library .................................................................. 220
EXT FX INSERT SELECT popup .............................. 139 GEQ LIBRARY popup ................................................ 135
EXT FX INSERT SELECT popup button .................. 138 Global Scope ......................................................... 157, 163
EXT INSERT (External insert) ......................... 54, 69, 85 GLOBAL SCOPE popup ............................................ 163
External effects ............................................................. 137 GR meter ................................. 59, 74, 94, 97, 99, 102, 104
Grounding terminal ...................................................... 43
F Group .................................................................. 61, 77, 89
Fader ....................... 33–34, 50, 54, 61, 69, 77, 85, 90, 121 GROUP ASSIGN popup ......................................... 67, 83
Fader module section ................................................... 33 GROUP section .............................................................. 38
FADER TOUCH SENSE field .................................... 195 GUEST ........................................................................... 170
Fader Version ............................................................... 196
FADER, MUTE Change .............................................. 191 H
Ferrite core ............................................................... 13, 15 HELP button .................................................................. 37
FILT button ............................................................ 59, 159 HELP CONTENTS popup ......................................... 208
FILTER .............................................................. 54, 59, 107 Help function ............................................................... 208
FILTER area .................................................................... 35 HELP popup ................................................................ 208
Firmware Version ........................................................ 188 Help shortcuts .............................................................. 208
FOH ............................................................................... 187 HI PASS ........................................................................ 107
FOH console setup ...................................................... 183 HISTORY ........................................................................ 63
Format ........................................................................... 203 HOLD knob .............................................................. 94–95
Four-band EQ ...................................... 54, 60, 69, 75, 107 HOLD TIME knob ....................................................... 122
Four-band EQ graph ............................... 60, 75, 108, 121 Home screen ................................................................... 46
Free Size ........................................................................ 203 HOME SCREEN select buttons ................................. 178
FREQ knob ................................................. 59–60, 75, 108
FT ATT knob ................................................................ 108 I
Function button ............................................................. 49 INITIALIZE popup ..................................................... 198
Function button section ................................................ 36 INPUT PATCH LIBRARY popup ............................. 117
FUNCTION list ............................................................ 180 INPUT PATCHBAY .............................................. 54, 116
FX 1–4 tab ..................................................................... 125 Input patchbay library ................................................ 223
243
Index
Input/output units ....................................................... 13 Metering ........................................................................ 120

Insert indication ................................................. 60, 74, 88 MIC LEVEL knob .......................................................... 39
INTERNAL SAMPLING FREQ select buttons ....... 196 MIDI connectors ............................................................ 42
MIDI OUT/THRU select buttons ............................. 191
K MIDI/RS-232C selection indication .................. 191, 194
KEY-IN meter .......................................................... 94, 99 MIN Lev knob .............................................................. 193
KEY-IN SELECT popup ....................................... 96, 101 MIXER CONFIG field ................................................. 195
KEY-IN SELECT popup button .......................... 94, 100 MIXER PARAMETER ................................................. 198
KNEE knob ..................................................... 95, 100, 104 MMC ..................................................................... 189, 191
Knob ................................................................................ 50 MODE select buttons .................................................. 130
Monitor ......................................................................... 154
L Monitor console setup ................................................ 184
L meter .......................................................................... 121 MONITOR screen ........................................................ 155
LAMP connector ............................................................ 42 MONITOR section ......................................................... 39
LAMP knob .................................................................. 197 MONITOR/BROADCAST A .................................... 187
LAST .............................................................................. 155 Mono-in/Stereo-out .................................................... 125
Layer section .................................................................. 33 MTX send (MATRIX send) .......................................... 75
LAYER VIEW tab ........................................................ 121 Multi Tap Delay ........................................................... 232
LEVEL knob ............................................................. 39, 76 MUTE .................................................................. 54, 69, 85
Library ............................................................................ 51 MUTE button ..................................................... 33–34, 38
LIBRARY popup ........................................................... 51 MUTE GROUP ASSIGN popup ................................ 146
LIM button ..................................................................... 74 MUTE GROUP screen ................................................ 145
LIMITER ........................................................... 69, 74, 104 MUTE groups .................................................. 67, 83, 145
Limiter graph ............................................................... 104
LIMITER library .......................................................... 221 N
LIMITER LIBRARY popup ........................................ 105 NAME EDIT popup .......................... 50, 63, 79, 143, 147
LIMITER popup .......................................................... 104 NAME list ....................................................................... 63
LINK ...................................................... 112–113, 125, 132 NEXT button .......................................................... 38, 158
List ................................................................................... 50 NOTCH ......................................................................... 107
Lithium battery ...................................................... 18, 196
LO PASS ....................................................................... 107 O
LOAD SECTION select buttons ................................ 199 OL (Overload) indicator ............... 58–60, 74–75, 88, 107
LOAD/SAVE popup .................................................. 199 ON/OFF buttons ........................................................... 49
Lock ............................................................................... 157 ON/OFF function buttons ........................................... 49
LOCK symbol .............................................................. 157 OSC tab ......................................................................... 152
LONG DELAY ............................................................. 231 Oscillator ....................................................................... 150
LR LINK button ........................................................... 125 OTHER tab ................................................................... 178
OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY popup ......................... 119
M Output patchbay .......................................................... 118
M button (MUTE button) ......................... 61, 77, 90, 121 Output patchbay library ............................................. 223
M.TAP DELAY (Multi Tap Delay) ........................... 232 OVER Lev knob ........................................................... 122
MAIN button ................................................................. 61
Main display area .......................................................... 48 P
Main fader module ....................................................... 34 P.SHIFTER x2 (Pitch Shifter x2) ................................ 237
MAIN L/R setting ....................................................... 196 PAD button ............................................................ 58, 121
MAIN level indication .................................................. 48 PAN ........................................................................... 54, 61
MAIN SEND (AUX1–AUX16 only) ............................ 69 PAN area ........................................................................ 36
MAIN Send point .......................................................... 76 PAN knob ....................................................................... 76
MAIN SW (Main switch) ............................................. 54 PAN LINK button ....................................................... 112
MATRIX LINK switch ................................................ 113 Pan/balance knob ....................................................... 121
MATRIX send ........................................................ 69, 113 PANEL knob ................................................................ 197
MAX Lev knob ............................................................ 193 Panel Version ............................................................... 196
Message .......................................................................... 53 PARAMETER 1 and 2 lists ......................................... 180
Meter ............................................................... 33, 120–121 Password ...................................................................... 170
METER button ............................................................... 37 PASSWORD entry field .............................................. 175
METER screen .............................................................. 120 Patchbay ........................................................................ 115
METER SETUP popup ................................................ 122 PATCHBAY button ....................................................... 38
METER tab ................................................................... 120 PATCHBAY screen ..................................................... 115
244
Index
PEAK HOLD button ................................................... 122 ReturnLev knob ........................................................... 138

PHASE ............................................................................ 54 REVERB+GATE ........................................................... 227
Phase button ........................................................... 58, 121 RS-232C ......................................................................... 190
PHONES jack ................................................................. 44 RS-232C connector ........................................................ 42
PHONES LEVEL knob ................................................. 44 RS-232C/MIDI select switch ....................................... 42
Pitch Shifter x2 ............................................................. 237
Playback mode ............................................................. 166 S
Popup access buttons .................................................... 49 S button (SOLO button) ............................ 61, 77, 90, 121
Popup indication ........................................................... 48 S-0816 FOH unit ............................................................ 13
POST FD ............................................................... 112–113 S-1608 stage unit ............................................................ 13
Power .............................................................................. 17 S-4000S 40-channel I/O modular rack ....................... 13
Power cord ..................................................................... 13 S-4000-SP ...................................................................... 181
Power cord clamp ................................................... 16, 43 SCENE Change ............................................................ 191
Power cord hook ..................................................... 16, 43 Scene indication ............................................................. 47
POWER switch .............................................................. 43 SCENE LIST EDIT popup .......................................... 161
PRE EQ .................................................................. 112–113 SCENE MEMORY ............................................... 157, 198
PRE FD .................................................................. 112–113 SCENE MEMORY section ............................................ 38
Preamp ............................................................................ 58 SCENE screen .............................................................. 159
PREAMP area ................................................................ 34 Screen controller section ............................................... 37
Preamp gain knob ....................................................... 121 Screen name ................................................................... 47
PREV button .......................................................... 38, 158 SEL button ................................................................ 33–34
Program change ........................................................... 189 Select buttons ................................................................. 49
Send level bar ................................................... 61, 76, 112
Q SEND select buttons ............................................ 191–192
Q knob ............................................................... 60, 75, 108 SENDS ON FADER ....................................................... 57
SENDS ON FADER button .......................................... 36
R SENSE knob ................................................................. 197
Radio buttons ................................................................. 49 SETUP section ................................................................ 38
RANGE knob ........................................................... 94–95 SHIFT button .................................................................. 37
RATIO knob ........................................................... 95, 100 SLAVE TO MIDI CLOCK select button ................... 131
REAC ............................................................................... 12 Snd Lev knob ............................................................... 138
REAC A port ................................................................ 181 Solo ................................................................................ 154
REAC A, B ports ............................................................ 41 SOLO button ............................................................ 33–34
REAC caps ...................................................................... 15 SOLO CLEAR button .................................................... 39
REAC CONFIG popup ............................................... 186 SOLO Lev knob ........................................................... 155
REAC Connector covers ............................................... 13 SOLO MODE select buttons ...................................... 155
REAC connector covers ................................................ 15 SOURCE field 1–8 ....................................................... 193
REAC mode ................................................................... 22 SPLIT/BACKUP port ........................................... 41, 181
REAC ports .................................................................... 41 St.CHORUS (Stereo Chorus) ..................................... 234
REAC splitting ............................................................. 181 St.FLANGER (Stereo Flanger) ................................... 235
REAC Version .............................................................. 188 St.PHASER (Stereo Phaser) ........................................ 236
Rear panel ....................................................................... 40 St.REVERB (Stereo Reverb) ........................................ 224
Rec Lev knob ................................................................ 166 STATUS EDIT field ..................................................... 159
RECALL button ..................................................... 38, 158 Stereo Chorus ............................................................... 234
Recall Filter ........................................................... 157, 160 Stereo Flanger .............................................................. 235
RECEIVE select buttons ............................. 191–192, 194 STEREO IN jacks ........................................................... 43
RECORDER DESTINATION SELECT popup ........ 168 Stereo Phaser ................................................................ 236
RECORDER DESTINATION SELECT popup buttons . Stereo Reverb ............................................................... 224
167 Stereo-in/Stereo-out ................................................... 125
Recorder display ......................................................... 166 Stereo-linking ..................................................... 62, 78, 90
RECORDER screen ..................................................... 166 STORE button ........................................................ 38, 158
RECORDER SOURCE SELECT popup .................... 167 Sub-display area ............................................................ 48
RECORDER SOURCE SELECT popup buttons ..... 166 Sys Ex ............................................................................ 191
Recording to a PC ........................................................ 186 SYSTEM button ............................................................. 38
Redundant REAC connections .................................. 182 System exclusive .......................................................... 189
RELEASE knob ........................................ 94–95, 100, 105 SYSTEM screen ............................................................ 195
REMAIN ....................................................................... 166 SYSTEM SETTING ...................................................... 198
REMOTE popup .......................................................... 190 System Version ............................................................ 196
245
Index
T WAV files ...................................................................... 165

Talkback ........................................................................ 150
TALKBACK button ....................................................... 39 X
TALKBACK MIC IN jack ............................................. 42 X.Mod DELAY (Cross-modulation Delay) .............. 233
TALKBACK tab ........................................................... 151
TALKBACK/OSC (talkback/oscillator) section ...... 39
TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR screen ......................... 150
TAP ................................................................................ 131
TEMPLATE .................................................................... 63
TEMPO knob ............................................................... 131
TEMPO popup ............................................................. 131
Theft prevention lock .................................................... 43
THRE (Threshold) knob ......................................... 59, 74
THRESH knob ......................................... 94–95, 100, 104
THRESHOLD encoder ................................................. 35
TO MAIN ....................................................................... 76
Top display area ............................................................ 47
Top panel ........................................................................ 32
TOUCH SELECT button .............................................. 34
TYPE select buttons ...................................................... 94
U
USB connector ................................................................ 42
USB memory .................................................................. 19
USB MEMORY connector ............................................ 39
USB memory cover ....................................................... 19
USB MEMORY popup ................................................ 203
USB memory recorder ................................................ 165
USB MEMORY RECORDER section .......................... 37
USER ............................................................................. 170
USER 1–8 buttons .......................................................... 38
User button ........................................................... 170, 209
USER BUTTON ASSIGN popup ............................... 180
User fader ..................................................................... 170
USER FADER ASSIGN popup .................................. 179
USER FADER tab ........................................................ 177
USER layer button ......................................................... 33
User level ...................................................................... 170
USER LEVEL popup ................................................... 176
User name ..................................................................... 170
USER PREFERENCE popup ...................................... 177
User preferences .......................................................... 170
USER screen ................................................................. 171
USER section .................................................................. 38
User setting indication .................................................. 47
User settings ................................................................. 170
V
Value dial ....................................................................... 37
V-LINK ......................................................................... 190
V-LINK button ............................................................. 193
V-LINK SOURCE CHANNEL SELECT popup ...... 193
V-LINK SOURCE CHANNEL SELECT popup button
193
Volume Size ................................................................. 203
W
Wait message ................................................................. 53
246
MEMO
MEMO
MEMO
For EU Countries
For China
Block Diagram
MAIN AUX SOLO
LR 1 2 16 L R
REAC A INPUT
Total 32 channel
TO REAC A OUT Total 32 channel REAC B INPUT
S-1608 INPUT 16 INPUTS

OUTPUT
INPUT1-16 MAIN L, R PATCHBAY
PHANTOM GAIN
PEAK
+48V
SIG POST ATT PRE EQ PRE FADER POST FADER OUTPUT LEVEL
INPUT
A/D PATCHBAY
To another MONITOR/
EXT FX FX M-400 BROADCAST
REAC A FADER BAL
S-0816 8 INPUTS INPUT CH 1-48 4BAND INSERT MAIN S-4000S OUTPUT
INPUT1-8 1 ATT OUT L MAX 40 OUTPUTS
PREAMP POST ATT GATE IN GATE OUT COMP OUT PRE EQ PRE FADER POST FADER EQ LIMITER
PHANTOM GAIN
PEAK SO-DA4
GR GR AUX SEND 1-16
+48V
SIG
32
D/A
A/D EXT FX FX MAIN PRE EQ SW SEND AUX
INSERT INSERT MUTE FADER PAN SW LINK SPLIT/
PRE FADER 1
33 GATE/ 4BAND SO-AES4
PHASE ATT FILTER COMP POST FADER TO AUX 1, 3...7 BACKUP
S-4000S MAX 40 INPUTS EXP EQ PAN OUT AES/EBU
8
SI-AD4 40 SRC
PHANTOM GAIN
TO TO PRE EQ SW SEND 9
+48V GATE COMP PRE FADER MONO
KEY-IN KEY-IN OUT
AUX SEND 1-16 POST FADER TO AUX 2, 4...8
A/D REAC B
INPUT GATE COMP -6dB REAC A
KEY-IN KEY-IN PRE EQ SW SEND AUX OUT 8 OUTPUTS
1 LINK MATRIX SEND 1-8 MIX S-1608 OUTPUT
SI-AES4 PRE FADER TO AUX
1, 3...15 PRE EQ MTX OUTPUT 1-8
SW SEND LINK
AES/EBU 32 POST FADER PRE FADER
PAN TO MTX 1, 3...7
40
SRC POST FADER PAN D/A
Up to 24 GATE / EXP units are available.
SW SEND SW SEND
Up to 24 COMP units are available. PRE EQ
33 TO AUX TO MTX 2, 4...8
PRE FADER
2, 4...16
POST FADER
SOLO
MAIN S-0816 OUTPUT 16 OUTPUTS
From another FOH 40 Channel split out 40 OUT R
M-400 (For REAC A only) TO SOLO OUTPUT 1-16
TO MONITOR SELECT
TO REC SELECT D/A
AFL SW SOLO
PHANTOM GAIN PFL(L)
+48V AFL(L)
S-4000S OUTPUT
PFL(R) AUX 1-16 MAX 40 OUTPUTS
CONSOLE INPUT 1-8 A/D AFL(R) SO-DA4
POST ATT PRE EQ PRE FADER POST FADER OUTPUT LEVEL D/A
GAIN
PRE EQ DIRECT OUT
POINT SO-AES4
PRE FADER TO MAIRIX 1-8,
POST FADER TO OUTPUT PATCHBAY EXT FX FX FADER BAL AES/EBU
STEREO INPUT L, R A/D INSERT AUX 1-16 SRC
ATT 4BAND
EQ OUT
LIMITER
MAIN SEND
OSC
FX 1 OUT L / R OSCILLATOR LEVEL MAIN L, R, AUX 1-16, PRE EQ SW SEND PAN REAC B
FX 2 OUT L / R OSC OSC MATRIX 1-8 SW 1 OUT
PRE FADER 8 OUTPUTS
LEVEL ON SW TO MAIN L, R S-1608 OUTPUT
FX 3 OUT L / R PINK NOISE POST FADER
OUTPUT 1-8
FX 4 OUT L / R WHITE NOISE 40
SINE WAVE TO MAIRIX 1-8
PLAY L / R D/A
TO OUTPUT PATCHBAY MATRIX SEND 1-8
PRE EQ MTX
SW SEND LINK
PRE FADER
TO EXTARNAL FX TALKBACK TO MTX 1, 3...7
TALKBACK LEVEL MAIN L, R, AUX 1-16,
POST FADER PAN S-0816 OUTPUT 16 OUTPUTS
PHANTOM GAIN
TALKBACK TALKBACK MATRIX 1-8 SW SW SEND OUTPUT 1-16
+48V
LEVEL ON SW TO MTX 2, 4...8
D/A
TALKBACK MIC A/D
TO MAIRIX 1-8 SOLO
TO OUTPUT PATCHBAY TO SOLO L

TO SOLO R
TO MONITOR SELECT S-4000S OUTPUT
TO REC SELECT MAX 40 OUTPUTS
EFFECTS FX FX
TO FX SOURCE SELECT SO-DA4
INPUT OUTPUT
SELECT SELECT D/A
CH 1 FX INSERT OUT
IN LEVEL FX 1 OUT LEVEL
To CH 1 FX INSERT IN
CH 48 FX INSERT OUT To CH 48 FX INSERT IN MATRIX 1-8 SO-AES4
EFFECT AES/EBU
AUX 1 FX INSERT OUT To AUX 1 FX INSERT IN SRC

TO MTX 1, 3...7
AUX 16 FX INSERT OUT 31 BAND GEQ To AUX 16 FX INSERT IN MATRIX SEND
(FROM MAIN) TO MTX 2, 4...8
31 BAND GEQ
POST ATT PRE FADER POST FADER OUTPUT LEVEL
MATRIX 1 FX INSERT OUT To MATRIX 1 FX INSERT IN TO MTX 1, 3...7
MATRIX 8 FX INSERT OUT FX 2 To MATRIX 8 FX INSERT IN MATRIX SEND
TO MTX 2, 4...8
Same as the above (FROM AUX 1-16)
EXT FX FX FADER D/A CONSOLE OUTPUT 1-8
INSERT INSERT BAL MUTE GEQ
MAIN L FX INSERT OUT FX 3 To MAIN L FX INSERT IN AUX 1-16 SEND (FROM MAIN)
INSERT MATRIX 1-8
MAIN R FX INSERT OUT Same as the above To MAIN R FX INSERT IN MAIN L SOLO ATT OUT
MAIN R SOLO
AUX 1 OUT CH SELECT
FX 4 To INPUT PATCHBAY
FROM CH A
AUX 16 OUT Same as the above SW SEND MTX SOLO COAXIAL
LINK
TO SOLO L
DIRECT OUT 1 PAN DIGITAL OUT
MAIN SEND (FROM AUX 1-16) TO SOLO R OPTICAL
AUX 1-16 SOLO TO MTX 2, 4...8
31 BAND GEQ DIRECT OUT 48 TO MONITOR SELECT
GEQ GEQ FROM CH B
INPUT OUTPUT TO REC SELECT
Same as the above
SELECT SELECT MATRIX 1-8 SOLO TO MTX 2, 4...8
IN LEVEL OUT LEVEL
AUX 1 GEQ INSERT OUT
GEQ 1 To AUX 1 GEQ INSERT IN TALKBACK
OSCILLATOR
AUX 16 GEQ INSERT OUT 31 BAND GEQ To AUX 16 GEQ INSERT IN
MATRIX 1 GEQ INSERT OUT GEQ 2 To MATRIX 1 GEQ INSERT IN

Same as the above
MATRIX 8 GEQ INSERT OUT To MATRIX 8 GEQ INSERT IN MONITOR USB MEMORY RECORDER
REC DIRECT OUT
GEQ 3 SOLO
LEVEL
USB 1-48
Same as the above LEVEL REC MEMORY
SELECT OSCILLATOR
MAIN L GEQ INSERT OUT To MAIN L GEQ INSERT IN REC
MAIN R GEQ INSERT OUT GEQ 4 To MAIN R GEQ INSERT IN AUX 1 OUT LEVEL TALKBACK
Same as the above
AUX 16 OUT
MAIN OUT L USB MEMORY TO INPUT
RECORDER PATCHBAY
MONITOR MAIN OUT R REC
EXTERNAL FX EXT EXT
INSERT
SELECT MAIN MONO OUT OUT L,R
INSERT
CONSOLE INPUT 1-8 IN AUX 1 OUT MONITOR
OUT MATRIX 1 OUT
LEVEL TO MONITOR
CH 1 EXT FX INSERT OUT To CH 1 EXT FX INSERT IN AUX 16 OUT
SOLO MONITOR MATRIX 8 OUT SELECT
CH 48 EXT FX INSERT OUT To CH 48 EXT FX INSERT IN MAIN OUT L LOGIC LEVEL
SEND RETURN MAIN OUT R
MONITOR OUT L
AUX 1 EXT FX INSERT OUT SEND LEVEL RETURN LEVEL To AUX 1 EXT FX INSERT IN MAIN MONO OUT
LEVEL LEVEL
AUX 16 EXT FX INSERT OUT EXT FX 1-8 To AUX 16 EXT FX INSERT IN MATRIX 1 OUT MONITOR OUT R
MATRIX 8 OUT PHONES

MATRIX 1 EXT FX INSERT OUT To MATRIX 1 EXT FX INSERT IN LEVEL
REC OUT L
PHONES
MATRIX 8 EXT FX INSERT OUT To MATRIX 8 EXT FX INSERT IN D/A OUT
REC OUT R
MAIN L EXT FX INSERT OUT To MAIN L EXT FX INSERT IN
MAIN R EXT FX INSERT OUT To MAIN R EXT FX INSERT IN LR 1 2 16 L R
MAIN AUX SOLO
For EU Countries
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is
CAUTION The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an Apparatus containing incorrectly replaced.
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the Replace only with the same or
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the Lithium batteries equivalent type recommended by the
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to manufacturer.
ATTENTION: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. Discard used batteries according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). intended to alert the user to the presence of important
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the ADVARSEL! VARNING
literature accompanying the product. Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
fejlagtig håndtering. Använd samma batterityp eller en
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av
samme fabrikat og type. apparattillverkaren.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til Kassera använt batteri enligt
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS. leverandøren. fabrikantens instruktion.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ADVARSEL

Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av
VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS batteri.

Benytt samme batteritype eller en
tilsvarende type anbefalt av
virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan
laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
WARNING - When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following: apparatfabrikanten. tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
1. Read these instructions. 10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched fabrikantens instruks joner.
2. Keep these instructions. particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
3. Heed all warnings. point where they exit from the apparatus. For EU Countries
4. Follow all instructions. 11. Only use attachments/accessories specified
5. Do not use this apparatus near water. by the manufacturer. This product complies with the requirements of EMCD 2004/108/EC and LVD 2006/95/EC.
6. Clean only with a dry cloth. 12. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
7. Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in unused for long periods of time.
accordance with the manufacturers instructions. 13. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing For the USA
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
amplifiers) that produce heat. has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus,
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with not operate normally, or has been dropped. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
replacement of the obsolete outlet. television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
For the U.K.
WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE. (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
GREEN-AND-YELLOW: EARTH, BLUE: NEUTRAL, BROWN: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the
letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. For Canada
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
CAUTION: Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with same or equivalent type.
For the USA
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Compliance Information Statement
Model Name : M-400
Type of Equipment : Digital Mixer
Responsible Party : Roland Systems Group U.S.
Address : 425 Sequoia Drive, Suite 114, Bellingham, WA 98226
Telephone : (360) 594-4282
2
Information
When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as
shown below.
Version 1.5
FINLAND RUSSIA
ASIA EUROPE Roland Scandinavia As, MuTek
OCEANIA
Filial Finland Dorozhnaya ul.3,korp.6
Roland Corporation
INDONESIA AUSTRIA/BELGIUM/ Elannontie 5 117 545 Moscow, RUSSIA
Australia Pty.,Ltd.
FRANCE/GERMANY/
Owner’s Manual
FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND TEL: (095) 981-4967
PT. Citra IntiRama 38 Campbell Avenue
TEL: (0)9 68 24 020
JL. Cideng Timur No. 15J-15O HOLLAND/ Dee Why West, NSW 2099
Jakarta Pusat LUXEMBOURG/ AUSTRALIA
INDONESIA SLOVAKIA
TEL: (021) 632-4170 PORTUGAL/SPAIN/ HUNGARY DAN Acoustic s.r.o. For Australia
SWITZERLAND Roland East Europe Ltd. Povazská 18. TEL: (02) 9982 8266
Roland Iberia, S.L. Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83 SK - 940 01 Nové Zámky For New Zealand
Paseo García Faria, 33-35 H-2046 Torokbalint, HUNGARY TEL: (035) 6424 330 TEL: (09) 3098 715
TAIWAN 08005 Barcelona SPAIN TEL: (23) 511011
ROLAND TAIWAN TEL: 93 493 91 00
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD. SWEDEN
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung Shan NORWAY Roland Scandinavia A/S NORTH AMERICA
N.Road Sec.2, Taipei, TAIWAN, CROATIA Roland Scandinavia Avd. SWEDISH SALES OFFICE
R.O.C. ART-CENTAR Kontor Norge Danvik Center 28, 2 tr. CANADA
TEL: (02) 2561 3339 Degenova 3. Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95 S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN Roland Canada Ltd.
HR - 10000 Zagreb Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo TEL: (0)8 702 00 20 (Head Office)
Ver.1.5
TEL: (1) 466 8493 NORWAY 5480 Parkwood Way, Richmond
SINGAPORE/ TEL: 2273 0074 B. C., V6V 2M4 CANADA
MALAYSIA UKRAINE TEL: (604) 270 6626
Roland Asia Pacific Sdn. CZECH REP. EURHYTHMICS Ltd.
Bhd. CZECH REPUBLIC POLAND P.O.Box: 37-a. Roland Canada Ltd.
DISTRIBUTOR s.r.o ROLAND POLSKA SP. Z O.O. Nedecey Str. 30 (Toronto Office)
45-1, Block C2, Jalan PJU 1/39, 170 Admiral Boulevard
Voctárova 247/16 UL. Gibraltarska 4. UA - 89600 Mukachevo,
Dataran Prima, 47301 Petaling Mississauga ON L5T 2N6
CZ - 180 00 PRAHA 8, PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND UKRAINE
Jaya, Selangor, MALAYSIA CANADA
CZECH REP. TEL: (022) 679 44 19 TEL: (03131) 414-40
TEL: 3-7805-3263 TEL: (905) 362 9707
TEL: (2) 830 20270
Owner’s Manual
CENTRAL/LATIN ROMANIA UNITED KINGDOM/
DENMARK IRELAND U. S. A.
AMERICA FBS LINES
Piata Libertatii 1, Roland Systems Group U.S.
Roland Scandinavia A/S Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880, 535500 Gheorgheni, ROMANIA Atlantic Close, Swansea 425 Sequoia Drive Suite 114,
BRAZIL TEL: (266) 364 609 Bellingham, Washington,
DK-2100 Copenhagen Enterprise Park, Swansea
Roland Brasil Ltda. 98226 USA
DENMARK SA7 9FJ,
Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B TEL: 360-594-4282
TEL: 3916 6200 UNITED KINGDOM
Parque Industrial San Jose
TEL: (01792) 702701
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL
TEL: (011) 4615 5666
Other CENTRAL/
LATIN AMERICA
Roland Systems Group U.S.
425 Sequoia Drive Suite 114,
Bellingham, Washington,
98226 USA
TEL: 360-594-4282
As of Oct. 1, 2007 (RSS)
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “IMPORTANT
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” (p. 2), “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” (p. 3–5), and
“IMPORTANT NOTES” (p. 6–7). These sections provide important
information concerning the proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in
order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature
provided by your new unit, Owner’s manual should be read in its entirety.
The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference.
Copyright © 2008 ROLAND CORPORATION

5100001157 08-07-1N All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form
* 5 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 5 7 - 0 1 * without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.

m400 Manual v15

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

m400 Manual v15

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Information

As of Oct. 1, 2007 (RSS)

Copyright © 2008 ROLAND CORPORATION

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ADVARSEL

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS batteri.

USING THE UNIT SAFELY

(This instrument’s phantom power: +48V DC,

Repairs and Data

Memory Backup Before Using USB memory

• Support for RS-232C transmission/reception (p. 190)

Functionality added in version Other settings

Input channels Improvements in panel operation

Output patchbay Improvements in screen display

Effects and 31-band GEQ

Scene memory ....................................................................................157

Features of the M-400

Ethernet Audio Communication) devices

REAC port for splitting or backup

Flexible input/output environment

48-channel 18-bus mixer

Four effects that can be used for send/return or as inserts

Up to twelve 31-band GEQ units

Up to eight external effects can be inserted

Equipped with USB Memory Recorder for live recording or background

Check the included items Basic knowledge about REAC

• Ferrite cores (three) REAC can do the following.

• Owner’s manual (the document you’re reading)

Names About cables

For a more detailed description of connections, refer to “REAC

REAC A MASTER REAC B MASTER

Cautions for handling Cat5e cables

Placement About the REAC caps

1. Spread the tabs, and open the ferrite core.

About the REAC connector covers

3. Close the ferrite core until you hear it snap shut.

Remove the REAC connector cover if you’re using an EtherCon

AC power connections Attaching the power cord hook

Use only the supplied power cords to prevent damage to the

Attaching the power cord clamp

2. As shown in the illustration, fit the power cord hook over

Turning the power on/off Turning the power off

3 5 6 5. Turn off the power of the equipment connected to the audio

To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other

1. Connect your input/output units (S-1608, S-0816, S-4000S,

5. Turn on the power of your input/output units.

If your input/output unit is the S-1608 or S-0816, use the power

This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval

About the internal lithium À propos de

1. Faire une copie de sauvegarde des réglages du mélangeur

2. Switch off the M-400’s power, and disconnect the power

3. Comme le montre l’illustration, retirer les deux vis qui

4. Remove the old battery, and insert the new battery.

About USB memory

USB memory used with the USB Memory Recorder must

About the USB memory cover

Switch the user to ADMIN

2. In the USER section, press [DISP] to access the USER screen.

3. In INTERNAL MEMORY, choose “ADMIN” and press [F1 (CHANGE USER)].

Enter the password and press [F8 (OK)].

5. A message will indicate that the user setting has switched.

Press [F8 (OK)] to close the message.

Return the M-400’s setting to the default state

2. Press [F1 (INIT)].

The INITIALIZE popup will appear.